Intro To Solid Modeling I Ra-t-151-WF-01 PreProduction Inter

ro
du ct io
Pr e P
At ASCENT, we strive to produce training materials of the highest quality. If you have any comments or suggestions regarding this training manual, please contact us: education@ascenteck.com
Delivered to you by:
Fo
rI
RA-T-151-WF-01-Pre-Production
nt
Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I Wildfire Pre-Production Release
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Pr e P ro du ct io n Fo rI nt er na
lU
se
nl y
ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge Introduction to Solid Modeling I Wildfire Pre-Production Release PRINTING HISTORY Document Number RA-T-151-WF-01-Pre-Pr oduction Date 01/24/03 Description
Pr e P
ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge, 2002 Printed in the United States of America, all rights reserved. No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form by any photographic, electronic, mechanical or other means or used in any information storage and retrieval system without the written permission of ASCENT, a division of Rand Technologies of Michigan, Inc.
ro
du ct io
ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge is a division of RAND Worldwide, providing custom developed knowledge products and services for leading engineering software applications. ASCENT is focused on specializing in the creation of education programs that incorporate the best of classroom learning and technology-based training offerings.
Fo
Prepared and Produced by ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge 5285 Solar Dr. Mississauga, Ontario Canada L4W 5B8 www.ASCENTed.com
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
Initial Printing for Wildfire Pre-Production Release
nl y
lU
se
nl y
ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge
Table of Contents
Table of Contents .............................................................................. i Chapter 1 Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER.................................. 1-1 1.1 1.2
Solid Modeling............................................................... 1-3 Pro/ENGINEER Fundamentals ..................................... 1-5 Feature-Based...................................................... 1-5 Parametric ............................................................ 1-8 Associative ........................................................... 1-9 Relations ............................................................ 1-10 Assembly Management...................................... 1-10 Design Intent ............................................................... 1-11 Dimensioning Scheme ....................................... 1-11 Symmetrical Geometry....................................... 1-12 Depth Options .................................................... 1-12
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
Chapter 2 Creating the Base Feature ......................................... 2-1 2.1 Creating a New Part ...................................................... 2-3 General Steps ................................................................ 2-3 Create a new part ..................................................... 2-4 Templates............................................................. 2-4 Default Datum Planes .......................................... 2-6 Model Tree ........................................................... 2-7 Select the type of solid feature ................................. 2-7 Feature Forms...................................................... 2-7
i
Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I
Exercise 1a The Basics ....................................................... 1-27 Exercise 1b Orienting and Editing the Model.................... 1-41 Exercise 1c Query Select .................................................... 1-45
Fo
rI
nt
1.4
Pro/ENGINEER Interface ............................................ 1-13 User Interface..................................................... 1-13 Menus................................................................. 1-14 Toolbars ............................................................. 1-16 Feature Creation Controls .................................. 1-17 Selection Filter.................................................... 1-19 Message Window ............................................... 1-19 Help Line ............................................................ 1-20 Model Tree ......................................................... 1-20 Modes................................................................. 1-21 Multiple Windows ............................................... 1-21 File Naming ........................................................ 1-22 Model Orientation ............................................... 1-22 Selecting Hidden Features ................................. 1-24
er
na
1.3
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 2a Extruded Base Features.................................. 2-21 Exercise 2c Creating Additional Parts............................... 2-41 Chapter 3 Creating Pick and Place Features............................. 3-1 3.1 Creating an Edge Chamfer........................................... 3-3 General Steps ................................................................ 3-3 Start the creation of the feature ................................ 3-3 Select the placement references .............................. 3-4 Define the dimensioning scheme ............................. 3-4 Dimension Types ................................................. 3-4 Dimension Values ................................................ 3-5 Complete the feature ................................................ 3-5 Creating a Corner Chamfer .......................................... 3-6 General Steps ................................................................ 3-6 Start the creation of the feature ................................ 3-6 Select the placement reference ................................ 3-7 Define the dimensioning scheme ............................. 3-7 Complete the feature ................................................ 3-7 Creating Rounds ........................................................... 3-8 General Steps ................................................................ 3-8 Start the creation of the feature ................................ 3-8 Select the placement references .............................. 3-9 Constant, Edge Chain Round .............................. 3-9 Variable, Edge Chain ........................................... 3-9 Full Round.......................................................... 3-11 Define the dimensions of the feature ...................... 3-12 Complete the feature .............................................. 3-12 Creating Simple, Straight Holes ................................ 3-13 General Steps .............................................................. 3-13 Start the creation of the feature .............................. 3-13 Select the placement references ............................ 3-14 Linear Placement ............................................... 3-14 Coaxial Placement ............................................. 3-16 Define the dimensions for the feature ..................... 3-17 Define the depth options of the feature .................. 3-18 Depth Options .................................................... 3-19 Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I
3.2
Pr e P
ro
ii
du ct io
3.3
3.4
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
Exercise 2b Extruded Base Protrusions II ......................... 2-33
nl y
Sketch the section of the feature .............................. 2-9 Sketch Plane ........................................................ 2-9 Sketch Orientation.............................................. 2-12 Sketching ........................................................... 2-13 Dimensions ........................................................ 2-15 Constraints ......................................................... 2-16 Define the depth ..................................................... 2-18 Make changes to the protrusion ............................. 2-19
Side Options....................................................... 3-20 Complete the feature .............................................. 3-21 3.5 Redefining Pick and Place Features ........................ 3-22 Exercise 3a Pick and Place Features .................................. 3-23 Exercise 3c Rounds............................................................. 3-41
Chapter 4 Sketching Geometry................................................... 4-1
du ct io
4.2
Pr e P
ro
4.3
Exercise 4a Sketch Datum Curve in a New Part ............... 4-25 Exercise 4b Sketch Datum Curve on Existing Geometry. 4-41 Exercise 4c Creating Sketched Datum Curves ................. 4-51
Fo
Sketching Datum Curves............................................ 4-19 General Steps .............................................................. 4-19 Start the creation of the sketched datum curve ...... 4-19 Sketch the datum curve .......................................... 4-20 Sketch Plane ...................................................... 4-20 Sketch Orientation.............................................. 4-20 Complete the sketched datum curve ...................... 4-21 Interactive Exercise .................................................... 4-22
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
4.1
Sketching Geometry ..................................................... 4-3 General Steps ................................................................ 4-3 Select sketching references ...................................... 4-4 Sketch the geometry ................................................. 4-5 Construction Geometry ........................................ 4-6 Use sketching tools to edit the sketched geometry 4-7 Divide ................................................................... 4-7 Corner .................................................................. 4-7 Dynamic Trim ....................................................... 4-8 Mirror .................................................................... 4-9 Add and delete constraints as needed ..................... 4-9 Horizontal and Vertical ....................................... 4-10 Tangent .............................................................. 4-10 Equal Length ...................................................... 4-10 Point on Entity .................................................... 4-11 Equal Radius/Diameter ...................................... 4-11 Horizontal and Vertical Alignment ...................... 4-12 Constraint Control .............................................. 4-12 Assigning Constraints......................................... 4-13 Add and delete dimensions as needed ................... 4-15 Linear Dimensions.............................................. 4-16 Center/ Tangential Dimensions .......................... 4-17 Radius/Diameter Dimensions............................. 4-18 Modify the dimensions ............................................ 4-18 Complete the sketch ............................................... 4-18
nl y
iii
Exercise 3b Coaxial Hole .................................................... 3-35
Chapter 5 Advanced Sketching Tools........................................ 5-1 5.1 Advanced Editing Tools ............................................... 5-3 Select the geometry to edit ....................................... 5-3 Select the sketching tool to use ................................ 5-3 Scale, Rotate, and Translate................................ 5-3 Import ................................................................... 5-4 Copy..................................................................... 5-5 Advanced Constraints.................................................. 5-7 Middle................................................................... 5-7 Coincident ............................................................ 5-8 Symmetry ............................................................. 5-8 Collinear Constraint.............................................. 5-9 Parallel and Perpendicular ................................... 5-9 Advanced Dimension Styles...................................... 5-11 Angular Dimensions ........................................... 5-11 Revolved Section Dimensions ........................... 5-12 Resolving Dimension and Constraint Conflicts....... 5-13 Modify and Move Dimensions ................................... 5-14 Modify Dimensions............................................. 5-14 Move Dimensions............................................... 5-15 Setting Sketcher Preferences .................................... 5-16 Display tab ......................................................... 5-16 Constraints tab ................................................... 5-18 Parameters tab................................................... 5-19
5.3
5.4
5.5 5.6
du ct io
Chapter 6 Sketched Secondary Features .................................. 6-1 6.1 Creating Extruded Secondary Features ..................... 6-3 General Steps ................................................................ 6-3 Start the creation of the extrusion ............................. 6-3 Create or select the sketch ....................................... 6-4 Thicken the section, if necessary ............................. 6-4 Specify cut or protrusion for the extruded feature .... 6-6 Specify the depth direction for feature creation ........ 6-7 Specify depth options for feature creation ................ 6-8 Depth Options ...................................................... 6-8 Side Options......................................................... 6-8 Complete the feature ................................................ 6-9 Creating Revolved Secondary Features .................. 6-10 General Steps .............................................................. 6-10 Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I
Pr e P
ro
iv
Exercise 5a Editing Sketched Datum Curves ................... 5-21 Exercise 5b Revolving an Imported Sketch ...................... 5-35 Exercise 5c Creating Sketched Datum Curves ................. 5-43
6.2
Fo
5.7
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
5.2
Using Existing Geometry ............................................. 5-6
nl y
6.3
6.4
Creation Sequence...................................................... 6-19
Exercise 6a Creating a Sketched Revolve......................... 6-21 Exercise 6b Creating Sketched Extrusions....................... 6-31 Exercise 6c Creating Sketched Extrusions ....................... 6-39 Exercise 6d Creating Sketched Extrusions....................... 6-45
7.1
7.2
du ct io
Chapter 8 Additional Features & Functions .............................. 8-1 8.1 Radial Holes................................................................... 8-3 General Steps ................................................................ 8-3 Start the creation of the hole ..................................... 8-4 Select the placement references .............................. 8-4 Radial Hole on a planar surface ........................... 8-4 Radial Hole on a cylinder ..................................... 8-5 Define the dimensions of the feature ........................ 8-6 Define the depth options of the hole ......................... 8-7 Standard Holes............................................................. 8-8 General Steps ................................................................ 8-8 Start the creation of the hole ..................................... 8-8 Select the placement references .............................. 8-8 Modify the properties and dimensions for the hole ... 8-9
v
Pr e P
ro
Exercise 7a Creating Datum Features ............................... 7-15 Exercise 7b Additional References .................................... 7-25
8.2
Fo
Creating Datum Planes................................................. 7-3 General Steps ................................................................ 7-4 Start the creation of the datum plane ........................ 7-5 Select the placement references and constraints ..... 7-5
Creating Datum Axes.................................................. 7-11 General Steps .............................................................. 7-11 Start the creation of the datum axis ........................ 7-12 Select placement references and constraints ......... 7-13
rI
nt
Chapter 7 Creating Datum Features ........................................... 7-1
er
na
lU
se
Editing Sketched Secondary Features..................... 6-16 Making Changes ................................................ 6-16 Feature Creation Failures................................... 6-17
nl y
Start the creation of the revolved feature ................ 6-10 Create or select the sketch ..................................... 6-11 Thicken the section, as needed .............................. 6-12 Specify the cut or protrusion for the revolved feature 6-13 Specify the angle of revolution ................................ 6-14 Depth Options .................................................... 6-15 Side Options....................................................... 6-15 Complete the feature .............................................. 6-15
8.3
Sketched Holes .......................................................... 8-11 General Steps .............................................................. 8-11 Start the creation of the hole .................................. 8-11 Select the placement references ............................ 8-12 Sketch the hole cross-section ................................. 8-12 Drafts............................................................................ 8-13 General Steps .............................................................. 8-13 Start the creation of the draft .................................. 8-13 Select the surfaces that require draft ...................... 8-13 Select the draft hinges ............................................ 8-14 Select the pull direction .......................................... 8-15 Enter the draft dimension ....................................... 8-16
8.4
8.6
Creating Ribs............................................................... 8-23 General Steps .............................................................. 8-23 Start the creation of the rib ..................................... 8-23 Sketch or select the section of the rib ..................... 8-24 Define the depth of the rib ...................................... 8-25
8.7
du ct io
8.8
Pr e P
ro
8.9
Exercise 8a Additional Features ........................................ 8-35 Exercise 8b Placement of radial holes .............................. 8-41 Chapter 9 Managing Pro/ENGINEER Files................................. 9-1 9.1 Managing Pro/ENGINEER Files ................................... 9-3 Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I
vi
Reordering Features................................................... 8-26 General Steps .............................................................. 8-26 Drag and drop features in the model tree ............... 8-26 Inserting Features....................................................... 8-28 General Steps .............................................................. 8-28 Activate Insert Mode ............................................... 8-28 Insert features as required ...................................... 8-30 Cancel Insert Mode ................................................ 8-31 Changing Part Units .................................................. 8-32 General Steps .............................................................. 8-32 Start the change of units ......................................... 8-32 Define the new system of units ............................... 8-33 Define the conversion method ................................ 8-33
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
8.5
Creating Shells........................................................... 8-17 Open Shell ......................................................... 8-17 Closed/Internal Cavity Shell ............................... 8-17 General Steps .............................................................. 8-18 Start the creation of the shell .................................. 8-18 Select the surfaces for removal .............................. 8-18 Shell Restrictions ............................................... 8-19 Define the wall thickness ........................................ 8-19 Select surfaces with a non-default wall thickness ... 8-21
se
nl y
Exercise 9a Managing Files ................................................. 9-11 Chapter 10 Creating Relations .................................................. 10-1
du ct io
Exercise 10a Relations ...................................................... 10-15 Goal.................................................................. 10-15
Chapter 11 Duplication Tools.................................................... 11-1 11.1 Dimension Patterns ................................................... 11-3 General Steps .............................................................. 11-3 Start the creation of the pattern .............................. 11-4 Select the type of pattern to create ......................... 11-4 Identical .............................................................. 11-4 Variable .............................................................. 11-5 General............................................................... 11-5 Specify the dimensions in one or two directions ..... 11-7 First Direction ..................................................... 11-8 Second Direction ................................................ 11-9 Specify the number of pattern members ............... 11-10 Modify the pattern as necessary ........................... 11-10 Edit ................................................................... 11-10
vii
Pr e P
ro
Fo
rI
nt
er
10.1
Creating Relations ...................................................... 10-3 General Steps .............................................................. 10-3 Start the creation of the relation .............................. 10-3 Determine the necessary dimension symbols ........ 10-4 Enter the equation .................................................. 10-5 Relation Types ................................................... 10-5 Comments .......................................................... 10-7 Operators ........................................................... 10-8 Functions............................................................ 10-8 Parameters......................................................... 10-9 Sort Relation..................................................... 10-12 Flex the model ...................................................... 10-12
na
lU
General Steps ................................................................ 9-3 Save initial model design and any subsequent changes made to the model .................................................... 9-4 Save ..................................................................... 9-4 Rename................................................................ 9-4 Save a Copy......................................................... 9-5 Backup ................................................................. 9-6 Delete any unwanted versions .................................. 9-7 Delete old Versions .............................................. 9-7 Delete all Versions ............................................... 9-8 Close the window ...................................................... 9-8 Erase the file from memory ....................................... 9-8 Erasing Current Files............................................ 9-8 Erasing Not Displayed Files ................................. 9-8
se
nl y
Edit Definition ................................................... 11-11 Delete Pattern .................................................. 11-11 11.2 Mirroring Part Geometry ......................................... 11-12 General Steps ............................................................ 11-12 Start the mirroring process ................................... 11-12 Specify the options for mirroring ........................... 11-13 Specify the features to mirror ............................... 11-14 Select ............................................................... 11-14 All Feat ............................................................. 11-14 Select the plane about which to mirror the features 11-14 Modify the mirrored feature .................................. 11-14 Mirroring Parts ......................................................... 11-15 General Steps ............................................................ 11-15 Start the mirroring process ................................... 11-16 Select the plane to mirror the model about ........... 11-16 Modify the mirrored part ....................................... 11-17
11.3
Exercise 11b Mirror / Pattern ............................................ 11-29
du ct io
12.2
ro
12.3
Pr e P
Creating Mapkeys .................................................... 12-10 General Steps ............................................................ 12-10 Open the mapkey dialog box ................................ 12-10 Specify the key sequence, name and description 12-11 Record the macro steps ....................................... 12-12 Save the mapkey .................................................. 12-12 Customizing the Interface ........................................ 12-13 General Steps ............................................................ 12-13 Open the customize dialog box ............................ 12-13 Make the desired changes ................................... 12-14 Toolbars ........................................................... 12-14 Commands....................................................... 12-14 Navigation ........................................................ 12-20 Browser ............................................................ 12-21 Option............................................................... 12-22 Save the changes ................................................. 12-22
viii
Fo
12.1
Customizing the config.pro ....................................... 12-4 General Steps .............................................................. 12-4 Open the config.pro configuration file ..................... 12-4 Set the options and values ..................................... 12-6 Searching for Configuration Options .................. 12-7 Implement the changes .......................................... 12-8 Restart the Pro/ENGINEER session ...................... 12-8
rI
Chapter 12 Customizing Pro/ENGINEER ................................. 12-1
nt
Exercise 11c Copy/Mirror.................................................. 11-33
er
Exercise 11a Patterning .................................................... 11-19
na
lU
se
nl y
12.4
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
13.1
Creating a New Drawing ............................................ 13-3 General Steps .............................................................. 13-3 Create a new drawing ............................................. 13-3 Templates........................................................... 13-5 Formats .............................................................. 13-5 Place the first drawing view .................................... 13-6 Add additional views ............................................... 13-7 View Type........................................................... 13-9 View Options .................................................... 13-10 Cross-Section................................................... 13-10 Scale ................................................................ 13-11 Manipulate drawing views, as necessary ............. 13-12 Delete Views .................................................... 13-12 Move Views ...................................................... 13-12 View Type......................................................... 13-12 Change Scale................................................... 13-12 Reorient............................................................ 13-13 Cross-Section................................................... 13-13 Boundaries ....................................................... 13-13 View Display..................................................... 13-13 Detail the drawing ................................................. 13-14 Dimensions....................................................... 13-14 Notes ................................................................ 13-17 ......................................................................... 13-17 Manipulate detail items, as necessary .................. 13-18 Move Detail Items............................................. 13-18 Erase ................................................................ 13-18
ix
nt
Chapter 13 Drawing Basics ....................................................... 13-1
er
Exercise 12a Customization ............................................. 12-33
na
lU
se
12.5
Customizing the System colors............................... 12-27 General Steps ............................................................ 12-27 Open the System Colors dialog box ..................... 12-28 Make the desired changes .................................... 12-29 Graphics ........................................................... 12-29 User Interface................................................... 12-30 Datum............................................................... 12-30 Geometry.......................................................... 12-30 Scheme ............................................................ 12-31 Save the changes ................................................. 12-31
nl y
Configuring the Model Tree ..................................... 12-23 General Steps ............................................................ 12-23 Activate model tree settings .................................. 12-23 Make the desired changes .................................... 12-24 Tree Filters ....................................................... 12-24 Tree Columns................................................... 12-24 Save the settings .................................................. 12-26
Edit Values ....................................................... 13-19 Flip Arrows ....................................................... 13-19 Move Item to View............................................ 13-19 Dimensional Tolerances................................... 13-19 Print (or Plot) the drawing ..................................... 13-20 Exercise 13a Create a Drawing......................................... 13-21 Exercise 13b Create a Drawing with a Template ............ 13-35
Appendix B ....................................................................................B-1 Appendix D ....................................................................................D-1
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
Appendix C ....................................................................................C-1
se
Appendix A ....................................................................................A-1
Exercise 13c Create a Drawing using Additional Tools. 13-37
nl y
This chapter introduces:
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
9Solid Modeling 9Pro/ENGINEER Fundamentals 9Design Intent 9Pro/ENGINEER Interface
Understanding how Pro/ENGINEER models are built and how they react to change is fundamental to designing robust and intelligent models. In addition, learning the Pro/ENGINEER working environment is important. The environment is made up of many different components (e.g., toolbars, dashboards, menus). Learning to interact with all of the components will increase your modeling efficiency.
Fo
rI
Introduction to Pro/ENGINEER
nt
er
Chapter 1
na
lU
11
se
nl y
12
lU
se
nl y
1.1 Solid Modeling

Solid modeling is the creation and manipulation of solid, threedimensional (3D) representations of a model. Pro/ENGINEER is used to design solid 3D part models and create drawings of parts, as shown in Figure 11. The part models and drawings are then used for manufacturing.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
Pro/ENGINEER can produce two kinds of 3D models: Solid and Surface (surface models are covered in the Pro/ENGINEER Surface Design training course). Solid models can be displayed with wireframe edges shown, with hidden edges shown, with hidden edges not shown, and in shaded form.
nt
er
Figure 11
na
lU
13
Part model is referenced to create drawing views.
se
nl y
You can also display 3D models of assemblies. You can place existing models relative to one another within an assembly. The assemblies can then be referenced by a drawing, as shown in Figure 12.
er
na Pr e P ro du ct io n Fo
14
rI
nt
Figure 12
lU
Assembly models can be referenced to create drawing views
Models can be placed relative to one another to create an assembly
se
nl y
1.2 Pro/ENGINEER Fundamentals

Pro/ENGINEER consists of the following five key attributes: Feature-based Parametric Associative Relations Assembly management
du ct io
Extruded features can either add or remove material from the model. Extrusions that add material are known as protrusions in the model. Extrusions that remove material are known as cuts in the model.
nt
er
na
hole
Feature-Based
Pro/ENGINEER is a feature-based modeling program, which means that a part evolves by creating features one by one until it is complete. Each feature is individually recognized by the system. Figure 13 shows a part model consisting of several individual features. extrude (base feature) copied feature shell
Fo
rI
lU
rounds
se
extrude Figure 13
15
drafts
ro
Pr e P
To start a design, create a simple extruded base feature that approximates the shape of the part and continue to add additional features until the part is complete, as shown in Figure 14.
nl y
1st (Base) Feature: Extrude
2nd Feature: Drafts
3rd Feature: Rounds
4th Feature: Shell
5th Feature: Extrude
du ct io
Fo
The following two primary feature types are discussed in this course: Sketched Pick and place
Pr e P
ro
Sketched features
A "sketched feature" is created by sketching its shape or profile. A sketched feature can be any shape and size. To create a sketched feature, you must sketch a 2D cross-section on the placement surface, then add dimensions to define and locate the sketched geometry with respect to the model, as shown in Figure 15.
16
rI
7th Feature: Copy
nt
Figure 14
er
na
lU
se
6th Feature: Hole
nl y
Pick and Place features
du ct io
Select the axes in the Locate the hole feature center of the protrusion as the reference. on this surface. Figure 16
ro
Parent/Child Relationships
Feature-based modeling requires that features be added one by one. As a result, "parent/child relationships" are created as new features reference existing features. For example, the hole shown in Figure 16 cannot exist without the cylindrical extruded feature because the holes placement references exist within the extrusion. Parent/child relationships are created with all features.
Pr e P
Parent/child relationships are formed between features as a model is created.
Fo
rI
References are discussed in Chapter 2.
nt
er
A "pick and place" feature is a feature for which a shape is predefined. For example, the cross-section of a hole feature is a circle. To create a pick and place feature, you must define the location of the feature and define the references required to locate the feature with respect to the existing geometry. An example of a pick and place hole feature is shown in Figure 16.
na
lU
se
17
Figure 15
nl y
Parametric
Pr e P
18
ro
du ct io
Dimensioning is an important step in the modeling process. In addition to the dimensions that are created automatically, you can create your own dimensions. When creating your own dimensions, consider those that will be shown in drawings and be aware of resulting parent/child relationships. Consider changes that may be made to the model in the future and how easily the dimensions facilitate these changes. Periodically modify dimensions to test what if scenarios. This is called flexing the model and helps eliminate future problems by verifying that the model behaves as expected when changes are incorporated.
Fo
rI
nt
Figure 17
er
Pro/ENGINEER automatically assigns names (e.g., d1,d2) to dimensions. You can display either the name or value of the dimension by selecting the dimension, pressing the right mouse button, and clicking Info > Switch Dim in the pop-up menu.
na
lU
se
nl y
Pro/ENGINEER is a parametric modeling tool. When creating geometry, precise dimensions are not required; only a conceptual idea of the shape of the object is needed. Geometry is said to be dimension-driven because dimensions are automatically applied to a part in Pro/ENGINEER; however, you can change the applied dimensions and redimension as necessary. Dimension values can be modified to incorporate changes in a model, as shown in Figure 17.
Associative
Pro/ENGINEER is fully associative, which means it operates in a concurrent engineering environment. You can work with the same model in different modes (e.g., Part mode, Assembly mode, Drawing mode), and all modes are fully associative. Therefore, changes made to a model in any of the modes propagate to all other modes.
Assembly mode
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
Drawing mode
er
Figure 18
na
lU
19
se
A change made anywhere is a change made everywhere.
Part mode
nl y
Relations
Fo
Pr e P
110
ro
du ct io
Assembly Management
Models built in Pro/ENGINEER Part mode can be used as components in an assembly. Assemblies are created by constraining components with respect to one another, rather than constraining relative to one global position. The addition of these constraints incorporates parent/child relationships between components and builds intelligent assemblies. Similar to features in Part mode, components in Assembly mode are assigned a unique internal identification number called a "session ID" (e.g., id1, id15, id34). The session id can be used to establish relations between the components in the assembly. The session id is important because without it all the components would have similar dimension symbols.
rI
nt
Figure 19
er
na
lU
se
/* Relations to center hole d4=d1/2 d3=d2/2
nl y
Pro/ENGINEER relations are user-defined mathematical equations used to capture and control design intent. The ability to use relations in a model becomes extremely important in making a robust model. A relation is created by writing an equation using dimensions or parameters from the model. For example, the following relation can be used to keep a hole centered on a block, as shown in Figure 19:
1.3 Design Intent
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
Dimensioning Scheme
One method of capturing design intent is to determine the features dimensioning scheme. A part with a hole is shown in Figure 111. When the base feature increases in length, the design intent of the hole determines how it behaves. If the hole is dimensioned to the end of the base feature, the hole moves and remains 3.00 from that end. If the hole is dimensioned to the face, it remains 6.00 from that face.
er
na
6.00
Pr e P
ro
Figure 110
lU
Pro/ENGINEER also provides tools that enable you to change your design intent. They are discussed throughout the course.
Design intent can be captured in a variety of ways. When creating models in Pro/ENGINEER, pay special attention to the features used, how they are created (pick and place or sketched), and the dimensioning scheme. The parent/child relationships established during feature creation and the explicit relations setup after feature creation are also important for incorporating design intent. The following sections show how design intent can be incorporated into your models in different ways.
se
3.00
nl y
111
The key to building parametric, feature-based, solid models is to construct them in a way so that their behavior is flexible and predictable. The result of constructing them this way is known as the "design intent".
Symmetrical Geometry
Depth Options
du ct io
A third method of capturing design intent is to determine the type of depth needed for your feature. A part with a hole is shown in 1.4. The design intent is for the hole to pass through the entire model. When the base feature changes from 5.00 to 6.00, the resulting geometry appears different depending on the depth option set for the hole. If the hole is given a blind depth value of 5.00, it no longer passes though the entire part, and the hole depth must also be changed to maintain the design intent. A better solution is to set the depth option for the hole to Through All. In this scenario, the hole always passes through the part, regardless of the height of the base feature.
Fo
rI
nt
Figure 111
er
na
5.00
Pr e P
ro
6.00
112
lU
se
nl y
A second method of capturing design intent is to create symmetrical geometry. The design intent for the part shown in Figure 111 is to have the extruded cut remain at the center of the part. Constraining the cut from either end of the base feature does not capture the design intent. Constructing the base feature and cut relative to a center datum reference is preferable or you can use relations to capture this design intent.
1.4 Pro/ENGINEER Interface
rI
nt
er
Graphics (Main) Window The model is displayed in the graphics window.
du ct io
Model Tree Model features or components are listed in the model tree in the order they are created.
Fo
Pr e P
Help Line A help message appears when you place your cursor over a menu option.
ro
Dashboard The options in the dashboard are used for creating features.
Selection Filter The options in this pull-down menu enable you to refine what you can select on the model.
Message Window System messages and prompts appear in the multi-line message window. Figure 112
na
Toolbars Shortcut buttons can be selected on the toolbar.
Pop-Up Text The feature name and id appear in a colored box when you place your cursor over a feature.
lU
Menu Bar Options can be selected in the menu bar.
se
113
nl y
User Interface
The Pro/ENGINEER interface is designed to enable you to work with your models in a variety of ways. Figure 112 illustrates the layout of the Pro/ENGINEER environment.
Menus
Menus are used in Pro/ENGINEER to create and manipulate a model. Examples of the different menu types are shown in Table 11.
Menu Bar The menu bar at the top of the main window provides menu selections in a pull-down menu.
Menu Manager The menu manager provides options for certain operations. It appears to the right-hand side of the main window.
Pop-Up Menus
Pr e P
114
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
Additional menus are available by selecting features on the model or in the model tree and pressing the right mouse button.
nl y
Table 11
Some menu selections in the menu bar display additional menus. Figure 113 shows the additional menus associated with the Insert menu option.
du ct io
Fo
rI
Pr e P
When you place your cursor over a menu option, it highlights and a definition of the option appears in the help line at the bottom of the graphics window. When the option is selected with the left mouse button, it highlights in blue, indicating that it is the active option. Options that are dimmed or grayed are not available for selection if they are not applicable to the action being performed.
ro
nt
er
Figure 113
na
lU
115
se
nl y
Toolbars
The feature creation buttons that are available in the main window will be discussed throughout this course. Additional toolbar buttons can be added to the toolbar by clicking Tools > Customize Screen. They are described in .
Shortcut buttons are available in the toolbars. The shortcut buttons enable you to select commonly used menu options with one click of the mouse. Table 12 shows some of the default buttons available.
Table 12
Button Description New File Open File Save File Button Description Saved Views Set Layers View Manager Button
lU
nt
er
Print
Display Model as Wireframe
na
rI
Repaint Screen
Display Model as Hidden Line Display Model as No Hidden Line Shade Model Display Datum Planes Display Axis Display Points
Fo
Toggle View Mode
Toggle Spin Center
du ct io
Zoom In
Zoom Out Refit Model to Screen Orient Model
Pr e P
ro
Display Coordinate Systems
116
se
O
Help Create Datum Plane Create Curve Create Points
Description
Selection tool Search/ Filter tool Regenerate the model
Create Axis
Create Sketched Curve
Create Coordinate Systems Create Analysis Feature
nl y
Feature Creation Controls
When you create a feature, you can define a variety of elements or properties, such as sketch, direction, and depth. To define these elements you use either the dashboard or a dialog box.
Dashboard
When creating most features, a dashboard that corresponds to the feature being created appears at the bottom of the Pro/ENGINEER window. All elements can be defined using the available buttons and slide-up panels. Figure 114 shows the dashboard used to create an extrude feature. Depending on the feature being created, the options on the dashboard vary.
Slide-up Panels
Slide-up panels appear when you select buttons in top row of the dashboard. For example, the slide-up panel for an extrude feature is shown in Figure 115. Slide-up panels enable you to select references, define additional elements, and modify the properties of the feature. The buttons that appear in the top row vary according to the feature being defined.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
The buttons that appear on the right-hand side of the dashboard is accessible for all features. They are described in Table 13.
nt
er
Figure 114
Figure 115
na
lU
117
se
nl y
Table 13
Button Description Exits or cancels out of a dialog box. Shows a preview of new geometry before the feature is finalized. Completes the feature. Results are shown in the main window. Pauses feature creation and enables you to access other features.
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
ro
Some buttons in the feature dialog box have the same functionality as the dashboard. They are described in Table 14. Table 14
Button Description Redefines an element. Completes the feature. Results are shown in the main window.
118
rI
Some Pro/ENGINEER features require you to use a dialog box to define its elements. The dialog box displays all the required and the optional elements used to create the feature. The elements that appear in the dialog box vary according to the feature being defined. It also displays the status of each element. Figure 116 shows the dialog box used to create a chamfer feature. The element currently being defined is indicated by the ">" sign.
nt
Figure 116
er
na
Dialog Box
lU
se
nl y
Button
Description Exits or cancels out of a dialog box. Shows a preview of new geometry before finalizing the feature.
Fo
rI
The number of visible message lines is set at two by default. To change this, select the top border of the message window and once the button is visible, drag up or down as necessary.
du ct io
Message Window
The message window at the bottom of the main window displays information and prompts. The message window can provide information and require you to enter information, as shown in Figure 118.
Old system prompts/messages
nt
er
Figure 117
na
ro
Figure 118
Pr e P
The current system prompt is located at the bottom of the message line and old prompts scroll upward. You can use the scroll bars on the right-hand side of the message window to view old prompts. When you are prompted to enter information in the message window, you can do one of the two following things: Press the <Esc> key or select the without entering a value. Press the <Enter> key or select the button to quit a prompt button to accept the value.
lU
se
Current system prompt/message
Selection Filter
When modeling, you may want to select certain entities, such as surfaces, edges, or curves. The selection filter in the lower right-hand corner of the main window enables you to filter entities, features, or components so that you only select what you require. For example, if you leave the default option Smart selected, you can select any individual entity on the model. If you select Datums, however, you can only select individual datums on the model. The options that appear in the pull-down menu vary depending on the mode in which you are working. The options for Part mode appear as shown in Figure 117.
nl y
119
Help Line
The help line gives a brief description of any item that the cursor is placed over, such as a menu option, button, or model geometry. The help line appears below the message window at the bottom of the main window. The model tree appears, by default, on the left-hand side of the Pro/ENGINEER window. It lists all of the features in your models. All features or components are listed in the model tree in the order of creation. The model tree is a powerful tool that can be used for any of the following actions: Selecting features Accessing commonly used options (e.g., Delete, Redefine) Searching Creating and editing parameters Editing features Viewing information on features Changing the order of features (click and drag) Inserting features or components Opening components in an assembly
Fo
In the default model tree shown in Figure 119 each feature is identified by its name, an icon indicating the feature type and an internal ID. The tab at the top of the left-hand frame enables you to view or hide the model tree. The remaining tabs access the folder browser ( favorites ( connections ( ), Select either of these bars to remove the model tree from the display.
) and URL ). The
Pr e P
and buttons enable you to customize the model tree and are discussed later in this course.
ro
du ct io
120
rI
nt
er
Figure 119
na
lU
Customizing the model tree is discussed later in this course.
se
nl y
Model Tree
Modes
This course covers the following three basic modes of operation in Pro/ENGINEER: Part Mode Assembly Mode Drawing Mode
The New and Open options are also available in the File pull-down menu.
du ct io
Enter file name here. You can select this button to view a profile of the part before opening it. Figure 120
ro
Pr e P
Multiple Windows
Multiple files can be opened in a Pro/ENGINEER session. The first file that is opened appears in the main graphics window. If this file is not removed from the main graphics window before opening another file, the next file is displayed in a separate window. Both windows contain all the same menu options. When a file is opened in Pro/ENGINEER, it becomes the active window. To activate a previous window that is currently displayed, click Window > Activate in the menu bar. Alternatively, you can
Fo
rI
The File menu displays four of the most recently opened files. The files can be quickly retrieved by simply clicking the name of the file.
Select the type of file being created.
nt
er
na
Enter the name of the file you want to open, or select the file name.
lU
Alternatively, you can open an existing file by selecting the button. When you create a new file, you must select a type of file to create in the New dialog box. This determines the Pro/ENGINEER mode. All existing files are stored with mode-specific extensions. The New and File Open dialog boxes are shown in Figure 120.
se
To work in these modes, select the
button to create a new file.
nl y
121
select the name of the file from the Window menu, as shown in Figure 121. The symbol preceding the file name indicates the active file.
Figure 121
File Naming
ro
Pro/ENGINEER permits a maximum of 62 characters in a filename. Periods and spaces are not permitted. Certain operating systems may not permit other characters in file names. All files are stored in lowercase regardless if they are entered with uppercase letters.
Table 15 lists the extensions used for the four modes discussed in this course.
Fo
Files created in the various modes are given different file name extensions. When you create a new file or open an existing file into any mode, Pro/ENGINEER automatically knows the correct extension; you do not need to enter the extension with the file name.
rI
du ct io
Mode
Extension .sec .prt .asm .drw
nt
If you no longer need a file open, you can remove it from the display. To remove a file from the graphic display, click File > Close Window. The model is no longer displayed but it is still in memory.
er
Table 15
Example groove.sec key.prt padlock.asm padlock.drw
Sketcher Part
Assembly Drawing
Pr e P
Model Orientation
The model does not have an explicit top, bottom, right, left, front, or back. The orientation options are all relative to your monitor, as shown in Figure 122, and can be used to reference any planar surface in the model. To fully orient a model in 3D, two perpendicular planar surfaces must be selected as references.
122
na
lU
se
nl y
You can orient the model in Figure 123 using the options shown. Select this surface to face the Front of the monitor.
du ct io
ro
Select this surface to face the Bottom of the monitor.
Fo
rI
Pr e P
nt
er
Figure 122
Figure 123
na
lU
123
se
nl y
The resulting orientation appears as shown in Figure 124. Click View > Orientation > Default Orientation in the menu bar or select the button and click Default to return to the default orientation.
ro
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
124
rI
nt
Figure 125
er
Selecting Hidden Features
In some model orientations, features are hidden. To select these features, you can reorient the model so that the features are no longer hidden; however, this technique is not efficient. To select hidden features you should query through the model using your mouse or using the Selection dialog box. For example, the model shown in Figure 125 contains a number of features that are hidden when the model is in the default orientation.
na
lU
Figure 124
se
nl y
Mouse selection
To select hidden features using your mouse, use the following steps:
3.
2.
Press and hold the right mouse button and click Pick From List in the pop-up menu. The Pick From List dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 126.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
The features that appear in the Selection dialog box depend on the location of the mouse when you click Pick From List.
Fo
rI
1.
Position your cursor directly over the feature, even if it is hidden. The feature number and type appear in a pop-up text box, indicating the current feature.
3. 4.
Select the feature from the selection list or use the buttons to navigate to the required feature.
nt
In some cases, you may want to review a list of all the features that can be queried based on where your cursor is located. To review all of the features, use the following steps:
er
Figure 126 and
Select the button to accept the feature. This feature is now the active feature. Any option that is selected is applied to the active feature (e.g., Delete, Edit).
125
na
Pick From List dialog box
lU
Press the left mouse button to define this as the active feature. Any option that is selected is applied to the active feature (e.g., Delete, Edit).
se
2.
Press the right mouse button to toggle through to the next feature in the model. The help box now indicates a new feature number and type.
nl y
You can set the model display to hidden line to help identify the location of the feature.
1.
Position your cursor directly over the feature, even if it is hidden. The feature highlights in cyan. The number and type appear in a pop-up text box, indicating the current feature.
Pr e P
126
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 1a
Goal
The Basics
Fo
rI
After you complete this exercise, you will be able to:
Pr e P
9 9 9 9 9 9 9
ro
du ct io
Task 1: Open the model called flange_lock.prt. 1. Select the window. button in the toolbar at the top of the main
To open files you can also click File > Open in the menu bar.
Retrieve files Save files Use the right mouse button to access options Orient the model Edit features Delete features Manage multiple windows
nt
er
Figure 127
na
lU
127
se
nl y
In this exercise, you will practice using the Pro/ENGINEER interface before you begin creating new models. The model shown in Figure 127 is the model that you will manipulate in this exercise.
2.
Select flange_lock.prt in the File Open dialog box, and select the button. The model appears in the main window and the model tree displays all the features in the model, as shown in Figure 128.
Fo
ro
Pr e P
To refit the model to the screen you can also click View > Orientation > Refit in the menu bar.
128
du ct io
Notice that the model name is displayed in the header of the Pro/ENGINEER window and at the top of the model tree listing. The name in the model tree identifies the model as a part (.prt) file. The model consists of solid geometry and datum features that were used as references in creating the solid geometry.
Task 2: Zoom in and out on the model. 1. 2. 3. 4. Press and hold the <Ctrl> key. Press and hold the middle mouse button. Move the mouse downwards to zoom in and move the mouse upwards to zoom out on the model. Select the button on the toolbar at the top of the main window to refit the model in the center of the screen.
rI
nt
Figure 128
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Task 3: Zoom into an area of the model and zoom out on the model. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Select the window. button on the toolbar at the top of the main
Drag the mouse to draw a box over the area to zoom.
Press and release the left mouse button again once the box is the required size. To zoom out on the model, select the button on the toolbar at the top of the main window. Pro/ENGINEER automatically zooms out on the model. Continue to select this button to zoom out further on the model. Select the button on the toolbar at the top of the main window to refit the model in the center of the screen.
3.
Move the mouse to drag the model. Select the screen. button to refit the model in the center of the
du ct io
4.
Task 5: Spin the model around the tri-colored spin center. 1. Press and hold the middle mouse button on any location in the main window. Move the mouse to spin the model. The spin center ( ) represents the X (red), Y (green), and Z (blue) directions. Select the orientation. button and click Default to return to the default
ro
Pr e P
2. 3.
To orient the model to its default orientation you can also press <Ctrl> + <d> or click View > Orientation > Default Orientation in the menu bar.
2.
Press and hold the middle mouse button.
Fo
1.
Press and hold the <Shift> key.
rI
To refit the model to the screen you can also click View > Orientation > Refit in the menu bar.
6.
Task 4: Pan the model on the screen.
nt
er
na
lU
se
Select a location on the model using the left mouse button to define a corner of the bounding box zoom area.
nl y
129
Task 6: Use the Orientation dialog box for zooming, spinning, and panning. To orient the model using the Orientation dialog box you can also click View > Orientation > Reorient in the menu bar. The H, V, and C options in the dialog box represent horizontal, vertical, and normal to the screen respectively. 1. 2. Select the window. button on the toolbar at the top of the main
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
ro
3.
Select and move the slider bars adjacent to H and V in the Pan section of the dialog box to pan the model Select the button to reposition the model on the screen.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Numeric values can be entered in the boxes adjacent to the sliders as another method to panning, zooming, and spinning the model.
130
Select and move the slider bar in the Zoom section. Select the button to reposition the model on the screen.
Select and move the slider bars adjacent to H, V, and C in the Spin section to spin the model.
rI
nt
Figure 129
er
na
lU
se
Click Dynamic orient from the Type pull-down menu. The Orientation dialog box appears as shown in Figure 129. This is an alternative method for spinning, panning, and zooming.
nl y
8.
Select the button or the button to spin about the spin center or the screen center, respectively. Select the button to undo any orientation changes made to the model on the screen.
Task 7: Manipulate the view display of the model.
the view display to Hidden Line ( Datum planes, axes, points, and coordinate systems are features that can exist in the model. They are discussed later in the course. 2.
nt
er
1.
Select the button in the toolbar at the top of the main window to set the view display to No Hidden. You can also set ) and Wireframe ( ).
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
3.
Select the
the datum planes ( the display.
Fo
Select the button in the toolbar at the top of the main window to remove all datum axes from the display. Also remove ) and the coordinate systems ( ) from
rI
button to return the view display to shaded.
na
The ability of a system to spin a shaded model depends on the quality of the graphics hardware.
By default, the model display is set as shaded (the selected in the toolbar at the top of the main window).
lU
se
button is
131
10. Select the button at the bottom of the Orientation dialog box when you are finished orienting the model.
nl y
9.
Task 8: Orient the model by selecting two orientation constraints. To orient the model you can also click View > Orientation > Reorient in the menu bar. 1. Select the button on the toolbar at the top of the main window. The Orientation dialog box appears as shown in Figure 130.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
When orienting models, two perpendicular surfaces must be selected. By default Front and Top are the default reference options.
2.
Select the surface shown in Figure 131 as the Front surface.
Fo
3.
Click Bottom from the Reference 2 pull-down menu and select the surface shown in Figure 132. The model automatically reorients, as shown in Figure 133.
132
rI
nt
Figure 130
Figure 131
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Figure 132
du ct io
Fo
rI
To retrieve a saved view,
4.
Select the Saved Views heading in the Orientation dialog box. In the expanded Saved Views section, enter [view1] as the name of the new view. Select the Select the button to save the view.
Pr e P
select the button and select the name of the saved view.
ro
5.
Task 9: Practice orienting the model. 1. Select any two orientation constraints to define the views shown in Figure 134.
nt
button to return to the default orientation.
er
Figure 133
na
lU
133
se
nl y
Remember,
Top
Left
Back
Front
Right
Bottom
Task 10: Edit feature dimensions on the model.
Pr e P
134
ro
du ct io
1. 2.
3.
4.
Select Hole id 193 in the model tree.
Press the right mouse button and click Edit in the pop-up menu.
Double-click on the 80.00 diameter dimension in the main window. Enter [50.00] as the new value as shown in Figure 135 and press the <Enter> key.
Fo
2.
Select the and buttons in the dialog box when completed to return the model to the default view and close the Orientation dialog box.
rI
nt
Figure 134
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
The Regenerate option recalculates the model geometry. You can also click Edit > Regenerate in the menu bar to regenerate the model. The length of regeneration time depends on the complexity of the model.
6.
rI
Select Round id 596 on the model, as shown in Figure 136, press the right mouse button and click Edit in the pop-up menu. Edit the round radius to [15] units.
7.
As an alternative to using the Edit option in the right mouse pop-up menu, double-click directly on the feature that you wish to edit. Use this alternative method to edit the location of the oblong cut (cut id 339) from 65 units to [75] units from the center of the model.
nt
er
5.
Select the button on the toolbar at the top of the main window to regenerate the model. The size of the hole updates.
Figure 136
na
Figure 135
lU
135
se
nl y
8.
Edit the post height (protrusion id 66) from 275 to [350] units using this alternative method. Select the button on the toolbar at the top of the main window to regenerate the model. The model appears as shown in Figure 137.
9.
Task 11: Save the changes made to the model. To save files you can also click File > Save in the menu bar. You can also select the 1. Select the window.
button in the message window to accept the file name.
Pr e P
136
ro
du ct io
2.
Read the message window at the bottom of the screen. Press the <Enter> key to save the model.
Fo
rI
button on the toolbar at the top of the main
nt
Figure 137
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Task 12: Delete features from the model. You can use the <Ctrl> key to select multiple features at once in your model. 1. Select Hole id 306 from the model tree.
2. 3. 4.
rI
nt
As an alternative, you can select directly on the model. Select the hole (Hole id 193, shown in Figure 138), press the right mouse button and click Delete in the pop-up menu. The Delete dialog box appears, indicating that you must select an option for the children of the hole. The cut is created by referencing the hole and subsequently a round feature is created referencing the cut. Neither of these features can exist in the model without the hole because of this parent/child relationship.
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
ro
er
Figure 138
na
The cut and round features are child features of the hole. You are prompted to select an action for the child features.
lU
se
Select the button in the dialog box that appears to confirm the deletion of the highlighted features.
Press the right mouse button and click Delete in the pop-up menu.
nl y
137
5.
Select the. button in the Delete dialog box. The cylindrical protrusion and the round have been deleted. The model appears as shown in Figure 139.
Figure 139 Task 13: Close the current working window. Alternatively, you can click Window > Close Window in the menu bar or select the button in the top right-hand corner of the main window. 1. Click File > Close Window in the menu bar. The model is no longer displayed but it is still in memory.
Pr e P
ro
The previous four files that were opened are listed at the bottom of the File menu. This enables you to quickly access these files without using the Open dialog box.
du ct io
1.
Select the
Task 14: Open files.
2.
Select flange_lock.prt in the Open dialog box. Select the
button to display the file in the main window. The model was not saved with the deleted features; however, the flange_lock file (with the deleted features) still remains in the active working memory (i.e., RAM) until it is erased. This active working memory is termed in session. Click File > Erase > Current to erase the file from memory. This does not effect the file saved on the system disk. Select the button in the Erase Confirm dialog box.
3.
4. 5. 6.
Open flange_lock.prt. The model appears with all features because it was not saved once the features were deleted. Click File > Close Window in the menu bar.
138
Fo
rI
button on the toolbar.
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Task 15: Open multiple Pro/ENGINEER windows. The Pro/ENGINEER environment enables you to work with multiple open windows. 1. Open xbracket.drw. The header of the main window displays the name of the drawing. The word "Active" after the name indicates that this is the active window. Open xbracket.prt. A second window appears containing the drawing model. The window containing xbracket.drw is still open. Click Window in the menu bar. At the bottom of the menu, xbracket.drw and xbracket.prt are listed. These can be selected to activate the appropriate window.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
You can also click Delete in the right mouse pop-up menu or use the Edit menu.
Delete this rectangular tab protrusion
rI
2.
Select the rectangular tab protrusion shown in Figure 140 in the model tree or in the main window. Press the <Delete> key.
nt
1.
Click Window > xbracket.prt in the menu bar to activate it.
er
Task 16: Delete the rectangular tab protrusion on the model.
Figure 140
na
lU
You can also open the drawing model by selecting the model in the model tree, pressing the right mouse button and clicking Open in the pop-up menu.
2. 3.
se
nl y
139
Task 17: Edit the length of the bracket in the drawing. 1. 2. Activate the drawing. The drawing updates now that the tab protrusion has been deleted. If it does not update, select the 3. button.
Select the 10.00 length dimension, press the right mouse button, and click Edit Value in the pop-up menu. Enter [8] as the new dimension value and press the <Enter> key. Select the button to regenerate the model.
5. 6.
Activate the window containing the part to verify that the model has changed.
To repaint the model you can also click View > Repaint in the menu bar. This option refreshes the work area by eliminating residual graphics or returning graphics that may have disappeared.
Pr e P
ro
140
du ct io
Task 18: Edit the diameter dimension of the hole in the drawing. 1. Ensure that the window containing the drawing is active.
2.
Task 19: Save the models and close the window. 1. Save the drawing and close the windows.
Edit the diameter of the hole to [.5] and regenerate the model. Notice how the diameter of both holes updated simultaneously. This is because the holes were created using the Pattern option. The Pattern option is discussed in Chapter 12.
9.
Close the part file by clicking File > Close Window in the menu bar.
Fo
8.
Select the model.
rI
button and press the <Enter> key to save the
nt
7.
Select the button to repaint the display if the dimensional change is not visible.
er
na
lU
You can also click Edit > Value in the menu bar to edit a dimension in the drawing.
4.
se
nl y
Exercise 1b
Goal
Orienting and Editing the Model
du ct io
Task 1: Open the model called valve.prt and orient it. 1. Open valve.prt. Remove the datum planes, datum axis, and datum coordinate system from the display if they are not already removed, as shown in Figure 142.
To remove the datum planes, datum axis, and datum coordinate system from the display, select the
Pr e P
, , buttons, respectively, on the toolbar at the top of the main window.
ro
9 9 9 9
Orient the model Edit model dimensions Delete features Identify parent/child relationships
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 141
Figure 142
141
na
lU
se
nl y
In this exercise, you will practice orienting and editing the model. You will orient the model into three orientations by selecting references, modify dimensions and delete a parent feature. The completed model in its default orientation appears as shown in Figure 141.
To change the view display to No Hidden, select the button.
2. 3.
Change the view display to No Hidden. Use the Orientation dialog box to orient the model as shown in views A, B, and C of Figure 143. Do not spin the model and start with a default view each time. Although you can obtain these views in many ways, using Front as Reference 1 is recommended, along with any other reference. A. B.
C.
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
142
ro
rI
nt
Figure 143
er
na
lU
se
Planar surfaces must be selected for orientation references.
nl y
Task 2: Edit the size of a hole. 1. Edit the size of Hole id 552 to [.75]. The model appears as shown in Figure 144.
Task 3: Delete a hole. The relationship between the hole and the cut is a parent/child relationship. The child (cut) cannot exist without the parent (chamfer). The topic of parent/child relationships is extremely important and is discussed throughout the course. 1. 2.
Confirm that both the hole and the cut are to be deleted.
Task 4: Edit dimensions in the model. 1.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Make the necessary dimension modifications to features (cylindrical base and round) in the model so that it appears as shown in Figure 145.
The extruded depth of this extruded protrusion changes as the base diameter changes. This is because of parent/child relationships that were created when the model was created.
Fo
Delete the Hole id 218. Why does the Delete dialog box appear?
rI
2.
Save the model and close the window.

143
nt
er
Figure 144
Figure 145
na
lU
se
nl y
Pr e P
144
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 1c
Goal
Query Select
na
Task 1: Open the model called querylab.prt.
lU
9 Use the Query option for selecting hidden features
du ct io
1.
Task 2: Edit the depth of the hidden triangular cut. 1. Move your mouse over the model. Once a feature is recognized, it highlights in cyan and a help line appears indicating the feature. Move your mouse over the feature shown in Figure 147.
Pr e P
ro
Keep the model in its default orientation at all times.
Open querylab.prt.
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 146
se
Edit the depth of this hidden triangular cut.
145
Edit the depth of this cylindrical protrusion
nl y
In this exercise, you will edit dimensions associated with the two hidden features shown in Figure 146. To edit these features you will learn selection techniques for quickly selecting hidden features without having to reorient the model.
Figure 147 2.
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
ro
3.
Keeping your mouse in the same location, select the model again using the left mouse button. The F11(Cut) highlights in red and becomes the active feature. Double-click on the F11(Cut) or press the right mouse button and click Edit in the pop-up menu. All the dimensions associated with this feature appear. Double-click on the 3.0 depth dimension and enter [5]. Regenerate the model.
4.
5. 6.
146
rI
nt
Figure 148
er
Press the right mouse button and click Next in the pop-up menu. The cut feature that is located within the model and directly below the original mouse location is highlighted, as shown in Figure 148.
na
lU
se
nl y
Task 3: Edit the diameter of the circular protrusion. 1. Move your mouse over the location shown in Figure 149 and press the right mouse button.
2. The features that appear in the Selections dialog box may vary depending on where your mouse is located when you click Pick From List. The Selections dialog box lists all features that lie beneath the selected location.
du ct io
Fo
rI
Click Pick From List in the pop-up menu.The Pick From List dialog box appears as shown in Figure 150.
ro
3.
Select F10 (PROTRUSION) in the selection list and select the button. The cylindrical protrusion highlights in red.
Pr e P
4.
Double-click on the feature or press the right mouse button and click Edit in the pop-up menu. All of the dimensions associated with the feature appear on the model. Select the radius dimension 0.67, and enter [1]. Regenerate the model. Save the model and close the window.
147
5. 6. 7.
nt
er
Figure 149
Figure 150
na
lU
As an alternative to using the right mouse button to toggle through the selection list, you can review the list by clicking Pick From List to open the Selections dialog box.
se
nl y
Pr e P
148
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Review Questions
Question 1 List the five key attributes of Pro/ENGINEER. a. b. c. d. e. Question 2 ___________________________________________________
___________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________
_________________ and _____________________ features represent features for which a shape is predefined. After editing the dimensions of a part model, you must open all drawings referencing that part to make the same dimension changes. a. b. True False
Question 4
du ct io
a. b. c.
d.
ro
Pr e P
Question 5 Question 6
Pro/ENGINEER part files have the ._______ filename extension. Selecting the Top orientation option enables you to view the top of the model. a. b. True False
Which of the following actions can be initiated in the model tree? (HINT: There is more than one correct answer.) Select features Search Insert Features View feature information
Fo
rI
nt
Question 3
er
na
lU
___________________________________________________
se
___________________________________________________
nl y
149
Question 7
To spin the model, you press and hold which mouse button? a. b. c. Left Middle
a. b. c. d. Question 9
It refreshes the screen after spinning the model.
Right and Top
Front and Back
Pr e P
150
ro
du ct io
The File > Erase > Current option erases the current file from your system hard disk. a. True False
b.
Top and Back
Back and Left
Fo
rI
Which of the following orientation option combinations can be used to orient a model? (HINT: There is more than one correct answer.)
nt
er
It opens a new model.
na
It re-calculates the geometry after dimension changes.
lU
It changes the display mode of the model from hidden line to shaded.
se
Question 8
Which of the following answers describes the purpose of the Regenerate option on the Edit menu?
nl y
Right
The first solid feature that you create in Pro/ENGINEER is called the base feature. This feature forms the foundation on which other features are added to build the model. The first solid feature of the model adds material, known as a protrusion. Protrusions are created by sketching a cross-section and applying a depth.
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
9Creating a New Part Containing Default Datum Planes 9Creating the First Solid Feature 9Making Changes to the Base Feature
Fo
rI
Creating the Base Feature
nt
er
Chapter 2
na
lU
21
se
nl y
22
lU
se
nl y
2.1 Creating a New Part

The first solid feature in a new part is commonly referred to as the base feature. It is initially created by locating the new geometry using references, known as datum planes. The base feature is often a solid protrusion with a sketched cross-section. Once you create the initial geometry, Pro/ENGINEER provides a variety of methods to edit and change the geometry. This is also true for all additional sketched geometry sketched. An example of a base features appears as shown in Figure 21. Solid base feature
du ct io
Fo
rI
General Steps
Use the following steps as a general guideline to create the first solid feature in a new part: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Create a new part. Select the type of protrusion to create as the first solid feature. Sketch the section of the solid protrusion. Define the depth for the protrusion. Make changes to the protrusion, as necessary.
Pr e P
ro
nt
er
Figure 21
na
lU
se
nl y
23
Step 1: Create a new part
Templates
du ct io
Fo
ro
Pr e P
Select the type of model you want to create, listed in the Type section of the New dialog box. For most model types, the toggle option Use default template appears at the bottom of the dialog box. For parts, the default template creates a new part that uses the Inch-Pound-Second system of units. To use a different system, clear the Use default template option. Once you complete selecting the type of model to create and you have entered the file name, select the button. If you cleared
You can create your own templates for creating new parts.
24
rI
nt
Figure 22
er
na
lU
button from the toolbar. The New dialog box appears as shown in Figure 22.
se
To create a new part, click File > New in the menu bar or select the
When you create a new part, Pro/ENGINEER gives you the option to use a template. Templates enable you to create new parts that have standardized configurations and settings. Using templates ensures that all models start with consistent and company-specific settings (if required). Templates contain useful features and settings, such as view orientations, reference datum plane features, and unit systems.
nl y
the Use default template option, the New File Options dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 23.
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
You can select another template from the list in this dialog box. If you want to create a part with your own customized settings, select Empty.
nt
er
Figure 23
na
lU
25
se
nl y
Default Datum Planes
Fo
du ct io
If you create a new empty part (i.e., without using a template), you can still create default datum planes before any other geometry by selecting the button in the datum toolbar.
ro
Pr e P
Default datum planes are especially useful when your part has many non-planar surfaces. They can act as references for reorienting the part.
As the size of the part increases, the datum planes extend to fit the part. The datum planes are brown when viewed from one direction, and gray when viewed from the opposite direction. The brown side is considered the "dominant" side. Actions to a selected datum plane, such as reorienting, are applied to the dominant side. Reference features play an important role in the development of your model. While a part can be created without default datum planes, they are strongly recommended.
26
rI
nt
Figure 24
er
na
lU
se
Three orthogonal datum planes labeled RIGHT, TOP, and FRONT. These are referred to as default datum planes. Default datum coordinate system, labeled PRT_CSYS_DEF.
nl y
When creating the base feature, it is important to use the default datum planes. Default datum planes are non-solid features that exist only in space; that is, they have no thickness or mass. They are considered reference features because they act as references when creating new and additional features. They help you orient the part and create additional reference features. Every part template provided with Pro/ENGINEER contains the following reference features, as shown in Figure 24.
Model Tree
When you create a new part using a template provided with Pro/ENGINEER, the model tree for the new part lists the three default datum planes and the default datum coordinate system, as shown in Figure 25.
Figure 25
Feature Forms
This chapter focuses on extruded solid protrusions. Other feature forms are discussed later in this course.
Fo
You can use one of four basic feature forms to create the first solid protrusion, described in Table 21.
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Feature Form
2D Cross-Section
nt
Solid features with sketched cross-sections can be protrusions or cuts. Protrusions add material and cuts remove material. The first solid feature in a part must be a protrusion.
er
Table 21
3D Base Feature
Extrude
na
Step 2: Select the type of solid feature
lU
se
27
nl y
Table 21
Feature Form 2D Cross-Section 3D Base Feature
Revolve
Blend
Fo
rI
Sweep
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
To use the extrude form, select the button from the base feature toolbar. You can use the message area to guide you through the creation of an extruded feature. It appears at the bottom of the main window, as shown in Figure 26.
28
nt
Trajectory CrossSection
Figure 26
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Step 3: Sketch the section of the feature

Define the cross-section of a feature (i.e., extruded protrusion) by sketching it. You can also select a section from existing geometry, which is discussed later in this course.
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Sketch Plane
To begin sketching, you must select a sketch plane. The sketch plane can be any one of the three default datum planes. The two-dimensional sketch is placed on a selected datum plane and the protrusion is extruded in a direction normal to that plane. The default orientation of the model depends on the datum plane selected.
nt
er
Figure 27
na
lU
29
se
prompt and sketch a new section for the feature, select the button. The Section dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 27.
Once you start the creation of the extruded protrusion, the message window prompts you to select a sketch to extrude. To override this
nl y
For example, consider the cylindrical extruded protrusion shown in Figure 28. The two-dimensional section is sketched on datum plane TOP and extruded in the direction normal to this datum plane. Its default orientation appears as shown on the right-hand side in Figure 28. The base feature becomes a child of the datum plane you select as a sketch plane.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
Similarly, the section could have been sketched on datum plane FRONT, as shown in Figure 29, or on datum plane RIGHT, as shown in Figure 210.
210
rI
nt
Figure 28
Figure 29
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Pr e P
ro
When sketching features, protrusions protrude towards you while cuts extrude away from you.
du ct io
In Figure 211, datum plane RIGHT is selected as a sketch plane. The direction arrow shows the direction in which you are viewing the plane while sketching. The resulting protrusion is extruded in the opposite direction (i.e., towards you).
When you select the sketch plane, an arrow appears beside the datum plane. This arrow indicates the direction in which you are viewing the sketch plane, not the direction of extrusion. If you select a datum plane as the sketch plane, the default viewing direction is always toward its dominant side. For example, if you select datum plane RIGHT as a sketch plane, you see the brown side of the datum plane (the dominant side) while sketching. The protrusion is then extruded normal to the plane, toward you.
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 210
Figure 211
na
lU
211
se
nl y
To change the viewing direction and extrude the protrusion in the opposite direction (i.e., away from the non-dominant side), simply select the button in the Section dialog box. The extrudes in the opposite direction, as shown in Figure 212.
Figure 212
The base feature becomes a child of the datum plane you select as the sketch orientation plane.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
In the example shown in Figure 213, datum plane RIGHT is selected as the sketch plane. Datum plane FRONT could be selected to face bottom or datum plane TOP could be selected to face left.
Fo
Sketch Orientation
The next requirement before sketching is to select the sketch orientation plane. Pro/ENGINEER requires you to select a horizontal or vertical orientation reference plane that is normal to the sketch plane. This orients the part for you while sketching. When you select a datum plane as the sketch orientation plane, use the Orientation pull-down menu to select the direction for the datum plane to face. For example, if you select datum plane FRONT as your sketch plane, you can select either datum plane RIGHT or TOP as your sketch orientation plane. The sketch orientation plane can be selected to face top, bottom, right, or left.
212
rI
nt
Figure 213
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Always consider your design intent when accepting default selections.
A default selection is often provided in the Section dialog box for the sketch orientation plane. You can accept the default or override it by selecting your own reference.
Sketching
When the required selections are made in the Section dialog box,
select the button to enter Sketcher mode. In Sketcher mode, the following additional toolbars and menu options are added to the Pro/ENGINEER interface, as shown in Figure 214:
Fo
Sketcher view toolbar Sketcher geometry toolbar
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
rI
nt
er
Figure 214
213
na
A geometry toolbar appears on the right-hand side of the main window. This toolbar contains shortcut buttons for sketching and editing geometry. A Sketcher view toolbar is added above the main window. This toolbar enables you to control the display of some Sketcher items. The Sketch and Edit options are added to the menu bar.
lU
se
nl y
Fo
To delete a sketcher entity, select the button, select the entity, and press the <Delete> key. As an alternative, once the entity is selected you can also click Delete in either the right-mouse pop-up menu or in the Edit menu.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
With references selected, select the button. You are now ready to sketch. This chapter focuses on the simple line, rectangle, and circle entities. Other entities and tools are discussed later in this course. For a complete description of available sketcher geometry, see . To sketch a simple geometry line, select the button. Select the location where you want to start the line. A rubberband line appears attached to the cursor. Select the location where you want to end the line. Continue selecting to create additional attached lines. Press the middle mouse button to complete line creation. To sketch a rectangle, select the button. Place one vertex with the left mouse button and drag the rectangle to the desired size. To place the other vertex, press the left mouse button. To sketch a circle, select the point on the circle. button. Select the centerpoint and a
214
rI
nt
Figure 215
er
na
and buttons on the toolbar, respectively.
lU
To redo or undo sketching actions, you can select the
se
Before you sketch any geometry, the References dialog box appears. Sketched geometry must always be located with respect to existing features in the part. Before the base feature, the only existing features in the part are the three default datum planes and the default datum coordinate system. Pro/ENGINEER automatically selects the two datum planes that are normal to the sketch plane. Any geometry you sketch is aligned or dimensioned with respect to these references. The references are represented by white dashed lines that are projected onto the sketch plane. You can delete one or both of these references suggested by Pro/ENGINEER and select the default datum coordinate system as an alternative.
nl y
Dimensions
Fo
rI
strong dimension
nt
er
du ct io
Figure 216
Pr e P
ro
na
weak dimensions
lU
In general, to create a dimension (strong dimension), select the button from the toolbar, select the entity(ies) with your left mouse button, move your mouse to the dimensions placement location and press the middle mouse button to place the dimension. Later in this course, you learn how to create additional dimension types that can be used to override the weak dimensions.
se
nl y
215
As you sketch geometry, dimensions appear and are removed automatically so that the geometry is always located with respect to the references, yet not over-dimensioned. Dimensions created by Pro/ENGINEER are referred to as "weak" dimensions because they can be automatically removed by the system to avoid over-dimensioning. Dimensions that you create are referred to as "strong" dimensions and cannot be automatically deleted by the system.
Fo
du ct io
Constraints
As you sketch geometry, Pro/ENGINEER automatically defines constraints for you. You can use these constraints to your advantage. For example, they can be used to make two lines parallel or apply the same radii to two circles. If a constraint is applied, a symbol appears adjacent to the entities to which the constraint is applied. The constraint symbols are described in Table 22. Later in this course, you learn how to apply your own sketch constraints. Table 22
Constraint The point lies on the middle of the line. The vertices are coincident. The entity is horizontal. The entity is vertical. The entities are tangent.
ro
Symbol M O H V T
Pr e P
216
rI
nt
Figure 217
er
na
Double-click on a dimension to modify its value.
lU
se
nl y
The selection tool ( button on the toolbar) can also be accessed by pressing the middle mouse button.
The value of a sketch dimension can be modified by selecting the button on the toolbar and double-clicking on the dimension value. Enter a new value in the field that appears.
Table 22
Symbol L# Constraint The linear segments have equal lengths. The subscript identifies groups of equal length segments. The vertices are symmetrical about a centerline. The point lies on an entity. R# --
The radii are equal. The subscript identifies groups of equal radius arcs. The centerpoints or endpoints line up horizontally or vertically. The lines are collinear.
= ~ //#
#
The entities are parallel. The subscript identifies groups of parallel lines. The entities are perpendicular. The subscript identifies groups of perpendicular entities.
When you have finished sketching, select the the section.
Fo
rI
nt
er
Entities compose a single use edge or offset edge chain.
na
lU
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
se
button to complete
O
217
nl y
Step 4: Define the depth

Pro/ENGINEER provides a number of options to define the depth of extruded features. Many of these options enable you to reference other geometry to control the depth. For an extruded base feature, the depth is commonly defined with a dimension that can be easily modified. The dashboard for the extruded protrusion contains an entry field in which you can enter a value for the depth, as shown in Figure 218. Enter the depth of the protrusion here.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Drag this handle to dynamically modify the depth value.
Fo
Once the depth of the protrusion is defined, you can complete the Use the button to cancel a feature.
218
feature by selecting the
rI
Alternatively, you can dynamically adjust the depth by dragging the handles that appear on the model.
nt
Figure 218
Figure 219
button. To preview the feature geometry

er
na
lU
se
nl y
before completing the feature, select the button resumes the feature after previewing.
button. The
Base feature
Figure 220
Step 5: Make changes to the protrusion

After you have created a feature, you may want to make changes. Many of these changes can be initiated through the model tree. If you select the name of the feature in the model tree with the right mouse button, a pop-up menu appears with many options for making changes. The Edit option accesses the dimensions for the feature. Any dimensions created for the sketch or depth of the feature become visible and you can modify them by double-clicking a dimension and entering a new value in the field that appears, as shown in Figure 221. If the dimension was modified previously, recent values for the dimension can be selected from the pull-down menu, as shown in Figure 221.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 221
na
lU
219
se
nl y
The model tree updates to list the base feature, as shown in Figure 220. The base feature appears in the model tree feature list following the default datum planes and the default datum coordinate system.
After you enter a new value for dimensions, click Edit > Regenerate from the menu bar to incorporate the changes or select the the toolbar. You can change the default feature name to something more meaningful using either of the following methods: on
Default feature name
Fo
du ct io
The Edit Definition option in the right-mouse pop-up menu opens the dashboard for the feature. From there you can make changes to the sketch for the feature (select the
rI
Custom feature name Figure 222
nt
Feature names cannot contain spaces and special characters, such as !, #, and *.
of extrusion (select the button). Other options and techniques for changing features are discussed throughout this course.
Pr e P
220
ro
er
na
Assigning your own names to features can help you locate and identify features in the model tree more easily, as shown in Figure 222.
button) and change the direction
lU
se
Select the feature name in the model tree, press the right mouse button, and click Rename in the pop-up menu. Enter the new name in the model tree. Double-click the feature name in the model tree. Enter the new name in the model tree.
nl y
Exercise 2a
Goal
Extruded Base Features

In this exercise, you will create a new model using the default template provided in Pro/ENGINEER. The first feature in any new model is called the base feature. The references that are selected when creating the base feature determine the models default orientation. You will create the extruded protrusions as the base features, as shown in Figure 223 and Figure 224. You will sketch the protrusions using the rectangle and circle entities.
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
Pr e P
9 9 9 9
Create a new part using the default template Select the first type of feature to create Sketch the section of the solid protrusion Define the depth for the protrusion
nt
er
Figure 223
Figure 224
na
lU
221
se
nl y
Task 1: Create a new model using the default part template.
1. 2. 3. 4. When you create a new file or open an existing file into any mode, Pro/ENGINEER automatically knows the correct extension; you do not need to enter the extension with the file name.
Select the
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
button.
ro
Default datum planes can also be added as the first feature in an empty template by selecting the
5.
Select the button. The Pro/ENGINEER window displays the rectangle model as the active model. The model contains only the default datum planes and coordinate system from the default template, as shown in the model tree and in the main window.
Task 2: Select the feature type of the first feature.
1.
Select the button to create an extruded base feature. The dashboard appears as shown in Figure 226.
222
rI
nt
Figure 225
er
na
lU
se
Ensure that the Use default template option is selected. The New dialog box appears as shown in Figure 225.
Enter [rectangle] as the part name.
nl y
Select the Part option in the New dialog box if it is not already selected.
Task 3: Sketch the section for the extruded base feature.
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
The default reference or orientation references can be changed if a different reference is required.
2.
Select datum plane TOP as the sketch plane. Pro/ENGINEER completes the remaining sections in the dialog box with system defined references. Accept the default values for Reference and Orientation. By default, datum plane RIGHT is oriented to face the right-hand side of the screen for sketching.
nt
er
The highlighted area (in light yellow) is the active area.
Figure 227
na
lU
se
1.
Select the button on the dashboard to enter Sketcher mode. The Section dialog box appears as shown in Figure 227, enabling you to select the sketching plane, and orientation for the extruded base feature.
O
223
nl y
Figure 226
3.
4.
Pr e P
224
ro
du ct io
Select the button to accept the two default references. The model reorients into 2D for sketching, as shown in Figure 229.
Fo
rI
nt
Figure 228
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Select the button to begin sketching. The References dialog box appears as shown in Figure 228 and the model orients into a 2D orientation. The system automatically selects references that are used to place the section relative to existing geometry (or datum planes) in the model. Additional references can be selected or existing references can be deleted.
Datum plane TOP is the sketching plane
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Datum planes FRONT and RIGHT are the reference planes (displayed as dashed lines)
Figure 229
na
lU
Datum plane RIGHT is oriented to face right
se
225
nl y
Task 4: Sketch the rectangular section.
1. 2.
To delete a sketcher entity, select the button and press the <Delete> key. As an alternative, once the entity is selected you can also click Delete either in the right-mouse pop-up menu or in the Edit menu. Select here to start sketching the rectangular section
lU
du ct io
Fo
4.
Press the middle mouse button to complete the sketch. Pro/ENGINEER automatically dimensions the sketch and constrains the sketch. Double-click on the vertical dimension of the rectangle and enter [15] as the new dimension value. Press the <Enter> key to accept the new value. Double-click on the horizontal dimension of the rectangle and enter [25] as the new dimension value. Press the <Enter> key to accept the new value. The sketch appears as shown in Figure 231.
Pr e P
ro
5.
6.
226
rI
nt
Figure 230
er
na
se
3.
Drag the mouse upwards and to the right. Click the left mouse button a second time in the location shown in Figure 230 to define the rectangular shape. Select here to complete the sketched section
Start the sketch by selecting the intersection of datum planes FRONT and RIGHT, as shown in Figure 230, using the left mouse button.
nl y
Select the button to sketch the base feature as a rectangular section.
7.
Select the mode.
button to complete the sketch and exit Sketcher
Task 5: Define the depth of the protrusion. 1. Pro/ENGINEER automatically applies a default depth value for the protrusion. This default value can be accepted or you can change it. Select the button and click Default to orient the model into its default orientation. You may have to pan (<Shift> + middle mouse button) and/or zoom out to view the entire model. 2. Select and drag the depth handle on the model to change the depth dimension to approximately [75], as shown in Figure 232.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Select this depth handle and drag it to modify the extruded depth
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 232
227
na
lU
se
Figure 231
nl y
3.
You can also modify the depth value in the dashboard to achieve an exact value. Select the current depth value in the depth pull-down menu and enter [10] as shown in Figure 233. Depth pull-down menu
4.
Fo
du ct io
Task 6: Save the model and erase it from session.
1. 2. 3.
Select the
ro
Press the <Enter> key or select the window prompt to save rectangle.prt.
rI
button to save the model. button at the message
Pr e P
Click File > Erase > Current to erase rectangle.prt from the current session of Pro/ENGINEER. Select the button in the Erase Confirm dialog box.
4.
228
nt
Figure 234
er
na
Complete the rectangular feature by selecting the button in the dashboard. The model and model tree appear as shown in Figure 234. The model tree identifies the first solid feature in the model as a Protrusion.
lU
se
Figure 233
nl y
Task 7: Create a new part using the default part template.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Select the
Ensure that the Use default template option is selected. Select the button. The Pro/ENGINEER window now displays the cylinder model as the active model. The model contains only the default datum planes and coordinate system from the default template, as shown in the model tree and in the main window.
2.
3.
du ct io
4.
Select datum plane FRONT as the sketch plane and maintain the default values for Reference and Orientation. Select the button to begin sketching the section.
5.
Accept the default references of datum planes RIGHT and TOP by selecting the button in the References dialog box.
ro
Task 9: Sketch a circular section. 1. 2. Select the section. button to sketch the base feature as a circular
Pr e P
Start the sketch by pressing the left mouse button at the intersection of datum planes TOP and RIGHT, as shown in Figure 235.
Select the button on the dashboard to enter Sketcher mode. The Section dialog box appears to define the sketching and orientation references for the section.
Fo
rI
1.
Select the button to create an extruded base feature. The dashboard appears.
nt
er
Task 8: Select the feature type and define all of the sketching references.
na
lU
se
Enter [cylinder] as the part name in the Name section of the New dialog box.
nl y
229
Select the Part option in the New dialog box.
3.
Drag the mouse outwards. Press the left mouse button a second time to define the extent of the diameter as shown in Figure 235. Select at any location on the outer diameter to complete the sketch section.
du ct io
6.
Select the mode.
5.
Double-click on the diameter dimension of the circle and enter [10] as the new dimension value. Press the <Enter> key to accept the new value. button to complete the sketch and exit Sketcher
Task 10: Define the depth of the protrusion. 1. Pro/ENGINEER automatically applies a default depth value for the protrusion. This default value can be accepted or you can change it. Orient the model into its default orientation.
Pr e P
230
ro
Fo
4.
Press the middle mouse button to complete the sketch. Pro/ENGINEER automatically dimensions the sketch and constrains the sketch.
rI
nt
Figure 235
er
Select here to start sketching the circular section
na
lU
se
and buttons on the toolbar, respectively.
nl y
To redo or undo sketching actions, you can select the
2.
Select and drag the depth handle on the model or modify the value in the depth pull-down to change the depth dimension to [15] as shown in Figure 236.
Fo
rI
3.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Complete the cylindrical feature by selecting the button in the dashboard. The model and model tree appear as shown in Figure 234. The model tree identifies the first solid feature in the model as a protrusion.
nt
er
Figure 236
Figure 237
na
Select this depth handle and drag it to modify the extruded depth
lU
231
se
nl y
1. 2. 3.
Select the
Press the <Enter> key or select the window prompt to save cylinder.prt.
Pr e P
232
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
4.
Select the
button in the Erase Confirm dialog box.
se
Click File > Erase > Current to erase cylinder.prt from the current session of Pro/ENGINEER.
nl y
Exercise 2b
Goal
Extruded Base Protrusions II

In this exercise, you will create a new model using the default template provided in Pro/ENGINEER. You will create extruded protrusions as the base feature, as shown in Figure 238. You will select all the reference planes and sketch the feature using line entities.
9 Create a base extrusion using the line Sketcher tool 9 Make changes to the base feature
du ct io
1. 2.
Task 1: Create a new model using the default part template.
Select the
Select the Part option in the New dialog box. Enter [base] as the name of the part. Ensure that the Use default template option is selected and select the button to create the new part model.
3.
Pr e P
ro
4.
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 238
na
lU
233
se
nl y
Task 2: Select the feature type and define all of the sketching references.
2. 3. 4.
Select the
button to enter Sketcher mode.
Select datum plane RIGHT as the sketch plane.
Fo
du ct io
5. 6.
Select the
Accept the default references of datum planes TOP and FRONT button in the References dialog box.
by selecting the
Pr e P
ro
Task 3: Sketch the section.
1. 2.
Select the
Sketch the six line entities shown in Figure 240. Use the left mouse button to start and end each line segment.
234
rI
button to access the line sketching tool.
nt
Figure 239 button to begin sketching the section.
er
na
lU
Select the Reference section of the Section dialog box and select datum plane FRONT. Select the Orientation section of the dialog box and click Bottom from the pull-down menu. The Section dialog box appears as shown in Figure 239.
se
nl y
1.
Select the
button to create an extruded base feature.
4 3 2 1 6 5
3.
Press the middle mouse button to complete the line creation. Pro/ENGINEER automatically dimensions the sketch and applies constraints. These dimensions and constraints may not represent your required design intent. Select the
du ct io
5. 6. 7.
Pr e P
ro
4.
Zoom in on the sketch to make it easier to select the entities.
Select entity number 1 identified in Figure 240 using the left mouse button. Move the mouse to the location shown in Figure 241 to place the dimension value. Press the middle mouse button to locate the dimension.
Fo
rI
button to create new dimensions on the sketch.
nt
er
Figure 240
na
lU
235
se
nl y
Sketch these six line entities
Figure 241 9. Select the button to activate the selection tool.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
10. Double-click on the four dimensions to modify the values to those shown in Figure 242.
11. Select the

236
rI
button to complete the section.

nt
Figure 242
er
na
lU
se
nl y
As dimensions are created, the weak dimensions that were previously assigned are automatically removed from the section.
8.
Continue to create the four linear dimensions shown in Figure 241.
Task 4: Define the depth of the protrusion. 1. Drag the depth handle on the model or modify the value in the depth pull-down to change the depth dimension to [100]. Select the button to complete the protrusion. The model and model tree appear as shown in Figure 243.
2.
1. 2.
Select the protrusion that you just created in the model tree. Press and hold the right mouse button and click Edit in the pop-up menu. All dimensions associated with the protrusion appear on the model as shown in Figure 244.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
Task 5: Modify dimension values associated with the protrusion.
rI
nt
er
Figure 243
Figure 244
na
lU
237
se
nl y
3. 4. 5. 6.
Double-click on the 10 dimension value. Enter [15] as the new dimension value and press the <Enter> key.
8. 9.
Regenerate the model.
Task 6: Redefine the extrusion direction for the protrusion. 1. 2. Select the Protrusion that you just created. You can select in the model tree or directly on the model. Press and hold the right mouse button and click Edit Definition in the pop-up menu. The dashboard that was used to create the feature reappears. Select the button to switch the extrusion direction from one side of datum plane RIGHT to the other.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
4. 5.
Select the
3.
Select the Protrusion in the model tree, press the right mouse button and click Rename. Enter [Lbracket] as the new name. The model and model tree appear as shown in Figure 245.
Fo
238
rI
button to complete the redefinition.
nt
Figure 245
er
na
lU
Enter [75] as the new depth dimension value and press the <Enter> key.
se
7.
Double-click on the 100 depth dimension value.
As an alternative to using the Edit option, you can also double-click directly on the feature in the main window. Double-click anywhere on the protrusion that you just created.
nl y
Select the
button to regenerate the model.
1. 2. 3.
Select the
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
4.
Select the
se
nl y
239
Pr e P
240
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 2c
Goal
Creating Additional Parts
Task 1: Create new parts. 1.
du ct io
Fo
Figure 246
rI
nt
Create each of the new parts shown in Table 23. Start each part by creating default datum planes (either using the default template or by creating them in Part mode). Carefully consider your choices for sketching and reference planes so as to obtain the default orientation shown for each part. Save each part when they are completed.
er
Table 23
na
Pr e P
ro
Figure 248
lU
Figure 247
Figure 249
se
241
9 Create extruded solid base features
nl y
In this exercise, you will practice creating base features as the first solid features in new models. Create the protrusions shown in Table 23. Ensure that once you have completed the feature, their default orientation appears as shown.
Pr e P
242
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Review Questions
Question 1 Identify the following base feature forms.
du ct io
c.
Pr e P
ro
d.
________________
________________
Fo
b.
________________
rI
nt
er
na
lU
243
a.
________________
se
nl y
Question 2
Which of the following statements describe default datum planes? a. b. c. d. first solid features reference features
foundation for part
b. c. Question 4
datum plane FRONT datum plane TOP
ro
Pr e P
244
du ct io
a. b. c.
datum plane RIGHT
datum plane FRONT datum plane TOP
Fo
rI
nt
What was the sketching plane for the extruded protrusion shown below?
er
na
lU
a.
datum plane RIGHT
se
Question 3
Which of the following can be selected as the sketching plane of the first solid feature?
nl y
have mass
Question 5
The sketch orientation plane selected automatically by Pro/ENGINEER must be used to orient the model while sketching the section for the base feature. a. b. True False
Question 6
___________ must be selected when sketching to locate sketched geometry with respect to existing features in the part. Dimensions that you create are referred to as strong dimensions and can be automatically deleted by the system.
b. Question 8
False
a. b. c. d.
Edit Regenerate
Edit Definition
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Modify
Fo
rI
nt
Which option is used to access the dashboard for an existing feature to make changes to it, such as flipping the extrusion direction?
er
na
a.
True
lU
Question 7
se
nl y
245
Question 9
Where would you click and drag to change the depth of the following extrusion?
A B D
A B C D
Pr e P
246
ro
du ct io
Use the Edit Definition option to rename a feature in the model tree. a. True False
b.
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
9Creating Edge Chamfers 9Creating Corner Chamfers 9Creating Rounds 9Creating Straight Holes 9Redefining Pick and Place Features
Chamfers, rounds, and holes are pick and place features. This means that the shape of the feature is implied and therefore you are not required to sketch the section. Pick and place features can be added once the models base feature has been created.
Fo
rI
Creating Pick and Place Features
nt
er
Chapter 3
na
lU
31
se
nl y
32
lU
se
nl y
3.1 Creating an Edge Chamfer
2. 3. 4.
Select the placement references.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
To start the creation of an edge chamfer, select the button on the toolbar or click Insert > Chamfer > Edge Chamfer in the menu bar. The dashboard appears, as shown in Figure 32, with all of the options available for creating edge chamfers.
Complete the feature.
Step 1: Start the creation of the feature
Define the dimensioning scheme.
Fo
1.
Start the creation of the feature.
rI
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create an edge chamfer:
nt
er
Figure 31
Figure 32
33
na
lU
se
Edge chamfer (material added)
Edge chamfer (material removed)
nl y
A chamfer adds a beveled edge between two adjacent surfaces, as shown in Figure 31. An edge chamfer can add or remove material from an edge.
Step 2: Select the placement references

As an alternative, you can select the reference prior to selecting the button. To create an edge chamfer you must select the edges on which the edge chamfer will be placed. Multiple edges can be selected individually or using the <Ctrl> key. If you select multiple edges individually, an independent dimension is applied to each edge. However, if you select multiple edges while holding the <Ctrl> key, a single dimension is applied to all edges. This method enables you to control changes to all edges with a single dimension. By default, once an edge has been selected, Pro/ENGINEER automatically creates a DxD chamfer on this edge.
du ct io
Fo
Dimension Types
Edge chamfers have four different dimension types. To change the dimension type select the pull-down menu in the dashboard and select one of the four dimension types, as shown in Figure 33.
The dimension types and how they are applied to a model are shown in Figure 34.
Pr e P
34
ro
rI
nt
The default DxD chamfer that is automatically assigned to selected edges can be modified to the required dimension type using the options on the dashboard.
Figure 33
er
na
Step 3: Define the dimensioning scheme
lU
se
nl y
(adjacent surfaces must be perpendicular)
Reference surface
Fo
rI
Dimension Values
When the dimension type has been selected, the exact dimension values can be defined. The dimensions that are required depend on the dimension type that has been selected. To specify the exact dimension values for an edge chamfer, you can either select and drag the handles that appear on the Pro/ENGINEER model or you can enter a value in the dashboard, as shown in . You can change the chamfer dimension in the dashboard You can change the chamfer by dragging the handle
ro
du ct io
Pr e P
Step 4: Complete the feature

Once the correct dimensions have been defined, select the on the dashboard to complete the edge chamfer. button
nt
er
are measured from. Select the button to switch the reference to the other surface adjacent to the selected edge.
Figure 35
na
If d1 x d2 or Ang x d is selected, you must select a reference surface. The reference surface defines where the angle or the d1 dimension
lU
Figure 34
se
35
Reference surface
nl y
3.2 Creating a Corner Chamfer
corner chamfer
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create an edge chamfer:
3. 4.
Define the dimensioning scheme.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
To start the creation of a corner chamfer, click Insert > Chamfer > Corner Chamfer. The CHAMFER dialog box appears as shown in Figure 37, with the elements required to create the chamfer.
Fo
2.
Select the placement reference.
36
rI
1.
Start the creation of the feature.
nt
Figure 37
er
Figure 36
na
lU
se
nl y
A corner chamfer removes material from the corner of a feature, as shown in Figure 36.
Step 2: Select the placement reference

Select the corner that is to be chamfered. A corner chamfer is created at the intersection of three edges. To select this reference, select on or near the corner of the model.
Step 3: Define the dimensioning scheme
rI
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
The options enable you to either select a point on the edge (Pick Point) or enter a value (Enter-input). The default is Pick Point. To use this option, select a location on the highlighted edge to define the length of the chamfer. To enter an exact value, click Enter-input and enter a value at the prompt. Once the first edge is defined, the second and third edges must also be defined using the same dialog box.
Once the dimensions have been defined, select the button to preview the corner chamfer. You can make changes if required; otherwise, select the button to complete the chamfer.
Fo
nt
er
Figure 38
na
Once the corner has been selected you must define the Dimensions element. Each edge that intersects the corner is individually highlighted. As each edge highlights, define the cut dimension for the corner chamfer. To define the dimension you are prompted to select an option from the PICK/ENTER dialog box, as shown in Figure 38.
lU
se
O
37
nl y
3.3 Creating Rounds
Constant edge round (material added)
Variable edge rounds
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create a round: 1. 2. 3. 4. Start the creation of the feature. Select the placement references. Define the dimensions of the feature.
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
To start the creation of a round, select the button on the toolbar or click Insert > Round in the menu bar. The dashboard appears, as shown in Figure 310, with all of the options for creating rounds.
Fo
38
rI
nt
Figure 39
Figure 310
er
Constant edge round (material removed)
na
lU
se
nl y
Rounds can add or remove material as shown in Figure 39. In this chapter you will learn about constant edge rounds (default), variable edge rounds and full rounds.

As an alternative, you can select the reference prior to selecting the button. You can create many different types of rounds. The surface or edge references that are required to place a round vary depending on the type of round that is required. This chapter covers constant edge chain rounds, variable edge chain rounds, and full rounds. A constant, edge chain round has a constant radius along its entire reference edge. To create a constant, edge chain round you must select the edge(s) on which the round is to be placed. You can also select the adjacent surfaces that intersect at the edge that is to be rounded. By default, once references are selected, Pro/ENGINEER automatically creates a constant, edge chain round. Figure 311 shows an example of the default constant, edge chain round. Constant Edge Chain Round
du ct io
Fo
Multiple edges or surfaces can be selected by pressing and holding the <Ctrl> key while selecting the references. Alternatively, pressing and holding the <Shift> key while selecting an edge enables you to select a chain of edges.
rI
Variable, Edge Chain
Pr e P
A variable, edge chain round enables you to define at least two radii along its reference edge. Selecting the references for a variable, edge chain round is the same as for a constant, edge chain round. Once the default constant, edge chain round appears on the model, it can be changed into a variable, edge chain round. To make the change, press and hold the right mouse button and click Make Variable in the pop-up menu. The round is now a variable, edge chain round with two sets of handles that define the radii at each end of the round. It is also possible to have intermediate points between the endpoints of a variable, edge chain round with different radius values. To create an intermediate point, place your mouse on one of the endpoint radii values, press the right mouse button and click Add Radius in the pop-up menu. An additional radius value appears that can be selected and dragged to a new location along the edge.
39
ro
nt
er
Figure 311
na
lU
se
Constant, Edge Chain Round
nl y
Figure 312 explains how to create a variable, edge chain round. To change a constant edge chain round to a variable round, press the right mouse button and click Make Variable.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
To add an intermediate radii, select an endpoint handle, press the right mouse button and click Add Radius.
To move the intermediate radii, select the handle and drag.
Fo
310
rI
nt
Figure 312
er
Radii values are applied to the endpoints of the reference edge. Each can be modified independently.
na
lU
se
nl y
Full Round
Full Round
rI
The two edges shown in Figure 314 are used to create the full round.
Fo
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
The two surfaces shown in Figure 315 are used to create the full round. Once you select the two surfaces, select which surface is to be replaced by the full round.
nt
er
Figure 313
Two selected edges
Figure 314
na
lU
311
se
A full round enables you to replace a whole surface with a rounded surface. The round radius is automatically calculated to replace the bounded surface while maintaining tangency to the adjacent surfaces. A full round is placed by selecting two edges or two surfaces that are not adjacent to each other. To select multiple references at one time, press and hold the <Ctrl> key. By default, once you select two edge references Pro/ENGINEER automatically creates a constant, edge chain round. To change this to a full round, place your mouse on one of the rounds, press the right mouse button and click Full Round in the pop-up menu. Figure 313 shows an example of a full round.
nl y
Two selected surfaces
Surface to be replaced with full round
du ct io
Fo
Once rounds are placed, the dimensions of the radii can be changed by dragging the handles on the model as shown in Figure 316. As an alternative you can also change the round radii in the dashboard.
ro
Pr e P
The radius of a full round is determined by the surfaces or edges that define it and therefore cannot be changed.

Once the correct dimensions have been defined, select the to complete the round. button
312
rI
Select and drag these handles to the round radii.
nt
Step 3: Define the dimensions of the feature
Figure 316
er
na
Figure 315
lU
se
nl y
3.4 Creating Simple, Straight Holes

Holes are pick and place features because their cross-section are circular. Holes remove material from the model. You can create two types of holes: Straight and Standard. Straight holes are subdivided into Simple and Sketched holes. Both Simple and Sketched straight holes are shown in Figure 317. This chapter focuses on simple holes. Standard holes enable you to enter predefined parameter values to generate the hole.
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create a simple hole: 1. 2. Start the creation of the feature. Select the placement references. Define the dimensions of the feature. Define the depth of the feature. Complete the feature.
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
3. 4.
5.
To start the creation of a hole, select the button on the toolbar or click Insert > Hole in the menu bar. The dashboard appears, as shown in Figure 318, with all of the options for creating holes. Simple straight holes are the default hole types.
Fo
rI
nt
er
Sketched hole
Figure 317
na
Simple hole
lU
313
se
nl y

As an alternative, you can select the reference prior to selecting the button.
nt
er
Holes are placed on the model by referencing existing features using one of four placement schemes; Linear, Radial, Diameter and Coaxial. This chapter covers the Linear and Coaxial placements schemes. These schemes can be defined in the dashboard under the placement slide-up panel. You do not always need to explicitly select a scheme because the references that you select usually identify the scheme for you. A coaxial and linear hole are shown in Figure 319.
Fo
rI
Linear Placement
Pr e P
314
ro
du ct io
Figure 319
To place a linear hole, you must first select a surface as the primary reference. This defines the placement surface for the hole. Once selected, Pro/ENGINEER automatically places the hole. The hole appears with four handles; the two handles that are at 90 to each other are used to assign the secondary references. The secondary references place the hole relative to the existing geometry. Drag and drop the handles on the required references to locate the hole. Try to use surfaces as references if you cannot use. datum planes because they are more stable than, for example, points or edges.
na
lU
coaxial hole
linear hole
se
nl y
Figure 318
Figure 320 shows how the references for placing the hole are assigned. A cylindrical extrusion always includes a datum axis. To place the hole, select the placement surface.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
To place the hole, select and drag the other secondary reference handle onto a second reference surface.
The hole dimensions appear relative to the placement references.
Fo
rI
nt
To place the hole, select and drag the secondary reference handle onto a reference surface.
er
Figure 320
315
na
lU
se
Secondary reference handles.
nl y
All the placement references (placement and secondary) can also be assigned using the dashboard. To access the Placement options, select the button on the dashboard. The slide-up panel appears as shown in Figure 321. To assign the reference, select in the field and select the reference on the model.
Figure 321
To place the coaxial hole, select the placement axis.
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
The hole now references the axis and the placement plane.
Fo
316
rI
To set the placement plane, select a reference surface.
nt
Figure 322
er
Coaxial Placement
To place a coaxial hole, an axis must be selected as a reference. This defines the placement axis for the hole. Once selected, Pro/ENGINEER automatically places the hole. To finalize the hole placement, you must select an additional reference that defines the placement plane for the hole. Figure 322 shows how the references for placing a coaxial hole are assigned.
na
lU
se
nl y
Both the placement references (axis and placement plane) can also be assigned using the dashboard. To access the Placement options, select the button on the dashboard. The slide-up panel appears as shown in Figure 323. To assign the reference, select in the field and select the reference on the model. The secondary reference can also be assigned using the right-mouse pop-up menu and clicking Offset References Collector. Once enabled, select the placement surface for the hole.
Figure 323
Step 3: Define the dimensions for the feature

In addition to the secondary reference placement handles that appear on the feature, additional drag handles appear that enable you to change the diameter and depth of the hole. These dimensions can be changed by dragging the handles to the desired value or by double-clicking on them and entering a value, as shown in Figure 324.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
To change hole dimensions, select and drag the handle as necessary.
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
To change hole dimensions, double-click on the value and enter a new one.
Figure 324 Once the correct dimensions have been defined, select the button.
lU
317
se
nl y
Step 4: Define the depth options of the feature

By default, all holes are created in one direction from the placement reference. Pro/ENGINEER determines this direction for you. To reverse the direction, use either of the following methods: The button is also available in the Placement pop-up menu to flip the direction of a coaxial hole. Drag the depth handle through the placement plane so that it extrudes in the opposite direction.
Pr e P
ro
You can also set the depth option by pressing the <Shift> key while dragging the depth handle. This enables you to snap the depth to a surface.
du ct io
options, select the button on the dashboard. The slide-up panel appears as shown in Figure 326.
The hole that is automatically created when you select the placement reference has a specified value (blind depth) assigned to it and is created in one direction from the placement reference. These options do not always capture your design intent. Using the Shape options you can customize both of these options. To access the shape
Fo
rI
nt
Figure 325
er
Depth options are defined in either of these sections.
Figure 326
318
na
Side options are defined in this section.
lU
se
Select the button on the dashboard and select the button in the slide-up panel, as shown in Figure 325.
nl y
Depth Options
Six depth options are available when creating a hole. The options are described in Table 31: Table 31
Name Button Description
du ct io
The Symmetric option enables you to create a hole that extrudes equal distances on both sides of the placement reference.
Selected surface reference (Through Until hole)
Fo
The model in Figure 327 shows the resulting holes created by each depth option.
rI
nt
To Selected
Extrude to a selected point, curve, plane, or surface.
er
Through Until
Extrude to intersect with a selected surface or plane.
na
The secondary references can also be assigned using the right-mouse pop-up menu and clicking Offset References Collector. Once selected, you can select the references directly on the model without having to drag the handles.
Blind Symmetric To Next Through All
Extrude to intersect with all surfaces.
lU
Extrude to the next surface.
se
Extrude on both sides of the sketch plane by half the specified value in each direction.
Through All Through Until To Selected
Pr e P
ro
Selected edge reference (To Selected hole)
Primary Placement Reference Figure 327

319
Extrude from the sketch plane by a specified depth value.
To Next
nl y
Blind
Side Options
For many features, the design intent may require that it extrudes in one or two directions from the placement plane or sketching plane. For holes, a second side, Side 2, is defined by selecting a depth option in the Figure 328. slide-up panel on the dashboard, as shown in
All depth options except for the Symmetric depth option are the same as those used for the primary direction. If the Symmetric depth option is used for the primary direction, the value is divided equally between both sides. Figure 329 shows holes extruded in both directions.
Fo
du ct io
Primary Direction
rI
nt
Figure 328
er
na
Side 2 Direction Primary and Side 2 direction defined with Blind depth values. Primary direction defined with a Symmetric depth value.
Pr e P
ro
Figure 329
320 Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I
lU
Primary Reference
se
Side 2 depth options
nl y

Once the depth has been defined, select the the hole. button to complete
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
321
se
nl y
3.5 Redefining Pick and Place Features

Once you have created a pick and place feature, Pro/ENGINEER enables you to quickly and easily make changes to it. To make changes, select the feature in the model tree with the left mouse button, press and hold the right mouse button and click the required options in the pop-up menu. You can also select the feature directly on the model and press the right mouse button to access the options. To make changes to the feature use any of the options described in Table 32. You can also access the dimension values by double-clicking directly on the feature in the main window.
Edit
Rename
Pr e P
322
ro
du ct io
Fo
Edit Definition
Accesses the dashboard to redefine any of the elements used to define the feature. Enables you to enter a name for the feature directly in the model tree.
rI
nt
Displays the dimensions associated with the feature. You can double-click on the values to make dimensional changes.
er
Option
Description
na
Table 32
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 3a
Goal
Pick and Place Features

In this exercise, you will open the model you created in Exercise 2a, as shown in Figure 330, and you will practice adding pick and place features (chamfers, holes, and rounds). You will place the features using a combination of menu options and the dashboard. The resulting model appears as shown in Figure 331.
9 9 9 9
Create edge chamfers Create holes Create simple rounds Create variable rounds
du ct io
Task 1: Open the model called rectangle.prt 1. Open rectangle.prt.
If you have not completed Exercise 2a, open the part called ex2a_rectangle.prt.
Task 2: Create simple rounds on the model.
ro
Pr e P
1.
Select the button to create a simple round. The dashboard appears as shown in Figure 332.
Fo
rI
nt
Figure 330
er
Figure 332
na
Figure 331
lU
323
se
nl y
2.
du ct io
Drag one of these handles to dimension the round
Fo
ro
4.
Pr e P
To achieve an exact value you can also use the dashboard. Enter [0.4] as the radial dimension for the rounds, as shown in Figure 335.
324
rI
nt
3.
Handles appear on one of the rounded edges. Drag one of the handles shown in Figure 334, until the radial dimension for the round is approximately 2.25. All three rounds act as one and dynamically update as you drag the handles.
Figure 334
Figure 335
er
Figure 333
na
If you select multiple edges individually to create rounds, you can change the dimension of each round independent of the other rounds. Depending on your design intent, you can create rounds either by using the <Ctrl> key or selecting them individually.
lU
se
Select these edges to round
nl y
To create the round, select the edges of the model shown in Figure 333. To select multiple edges at one time, press and hold the <Ctrl> key while selecting the edges. Selecting multiple edges using the <Ctrl> key ensures that the rounds are all the same radius and are driven by one dimension value. A default round automatically appears on the model.
5. 6.
Press the <Enter> key to update the dimension value. Select the button to complete the simple round, the model appears as shown in Figure 336. Notice how the model tree updates with a single round feature now added.
Task 3: Create the variable round.
du ct io
Pr e P
ro
2.
Select the vertical edge shown in Figure 337 to create the variable round on. This is a hidden edge, to select it move the cursor over the hidden edge and when it appears highlighted, press the left mouse button to select it. A constant round is created by default.
Select this edge for the variable round
Fo
1.
Select the appears.
rI
button to create a variable round. The dashboard
nt
er
Figure 336
Figure 337
na
lU
325
se
nl y
3.
Press the right mouse button and click Make Variable in the pop-up menu to convert this constant round to variable round, as shown in Figure 338.
Figure 338 4.
Top handles can be dragged
du ct io
Bottom handles can be dragged independently to apply a different radius than the top radius Figure 339
Pr e P
ro
5.
Drag the handle that appears for the bottom radius until the dimension value is approximately 1.5. For a variable round, both radial values are independent.
Task 4: Add a new radius to the variable round. 1. Move your mouse over the handle for the top radius and press the right mouse button as shown in Figure 340. Click Add Radius in the pop-up menu to add an intermediate point to the variable round.
326
Fo
rI
Handles appear at either end of the reference edge, as shown in Figure 339. Drag the handle that appears for the top radius until the dimension value is approximately 2.25. The bottom round remains the same.
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
To access this the Make Variable option, select anywhere but on the edge being rounded.
Select on this handle and press the right mouse button to add a new radius to the variable round
Figure 340 2.
Fo
To fully locate an intermediate point for a variable round, open the Sets slide-up panel, select the point, click Reference in the Location pull-down menu, and select the reference.
rI
Select this round handle to drag the new radius to the desired location
du ct io
3.
4.
Pr e P
ro
Change the radius of this intermediate point by dragging the handles to approximately 0.75. Select the button to complete the variable round. The model appears as shown in Figure 342.
nt
er
Figure 341
Figure 342
327
na
A new radius appears, as shown in Figure 341. Select on the circular handle for the new radius and drag it approximately to the midpoint between the two end radii. Zoom in on the model, if necessary.
lU
se
nl y
Task 5: Create the hole.
1.
Figure 343
Task 6: Select the placement references for the hole. 1. Select the top surface of the base feature as the primary surface for the hole, as shown in Figure 344. The hole automatically appears as shown in Figure 345. The handles enable you to select the secondary references, and change the diameter or depth values.
Select the top surface as the primary surface for the hole
du ct io
Fo
ro
Pr e P
Use these square handles to specify the secondary references for the hole.
328
rI
nt
Figure 344
Figure 345
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Select the button to start the creation of the hole. The dashboard appears as shown in Figure 343.
2.
Select and drag one of the square handles shown in Figure 345 to the left surface of the base feature. Once your mouse is placed over the surface it highlights to indicate that it is the active surface. Release the mouse. This surface is now a secondary reference for the hole, as shown in Figure 346. Drag the square handle to the left surface
du ct io
Drag the second square handle to the front surface
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
nt
3.
Select and drag the second handle shown in Figure 345 to the front surface of the base feature. Once your mouse is placed over the surface it highlights to indicate that it is the active surface. Release the mouse. This surface is now a secondary reference for the hole, as shown in Figure 347. The hole is now fully located with respect to the existing geometry.
er
Figure 346
Figure 347
na
lU
329
se
nl y
Task 7: Define the dimensions for the hole. 1. Double-click on the dimension value that references the left edge. The current value appears in a text box as shown in Figure 348.
Figure 348 2. 3. 4. Change the dimension value to be 8.00, as shown in Figure 349. Press the <Enter> key to accept this value.
Change the value of the hole diameter to 0.75, as shown in Figure 349. You can either drag the diameter handle or enter a value in the dashboard.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Change the hole dimension to 0.75
Fo
Change the dimension value that references the front edge to 7.5, as shown in Figure 349.
330
rI
nt
Figure 349
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Task 8: Change the holes depth options. 1. You can also set the depth option by pressing the <Shift> key while dragging the depth handle. This enables you to snap the depth to a surface. Select the button on the dashboard. The Shape pop-up menu appears as shown in Figure 350.
du ct io
Fo
By default, holes only extrude in one direction. A second direction depth value can be assigned if the design intent requires it.
rI
Pr e P
ro
3.
Click Through All from the pull-down menu to extend the hole depth through the entire model. Select the pop-up menu. button in the dashboard to close the Shape
4.
5.
Select the button to complete the hole. The model appears as shown in Figure 352.
nt
2.
By default, the depth for the hole is blind. Select the pull-down menu for the hole depth options, as shown in Figure 351.
er
Figure 350
Figure 351
na
lU
331
se
nl y
Figure 352 Task 9: Create an edge chamfer.
1.
Fo
2.
du ct io
Select one of the edges shown in Figure 354 to create a chamfer. The edge chamfer automatically appears on the model encompassing all four edges. This is because the rounds that were previously created make the edges tangent to one another (edge chain). Because of the edge chain once one is selected all are included within the chamfer. Select one of these edges to chamfer
Pr e P
ro
332
rI
nt
Figure 353
Figure 354
er
Select the button to create an edge chamfer. The dashboard appears as shown in Figure 353.
na
lU
se
nl y
3.
Similar to the other pick and place features, handles appear on the model, as shown in Figure 355. Drag the handles on the edge chamfer until the dimension is approximately 1.0. All four chamfered edges act as one and dynamically update as you drag the handles.
Figure 355
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
5.
Select the button to complete the edge chamfer, the model appears as shown in Figure 357.
nt
er
4.
In the dashboard, set the dimension for the chamfered edges, to 0.5 as shown in Figure 356. Press the <Enter> key to update the dimension value.
Figure 356
Figure 357
na
lU
Drag and drop one of these square handles
se
O
333
nl y
1. 2. 3.
Select the
Press the <Enter> key or select the window prompt to save rectangle.prt.
Pr e P
334
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
4.
Select the
se
nl y
Exercise 3b
Goal
Coaxial Hole
rI
nt
er
na
Figure 358 Figure 359 After you complete this exercise, you will be able to:
du ct io
Task 1: Open the part called cylinder.prt 1. Open cylinder.prt.
If you have not completed Exercise 2a, open the part called ex2a_cylinder.prt.
Task 2: Create the coaxial hole.
ro
Pr e P
1.
9 Create a coaxial hole 9 Redefine the coaxial holes depth option
Select the button to create a hole. The dashboard appears as shown in Figure 360.
Fo
Figure 360
lU
335
se
nl y
In this exercise. you will open another model you created in Exercise 2a, as shown in Figure 358, and you will practice adding a coaxial hole to the model. The resulting model appears as shown in Figure 359.
Task 3: Select the references for the coaxial hole. If the axis A_2 is not displayed, select the button on the toolbar to display the axes in the model. 1. Select the A_2 axis, shown in Figure 361, as the primary reference to place the hole.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
You can also select your secondary reference using the Placement slide-up panel on the dashboard.
Fo
2.
Press the right mouse button and click Offset References Collector in the pop-up menu to select the secondary reference, as shown in Figure 362.
336
rI
nt
Figure 361
Figure 362
er
na
lU
Select axis A_2
se
nl y
3.
Select the front surface of the model, shown in Figure 363, as the secondary reference, Pro/ENGINEER automatically creates a coaxial hole with default dimensions.
Task 4: Define the dimensions for the coaxial hole. 1. 2. Select and drag the handle shown in Figure 364 to change the holes diameter dimension value to approximately 3.75. Select and drag the handle shown in Figure 364 to change the holes depth dimension value to approximately 9.00.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Select this square handle to drag the hole depth dimension
Fo
rI
nt
er
Select this surface as the secondary reference for the hole
Figure 363
na
Select this square handle to drag the hole diameter dimension Figure 364
lU
337
se
nl y
3.
Select the button to complete the coaxial hole. The model appears as shown in Figure 365.
Figure 365 Task 5: Edit the coaxial hole.
2. 3.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Press the right mouse button and click Edit in the pop-up menu as shown in Figure 366. The dimension values appear on the model.
When the hole becomes highlighted, select the hole using the left mouse button.
Fo
1.
Place the cursor in the area where the hole is located.
338
rI
nt
Figure 366
er
na
lU
se
nl y
4.
Double-click on the 3.75 diameter dimension value and change it to 4.0. Press the <Enter> key to accept the new value. Select the button to regenerate the model and update the new dimension values.
5.
Task 6: Redefine the coaxial holes depth option. 1. 2. 3.
Place the cursor in the area where the hole is located.
When the hole becomes highlighted, select the hole using the left mouse button. Press the right mouse button and click Edit Definition in the pop-up menu. The dashboard that was used to create the feature appears. Select the button shown in Figure 367 to access the available hole depth options.
4.
du ct io
Fo
rI
Select this button to open the hole depth options menu.
Pr e P
ro
nt
er
Figure 367
na
lU
se
O
339
nl y
As an alternative, you can also assign the depth option using the button on the toolbar.
5.
Select the button to change the hole depth option to Through All. The hole appears as shown in Figure 368.
1. 2. 3.
Select the
du ct io
Fo
rI
6.
Select the
button to complete the changes to the hole.
Click File > Erase > Current to erase cylinder.prt from the current session of Pro/ENGINEER. Select the button in the Erase Confirm dialog box.
Pr e P
340
ro
4.
nt
Figure 368
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 3c
Goal
Rounds
In this exercise, you will open the part called rounds.prt, as shown in Figure 369. You will create a number of rounds on the model. The order in which these rounds are added to the model have been selected to show you how round order can affect model geometry. The resulting model appears as shown in Figure 370.
nt
er
na
Figure 369 Figure 370
du ct io
1.
Task 2: Create rounds on surface C.
Pr e P
Alternatively, you can use the <Shift> key and select an edge, which then selects all adjacent edges automatically. You can also change the radius value in the dashboard.
ro
1. 2.
Task 1: Open the part called rounds.prt. Open rounds.prt.
Select the
9 Use placement options for rounds 9 Understand how round order affects geometry
Select all four bounding edges of surface C. To select multiple edges at one time, press and hold the <Ctrl> key. The rounds automatically appear on the model.
3.
Select and drag the handles for the round radius to approximately 0.3.
Fo
rI
button to create a simple round.
lU
341
se
nl y
4.
Select the button to complete the feature. The part appears as shown in Figure 371.
Figure 371 Task 3: Create rounds on surface D.
Pr e P
342
ro
du ct io
The value is the default value 0.3 because it is the last value entered.
3. 4.
Accept the value of 0.3 for the radius.
Select the
Fo
2.
Select one of the top edges of surface D to be rounded. All edges up to but not including the bottom edge are automatically selected. The round appears along all edges.
rI
1.
Select the
button to create a simple round.
button to complete the round.
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Task 4: Create the rounds on protrusion A. 1. Create rounds with a value of [0.3] for the four edges where protrusion A meets the base feature. Use the <Ctrl> key when selecting the edges so they are all included as one feature and have one dimension driving them. The part appears as shown in Figure 372.
ro
du ct io
Fo
2.
Create rounds with a value of [0.6] for the four corner edges on protrusion A. Use the <Ctrl> key to select the edges. The part appears as shown in Figure 373.
rI
Pr e P
nt
er
Figure 372
Figure 373
na
lU
343
se
nl y
Task 5: Create the rounds on protrusion B in the opposite order to those created on protrusion A. 1. 2. Create rounds with a value of [0.6] for all the four corner edges of protrusion B. Create rounds with a value of [0.3] for the tangent edges where the protrusion meets the base feature. It will only be necessary to select one edge, because the existing rounds create an edge chain. The part appears as shown in Figure 374.
Notice how the order in which the rounds are created affects the geometry. 3.
Pr e P
344
ro
du ct io
Save the part and click File > Erase > Current to erase the model from memory.
Fo
rI
nt
Figure 374
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Review Questions
Question 1
45 x d dxd d1 x d2 Ang x d
Question 3
Chamfer features always remove material. a. b. True False
Question 4
Round features can add or remove material. a. b. True
du ct io
Question 5
Which keyboard keys can be used to select multiple edges for a round or chamfer feature? a. <Tab> <Shift> <Ctrl> <Alt>
ro
b. c. d.
Pr e P
Question 6
Rounds on multiple edges can be controlled by one dimension. a. b. True False
False
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
Only ________ (how many?) edges can meet at a vertex selected for a corner chamfer.
lU
se
345
nl y
Select all of the following chamfer types that require you to select a reference surface. (Hint: There is more than one correct answer.)
Question 7
What is the minimum number of radius dimensions that can be attached to a variable round applied to a single linear edge? a. b. c. d. 1
3 4
Question 8
Select the one hole depth option that requires you to specify a dimension. a. b. c. d. Blind Thru Next Thru Until Thru All
a. b. c. d.
datum plane
Question 10
ro
Pr e P
346
du ct io
You always use the Edit Definition option to change the value of a features dimensions. a. True False
b.
datum coordinate system datum curve
datum axis
Fo
rI
Question 9
Which one of the following datum features must be selected as a reference for a coaxial hole?
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
9Sketching Geometry 9Sketching Datum Curves
Once you finish creating the base feature, you can create sketched secondary features (e.g., protrusions, cuts, sketched datum curves) to build the model. When creating sketched features, you must first sketch a two-dimensional (2D) cross-section of the feature. Sketcher mode is used to sketch and dimension 2D geometry that is then used to create the 3D feature.
Fo
rI
Sketching Geometry
nt
er
Chapter 4
na
lU
41
se
nl y
42
lU
se
nl y
4.1 Sketching Geometry

The process for creating secondary features is similar to the process of creating base features. Once you select the sketching and orientation reference planes, Pro/ENGINEER automatically places you in Sketcher mode. All the tools discussed for base features are available to create a profile. An example of sketched geometry appears as shown in Figure 41. Sketched geometry
Fo
rI
du ct io
1. 2.
3.
4. 5. 6. 7.
ro
Pr e P
General Steps
Use the following steps as a general guideline to create a sketch: Select sketching references.
Sketch the geometry. Use sketching tools to edit the sketched geometry as needed. Add and delete constraints as needed. Add and delete dimensions as needed. Modify the dimensions as needed. Complete the sketch.
nt
er
Figure 41
na
lU
43
se
nl y
Step 1: Select sketching references

You can also enter Sketch mode directly by selecting the Sketch option in the New dialog box. Select the sketch plane and sketch orientation reference plane, then select the button. You are automatically placed in Sketcher mode. Select sketching references to which the section is dimensioned and constrained. You can select datum planes, surfaces, edges, or vertices as references. Pro/ENGINEER automatically selects default references, as shown in the graphic on the left-hand side of Figure 42. The dashed lines represent the automatically selected references.
References
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
ro
Always examine default selections made by Pro/ENGINEER to see if they meet your design intent.
To create a reference, select existing features or entities (e.g., datum plane, datum curve, surface, edge, etc.) on the model. The reference status in the References dialog box should be set to "Fully Placed" before you start the sketch. If the model is not fully placed, the Reference Status is set to "Partially Placed". Although you can complete a sketch without fully placed references, it is recommended to fully place your sketch before exiting. This prevents problems later when adding or modifying features to the model. To delete a reference, highlight it in the References dialog box and select the button. References that are not used in the sketch are automatically removed from the list once you have completed the sketch. Select the sketching. button to accept the references and begin
44
rI
nt
Figure 42
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Step 2: Sketch the geometry

With the references selected, you are now ready to sketch the geometry. Table 41 describes some options for sketching that have not been described in the previous chapters. Construction entities can also be used to help you sketch geometry.
Centerline
Fo
Concentric Circle
du ct io
Circular Fillet
ro
Three-point Arc Tangent Arc
Pr e P
rI
Select the location where you want to intersect the centerline. A centerline appears attached to the cursor. Select a second location through which the centerline should pass. Pro/ENGINEER creates a centerline through the two points. Select a reference circle or an arc to define the centerpoint (the selected reference circle can be a sketched entity or a model edge). As you move the cursor, the circle rubberbands until you press the left mouse to finish. Select two lines. Pro/ENGINEER creates a circular fillet from the selected point that is closest to the intersection point of the two lines and trims the lines to the intersection point. Select the endpoints for the arc, then select an additional point on the arc. Select an endpoint of an existing entity to define tangency, then select a location for the other endpoint of the arc.
nt
er
na
lU
Line tangent to two entities
Select the location where you want the line to be tangent to an entity. A rubberband line appears attached to the cursor. Select a second location where you want the line to be tangent to an entity. Press the middle mouse button to complete the line creation.
se
Geometry
Button
Procedure
O
45
A complete list of sketching options is described in .
Table 41
nl y
Geometry Concentric Arc
Button
Procedure
ro
du ct io
To toggle a construction entity back to solid geometry, press the right mouse button and click Solid in the pop-up menu.
Fo
Pr e P
46
rI
nt
Figure 43
er
Construction Geometry
As with centerlines, construction entities are used as a reference and do not create solid geometry. Any entity can be converted to a construction entity by clicking Edit > Toggle Construction or pressing the right mouse button and clicking Construction in the pop-up menu. An example of construction geometry used to sketch a hexagon that requires only one dimension is shown in Figure 43.
na
lU
Center and Ends Arc
Select the centerpoint of the arc and the endpoints of the arc.
se
Select a reference circle or an arc to define the centerpoint (the selected reference circle can be a sketched entity or a model edge). As you move the cursor, the circle rubberbands to the required diameter. Press the left mouse button at the required diameter to start the arc, drag the mouse around the diameter and press the left mouse again to complete the arc.
nl y
Step 3: Use sketching tools to edit the sketched geometry
Divide
du ct io
Fo
rI
ro
Corner
To trim two entities with respect to each other to form a corner, select the button or click Edit > Trim > Corner in the menu bar. The corner sketching tool trims or extends the entities as needed. Select an entity on the segment that you want to remain.
Pr e P
nt
The line is divided at the selected point.
er
Select the button and select point on the line.
na
Figure 44
lU
The sketch shown in Figure 44 is created by sketching a line and dividing the line along its length.
se
To divide an entity into two, select the button or click Edit > Trim > Divide in the menu bar. You can also select at the intersection of two entities and divide both of them.
The point can be dragged.
nl y
47
A complete list of sketcher editing tools is described in .
Pro/ENGINEER provides easy-to-use sketcher editing and modification tools so you do not need to sketch precisely. You can easily make changes using some of the following editing tools.
The sketches shown in Figure 45 are created by sketching a rectangle using the line geometry tool and using the corner sketching tool to create the final geometry.
Figure 45
To dynamically trim segments on your sketch, select the button or click Edit > Trim > Delete Segment in the menu bar. This tool temporarily divides all entities at their intersection points with other entities. You can select individual segments to delete. Alternatively, you can hold down the left mouse button and drag a spline through those segments to delete multiple segments at once. For example, the sketch shown on the right-hand side of Figure 46 is created by sketching the geometry on the left and trimming the inside section of the circle, as shown in the middle sketch. Dynamically trim the circles by sketching a spline through the sections that are to be removed.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
48
rI
Dynamic Trim
nt
Figure 46
er
na
lU
Select the button and select the lines to trim or extend.
The lines are extended/trimmed to the vertex.
se
nl y
Mirror
To mirror selected entities about a centerline, select the entities to mirror and select the bar. button or click Edit > Mirror in the menu
Step 4: Add and delete constraints as needed

Constraints control how sketched entities behave. For example, if two lines are constrained to be equal length they remain equal length even when the geometry of the sketch changes. If the new geometry does not accommodate the constraints, the Resolve Sketch dialog box appears, where you must resolve the constraints or the changes. The Resolve Sketch dialog box is discussed in the next chapter. As you sketch geometry, Pro/ENGINEER automatically defines constraints as your cursor drags within a certain tolerance. You can add or delete constraints as needed. The following describes some basic constraints.
Pr e P
ro
A complete list of constraints is described in .
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 47
na
lU
49
se
and select the
button.
The entities are mirrored about the centerline.
Select the entities and the centerline
nl y
The sketch shown in Figure 47 is created using the mirror sketching tool.
Horizontal and Vertical
The lines shown in Figure 48 are constrained to be horizontal (H) and vertical (V).
Figure 48
Tangent
Equal Length
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
The lines shown in Figure 410 are constrained to be equal in length. Lines with the equal length constraint have the same L# symbol.
Fo
410
rI
nt
Figure 49
Figure 410
er
na
The arc shown in Figure 49 is constrained to be tangent (T) to the geometry line at its endpoint and tangent to the horizontal centerline.
lU
se
nl y
Point on Entity
The centerpoint of the large arc shown in Figure 411 is constrained to lie on the horizontal line ( ).
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
Equal Radius/Diameter
The two fillet arcs shown in Figure 412 are constrained to have equal radii (R1), while the radius of the larger arc (R2) is constrained to be equal to the diameter of the construction circle.
nt
er
Figure 411
Figure 412
na
lU
411
se
nl y
Horizontal and Vertical Alignment
The two vertices shown in Figure 413 are constrained to line up horizontally ( ), while the circle centerpoints are constrained to line up vertically ( ).
Figure 413
ro
Pr e P
412
du ct io
Once the sketch is completed, the disabled and locked constraint symbols no longer appear on the sketch.
Fo
rI
nt
Disable a constraint pressing the right mouse button. When a constraint is disabled, Pro/ENGINEER does not automatically define that constraint while sketching. To enable a constraint, press the right mouse button again. For example, the graphic on the left-hand side of Figure 414 shows the equal length constraint as disabled. You can continue to drag and size the entity; however, it cannot be completed so that an equal length constraint is assigned. Lock a constraint by holding down the <Shift> key and pressing the right mouse button. Unlock the constraint using the same method. When a constraint is locked, sketcher dimensions and geometry are locked into a specific location. Locking is useful if you want to move your sketch but you dont want certain geometry to vary. For example, the graphic on the right-hand side of Figure 414 shows the equal length constraint as locked. You can continue to drag the entity; however, the length of the entity remains the same.
er
Constraint Control
You can control the constraints as you sketch geometry. Before you select the final location for the entity using the left mouse button, you can control a constraint in the following ways:
na
lU
se
nl y
Figure 414
the You can also access the constraints by selecting Constrain in the Sketch menu.
button.
Some basic constraint options are described in Table 42.
Button
Description
du ct io
ro
Pr e P
Depending on the type of constraint you want to assign, you are prompted to select the entities to which the constraint applies.
Fo
The vertical constraint button makes a line vertical. The horizontal constraint button makes a line horizontal. The tangent constraint button makes 2 entities tangent. The point constraint button creates same points, points on entity, or collinear constraint. The equal constraint button creates equal lengths, equal radii or same curvature constraint.
rI
nt
er
Table 42
na
Assigning Constraints
Once entities are sketched, you can manually add any of the constraints to the geometry. To add constraints to the sketch, select
lU
se
413
nl y
In Figure 415, the two arcs in the left-hand graphic are sketched and automatically dimensioned so that they have two independent radius dimensions. In the right-hand graphic, the equal radii constraint is applied to the section by selecting the button and selecting the arcs. Both arcs are of equal radius, indicated by the R1 symbol.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
When assigning constraints you may need to deal with conflicts, as described in the next step.
constraint is assigned by selecting the button in the Constraints dialog box and then by selecting the center-point and the horizontal line.
Fo
In Figure 416, the center of the arc in the left-hand graphic is aligned with the horizontal entity as shown on the right-hand side. The
414
rI
nt
Figure 415
Figure 416
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Step 5: Add and delete dimensions as needed

As you sketch, dimensions are added and removed automatically so the geometry is always located with respect to the references but are not over-dimensioned. Dimensions created by Pro/ENGINEER are referred to as "weak" dimensions. as you sketch additional geometry, the system automatically removes them to avoid over-dimensioning. To create additional dimensions, select the button, select the entity or entities to dimension, and press the middle mouse button to place the dimension. Dimensions that you create are referred to as "strong" dimensions and cannot be automatically removed from the sketch. Strong and weak dimensions appear as shown in Figure 417. Weak dimensions appear in gray. Strong dimensions appear in yellow.
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
Weak dimensions
du ct io
Figure 417
Strong dimensions are considered required dimensions. You should make weak dimensions that are important to your design intent strong to ensure that the dimension value is not removed by the system as you sketch further geometry. To make a weak dimension strong, select the dimension value, press the right mouse button and click Strong in the pop-up menu. A weak dimension also becomes strong when you modify the dimension value. To modify the dimension value, double-click on the value and enter a new value in the field that appears.
Pr e P
ro
lU
se
Strong dimensions
nl y
415
A complete list of dimension types is described in .
The following are common types of dimensions can be created in Sketcher mode. To create a linear dimension, select the button and select the entity or entities to dimension using the left mouse button. Move the cursor to the desired location for the dimension and place the dimension using the middle mouse button. The different methods for dimensioning the linear entities are shown in Figure 418 and described in Table 43.
Fo
rI
nt
The placement of the dimension determines whether it is a horizontal or vertical dimension. In some cases, Pro/ENGINEER prompts you to select to show either horizontal or vertical. Keep the design intent in mind when considering the dimensioning scheme.
du ct io
Figure 418 Table 43

Procedure
ro
Dimension
Pr e P
To place Select line A. dimension sd0: Position the mouse cursor at the location you want to place the dimension, and press the middle mouse button. To place Select line B and line D. dimension sd1: Position the mouse cursor at the location you want to place the dimension, and press the middle mouse button. To place Select line A and the vertex between lines E and F. dimension sd2: Position the mouse cursor at the location you want to place the dimension, and press the middle mouse button.
416
er
na
E D
lU
se
nl y
Linear Dimensions
Dimension To place dimension sd3 and sd4:
Procedure Select the two vertices at the ends of line E. Position the mouse cursor at the location you want to place the dimension, and press the middle mouse button.
du ct io
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
When placing the dimension, the Type of dim dialog box or the Dim Orientation dialog box may appear, as shown in Figure 420. These dialog boxes appear depending on the location that you select to place the dimension.
nt
er
Figure 419
Figure 420
na
lU
se
Center/ Tangential Dimensions
To dimension the distance between circles and arcs, select the button and select the two entities. Move the cursor to the desired location and place the dimension using the middle mouse button. To place a slanted dimension, place the dimension at a point along a line that joins the two entities that are being dimensioned. A sketch with center/tangential dimensions appears as shown in Figure 419.
nl y
417
Radius/Diameter Dimensions
Figure 421
Pr e P
If you have accessed Sketcher independently (through File > New >Sketch), click File > Save to save the file with the .sec extension. If you
ro
du ct io
You can also modify multiple dimensions on a sketch using the Modify Dimensions dialog box, which is discussed in a later chapter.
Step 7: Complete the sketch
When you are satisfied with the geometry, dimensions and constraints, exit Sketcher mode and complete the sketch by selecting the button.
select the button, the file closes without saving.
418
Once dimensions are placed, you may want to modify the dimensions to suit your design intent. You can modify a dimension within the sketch by double-clicking on the dimension value and entering a new value in the field that appears.
Fo
Step 6: Modify the dimensions
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
To create a radius dimension, select the button and select an arc or a circle. Move the cursor to the desired location and place the dimension using the middle mouse button. To create diameter dimensions, select an arc or circle twice and place the dimension using the middle mouse button. An example of a sketch showing radius/diameter dimensions is shown in Figure 421.
4.2 Sketching Datum Curves
1. 2. 3.
Start the creation of the sketched datum curve.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
To create a sketched datum curve, select the button from the datums toolbar or click Insert > Model Datum > Sketched Curve.
Fo
Step 1: Start the creation of the sketched datum curve
rI
nt
Complete the sketched datum curve.
er
Sketch the geometry for the datum curve.
na
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create a sketched datum feature:
lU
se
Datum curves are non-solid geometry features that can be added to a model using a number of options. This section focuses on sketching datum curves. The sketching tools used to create a sketched datum curve are the same as those to create any sketched feature.
nl y
419
When you create a sketched feature, such as an extruded cut or protrusion, you can sketch a new section or you can select any existing sections. Existing sections can be created as sketched datum curves.
Step 2: Sketch the datum curve

Once you have started the creation of the datum curve, you must define the sketch plane and sketch orientation in the Sketched Datum Curve dialog box, as shown in Figure 422.
Sketch Plane Sketch Orientation
Pr e P
ro
420
du ct io
Once a sketch plane is defined, Pro/ENGINEER automatically selects a default sketch orientation plane. The sketch orientation reference is required to orient the model into 2D for sketching. It is similar to selecting the sketch orientation reference for a base feature. If the default selection is not the desired orientation, you can use any of the following options in the Sketched Datum Curve dialog box to change the reference:
Once the sketch orientation is defined, select the button to enter Sketcher mode. The References dialog box appears as shown in Figure 423.
Change the Sketch view direction by selecting the button. Change the Reference by selecting the default Reference and selecting the required reference plane or surface from the model. Change the Orientation option using the pull-down menu.
Fo
Select the sketch plane first. You can select a datum plane or surface as the sketch plane. The two-dimensional datum curve is sketched on this reference.
rI
nt
Figure 422
er
na
lU
se
nl y
du ct io
Datum curves are displayed in orange. You can modify the color by clicking View > Display Settings > System Colors in the main menu.
constraints, select the button to complete the sketch and exit Sketcher mode. A completed datum curve is shown in Figure 424. 2D 3D
Pr e P
ro
Once you are satisfied with the geometry, dimensions, and
Step 3: Complete the sketched datum curve
Fo
rI
Sketch the datum curve shape using the geometry tools discussed in previous chapters. As with other sketch features, you only need to sketch the general shape. Adding dimensions and constraints later will specifically define your design intent.
nt
er
button.
Figure 424
421
na
Define the sketch references using the References dialog box, as with any other sketch. Once the references have been defined, select the
lU
Figure 423
se
nl y
4.3 Interactive Exercise
Fo
Pr e P
422
ro
du ct io
rI
nt
Figure 425
er
na
lU
se
nl y
The sketch shown in Figure 425 is successfully regenerated using only four dimensions. This is possible because of sketcher constraints. Consider which constraints are used for each entity not dimensioned. Discuss these constraints within the class.
A possible solution appears as shown in Figure 426.
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
nt
er
Figure 426
na
lU
423
se
nl y
Pr e P
424
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 4a
Goal
Sketch Datum Curve in a New Part

In this exercise, you will create the sketched datum curves shown on the left-hand side of Figure 427. These curves can be used later to create the solid geometry shown on the right-hand side.
rI
ro
9 9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Create sketched datum curves Sketch center-and-ends arcs Sketch two-tangent lines Corner trim sketched entities Dynamic trim sketched entities Apply equal length and equal radius constraints Create linear sketch dimensions Modify sketch dimensions
Pr e P
du ct io
Task 1: Create a new part.
1. 2. 3.
Select the
Ensure that the Part and the Use default template options are selected. Enter [gauge] as the name of the part. Select the button.
Fo
button to create a new part.
nt
er
Figure 427
na
lU
425
se
nl y
Task 2: Start the creation of a sketched datum curve. 1. Always review the default selections made by Pro/ENGINEER. They may not meet your design requirements. Select datum plane FRONT as the sketch plane for the first datum curve. Select the button to begin creating the datum curve. The Sketch dialog box appears as shown in Figure 428. Notice that the sketching plane you selected is identified and the system has automatically selected a sketch orientation reference plane.
2.
Fo
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
plane for this feature. Select the Sketcher mode.
3.
Accept datum plane RIGHT as the sketch orientation reference
rI
nt
Figure 428
er
na
Task 3: Sketch a rectangular section. 1. The References dialog box appears with datum planes RIGHT 2. 3.
and TOP selected as sketching references. Select the button to accept these default references. Select the button to sketch a rectangle.
Start the rectangle at the intersection of datum planes RIGHT and TOP and drag it into the top-right quadrant, as shown in Figure 429. If the horizontal and vertical edges come close to the same size, the L1 symbol appears next to these edges, indicating the automatic equal length constraint has been added. When this symbol appears, press the left mouse button to complete the rectangle.
426
lU
button to enter
se
nl y
D in rag t h th is e di re re cta ct n io gl n. e
5.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
You can select the button to turn off the display of the datum planes.
Press <Enter> to complete the modification. The sketch appears as shown in Figure 430.
Fo
rI
4.
Modify the dimension of the rectangle. Select the button, double-click on the dimension with the left mouse button, and enter [1.5].
nt
er
Figure 429
Figure 430
na
lU
Start the rectangle here
se
The L1 symbol indicates the edges have equal lengths
O
427
nl y
Task 4: Sketch a center-and-ends arc.
1.
2. 3. 4.
Select the
button to create a center-and-ends arc.
Center of arc Startpoint of arc
er
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
428
ro
rI
Sketch the arc in this direction.
nt
Figure 431
na
do not meet.
lU
Sketch the arc from the top horizontal edge to the right-hand edge of the rectangle, as shown in Figure 431.
se
Select the vertex in the upper right-hand corner of the rectangle. This vertex is the center of the arc.
nl y
Select the symbol adjacent to the flyout toolbar for arcs.
button to access the
5.
Press the left mouse button on the right-hand vertical edge of the rectangle to complete the 90 arc. The arc appears as shown in Figure 432.
Task 5: Corner trim the arc and the edges of the rectangle.
1.
du ct io
Select the symbol adjacent to the flyout toolbar for trimming options. Select the rectangle.
Fo
6.
Modify the value of the radius dimension to [0.60].
rI
nt
er
Figure 432
na
button to access the 2. button to corner trim the arc and the edges of the
Pr e P
ro
lU
429
se
nl y
3. When trimming to a corner, select each entity on the portion you want to keep.
Select the top horizontal edge of the rectangle in the location shown in Figure 433.
4.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
Select the arc. The entities are trimmed to a corner, as shown in Figure 434.
430
rI
nt
Figure 433
Figure 434
er
na
lU
se
Select the horizontal edge anywhere along this segment.
nl y
5.
Corner trim the arc and the left-hand vertical edge of the rectangle in the same way. Remember to select the edges on the portions you want to keep. The sketch appears as shown in Figure 435.
rI
Task 6: Apply the equal length constraint.
du ct io
Select the Select the
1.
Notice that two dimensions control the height and width of what remains of the rectangle. The equal length constraint was removed when the top and right-hand side of the rectangle were trimmed. The constraint can be re-applied to the bottom and left-hand side so that a single dimension controls these lengths. button to open the Constraints dialog box. button to apply the equal length constraint.
2.
Pr e P
ro
Fo
nt
er
Figure 435
na
lU
431
se
nl y
3.
Select the bottom edge and the left-hand edge. The sketch appears as shown in Figure 436. The extra weak dimension has been removed and the L1 symbols appear adjacent to the edges.
Task 7: Complete the feature and rename the curve.
1.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Select the button to complete the sketched datum curve. The datum curve appears as shown in Figure 437.
Fo
432
rI
nt
Figure 436
Figure 437
er
na
lU
se
nl y
2. You can select the button to turn on the display of the datum planes. 3.
In the model tree, select the curve feature, press the right mouse button to access the pop-up menu and click Rename. Enter [front_profile] as the new name of the sketched datum curve. The model tree appears as shown in Figure 438.
Figure 438
du ct io
4.
Accept the defaults for sketch orientation reference plane and select the button to enter Sketcher mode.
ro
Task 9: Sketch an obround section. 1. The References dialog box appears. Select the accept the default references. button to
Pr e P
The first curve that was created cannot be seen because it is perpendicular to the current sketching plane.
2.
Select the button to sketch two circles, as shown in Figure 439. Sketch the circles so that they have equal radii and their centers are aligned vertically, as indicated by the constraint symbols. The circles are sketched in the lower right quadrant of the intersection of datum planes FRONT and RIGHT.
3.
Select the button to begin creating the datum curve. The Sketch dialog box opens. Notice that the sketching plane you selected is identified and the system has automatically selected a sketch orientation reference plane.
Fo
2.
Select datum plane TOP as the sketch plane for the second datum curve.
rI
1.
Return the model to its default orientation.
nt
Task 8: Create the second sketched datum curve.
er
na
lU
433
se
nl y
You can temporarily turn off the display of Sketcher dimensions using the button. The display can also be controlled for constraints with the button, vertices with the button, and the Sketcher grid with the button.
Equal Radii symbols
Vertical Alignment symbols
1.
2. 3.
Select the
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Select the left-hand side of the two circles. A line tangent to both circles is sketched, as shown in Figure 440.
Fo
434
rI
Select the symbol adjacent to the flyout toolbar for line options.
nt
er
Figure 439
na
button to access the
button to sketch a line tangent to two entities.
Figure 440
lU
se
nl y
4.
Sketch a second line tangent to the right hand sides of the circles, as shown in Figure 441.
Figure 441 5.
6.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
Select the inner segments for trimming. Hold down the left mouse button and drag a selection spline through the inner segments of the two circles, as shown in Figure 442.
nt
Select the button in the flyout toolbar for trimming options. When you select this option, all entities are temporarily divided where they intersect other entities.
er
Figure 442
na
lU
435
se
nl y
7.
Release the left mouse button to delete the selected segments. The sketch appears as shown in Figure 443.
8.
Pr e P
436
ro
du ct io
10. Create the dimension 0.23, as shown in Figure 444. Select the two vertical lines and place the dimension with the middle mouse button. Do not worry about the value of the dimension because you are modifying it once you complete creating all the required dimensions.
9.
Select the button to create dimensions. The current dimensions are weak dimensions created automatically by Pro/ENGINEER. They may not be the dimensions required for this design. As you create the required dimensions, the weak dimensions are deleted so that the sketch is not over-dimensioned. Dimensions you create cannot be deleted by the system; they can only be replaced.
Fo
If you turned off the display of dimensions, select the to turn them on.
rI
nt
Figure 443 button
er
na
lU
se
nl y
You can move a dimension to a new position. Select the button, select the dimension by holding the left mouse button, and drag the dimension to the desired position.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
11. Create the dimension 0.18, as shown in Figure 445 by selecting the center of the lower arc and the vertical orange reference entity. Place the dimension with the middle mouse button.
nt
er
Figure 444
Figure 445
na
Create this linear dimension.
lU
437
se
nl y
12. Create the dimension 0.60, as shown in Figure 446 by selecting the two arcs. Select the arc entities, not their centers. Click Vert in the DIM ORIENTATION dialog box. Place the dimension with the middle mouse button.
13. Finally, create the dimension 0.05, as shown in Figure 447 by selecting the edge of the upper arc and the horizontal orange reference entity. Place the dimension with the middle mouse button.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
438
rI
nt
Figure 446
Figure 447
er
na
lU
se
nl y
14. Select the button and double-click on each dimension to enter the new values shown in Figure 448.
15. The sketch is now complete. Select the button to finish the datum curve. The model appears in the default orientation, as shown in Figure 449.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 448
Figure 449
na
lU
439
se
nl y
16. Save the part and close the window. It is used later to create the solid geometry shown in Figure 450.
Figure 450
Pr e P
440
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 4b
Goal
Sketch Datum Curve on Existing Geometry

In this exercise you will create a sketched datum curve in a part that already contains solid geometry. Instead of selecting a datum plane as the sketching plane, you will select a surface on the solid geometry. The datum curve appears as shown on the left-hand side of Figure 451. This curve can be used later to create the solid geometry shown on the right-hand side.
Fo
rI
du ct io
9 Sketch fillet arcs 9 Sketch three-point arcs 9 Apply tangent constraints

Task 1: Open form.prt.
Pr e P
ro
1.
Select the button to open an existing file. The File Open dialog box appears.
nt
er
Figure 451
na
lU
441
se
nl y
2.
Select form.prt and select the appears as shown in Figure 452.
button. The part
Figure 452 Task 2: Start the creation of the datum curve on the protrusion. 1. Select a surface on the solid extrusion for the sketching plane. To help select this surface, click Geometry in the selection filter menu at the lower left-hand corner of the Pro/ENGINEER window, as shown in Figure 453.
ro
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
442
rI
nt
Figure 453
er
na
lU
se
nl y
2.
Select the surface of the base protrusion, as shown in Figure 454.
3. 4.
du ct io
1.
ro
2.
Task 3: Sketch the section. The References dialog box appears with datum planes RIGHT and FRONT selected as sketching references. Select the button to accept these default references since they are suitable for this feature. Select the button to sketch line geometry.
Pr e P
Accept this orientation and select the Sketcher mode.
Fo
Datum plane RIGHT is automatically selected as the sketch orientation reference plane and it is set to face the right direction. button to enter
rI
Select the button to create a sketched datum curve. The Sketch dialog box appears.
nt
er
Figure 454
na
lU
443
se
nl y
3.
Starting at the intersection of datum planes RIGHT and FRONT, sketch the section shown in Figure 455 consisting of five connected lines. After sketching the fifth line, press the middle mouse button to cancel the line tool. Leave the dimension scheme and values for now.
Fo
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
5.
Select the two lines in the location shown in Figure 456. A fillet arc is created through the two locations you select and the two lines are automatically trimmed to the fillet.
4.
Select the
Select here
6.
444
Select the
rI
button to sketch a fillet arc.
button to sketch a three-point arc.

nt
Figure 455
Figure 456
er
na
lU
se
using the
button.
For display purposes, the dimensions have been temporarily turned off
nl y
7.
Select the vertex and edge shown in Figure 457 to locate the endpoints of the arc and drag the edge of the arc until the center aligns to the indicated edge.
Select here
Figure 457 8. Select the Figure 458.
button to dynamically trim the edge indicated in
du ct io
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
9.
Select the button to access the Constraints dialog box. The tangent constraint needs to be applied to the three-point arc. button for the tangent constraint.
10. Select the
nt
er
Figure 458
na
lU
se
Center is aligned to edge.
O
445
nl y
11. Select the arc and the line shown in Figure 459.
Figure 459 12. Select the sketch. 13. Select the The dimensions on your sketch may be different. These dimensions are changed later.
button if dimensions are not displayed on your button to create dimensions.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
14. Create the dimension shown as 5.99 in Figure 460 by selecting the three-point arc and the fillet arc. Select the arc entities, not their centers. Place the dimension with the middle mouse button. Click Horiz in the DIM ORIENTATION dialog box.
446
rI
nt
Figure 460
er
na
lU
se
Select this arc and this line.
nl y
15. Create the three linear dimensions shown as 4.46, 2.66, and 3.08 in Figure 461. Select each line once with the left mouse button and place the dimension with the middle mouse button. If the dimension already exists as a weak dimension, select the
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
16. Create the dimension 2.45, as shown in Figure 462 by selecting the two vertical lines and placing the dimension with the middle mouse button. If the dimension already exists as a weak dimension, strengthen it.
nt
er
Figure 461
Figure 462
447
na
lU
se
nl y
button, right-click on the right dimension, and click Strong in the pop-up menu.
17. Strengthen the radius dimensions of the two arcs, as shown in Figure 463. If these dimensions do not exist as weak dimensions, create a new dimension by simply selecting the arc once and placing the dimension with the middle mouse button. You create a radius dimension by selecting an arc or circle once, and a diameter dimension by selecting an arc or circle twice.
18. Select the button and double-click on each dimension to enter the new values shown in Figure 464.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
448
rI
nt
Figure 463
Figure 464
er
na
lU
se
nl y
19. The sketch is now complete. Select the button to complete the datum curve. The model appears in the default orientation, as shown in Figure 465.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
20. Save the part and close the window. It is used later to create the solid geometry shown in Figure 466.
rI
nt
er
Figure 465
Figure 466
na
lU
449
se
nl y
Pr e P
450
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 4c
Goal
Creating Sketched Datum Curves

In this exercise you will create a sketched datum curve in a new part. You will use many of the same techniques used in previous exercises. The datum curve is shown on the left-hand side of Figure 467. This curve can be used later to create the solid geometry shown on the right-hand side.
Fo
rI
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
9 9 9 9
Task 1: Create a new part.
1. 2. 3.
Sketch centerlines Mirror sketched geometry Dimension sketches Use geometry tools
Select the
button to create a new part.
Ensure that the Part and the Use default template options are selected. Enter [clip] as the name of the part. Select the button.
nt
er
Figure 467
na
lU
451
se
nl y
Task 2: Create the datum curve.
1.
2.
du ct io
Fo
ro
You can also sketch a centerline by selecting the
3.
Press the right mouse button and click Centerline in the pop-up menu. Click anywhere on the vertical reference line. A center line is created through the location you selected. Select another location on the vertical reference line. The centerline passes through these two locations and is aligned to the reference line. If you turn on the datum planes, you can see the centerline is aligned to datum plane RIGHT. This centerline is required to mirror geometry.
Pr e P
button from the line flyout toolbar.
4.
452
rI
nt
Figure 468
er
na
lU
se
Start the sketch by sketching two circles, two tangent lines, and a vertical attached line, as shown in Figure 468. Position the circles relative to the reference entities as shown. Modify the diameters of the circles to [0.30] and [0.75]. The length of the line is modified later.
nl y
Use the button to create the sketched datum curve. Use datum plane FRONT as the sketching plane and datum plane RIGHT as the sketch orientation reference plane.
5.
Select the vertical line sketched at the bottom of the lower circle, as shown in Figure 469.
rI
Fo
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
7.
Select the vertical centerline to mirror about. The new line appears as shown in Figure 470, symmetric about the centerline with the original line.
6.
Select the
button to create a mirror copy of this line.
nt
er
Select this line. Figure 469
Figure 470
453
na
lU
se
Centerline
nl y
8.
Select the button to dynamically trim the unwanted segments of the circles. The sketch appears as shown in Figure 471.
Fo
Pr e P
454
ro
du ct io
rI
nt
Figure 471
er
na
lU
se
nl y
9.
Sketch fillet arcs between the vertical lines and the arc segments, as shown in Figure 472.
rI
nt
er
na Fo
Fillets Figure 472
du ct io
Pr e P
ro
10. Notice that the original entities are not trimmed. The system does not automatically trim arc fillets when non-linear entities are referenced. Use the button to trim the unwanted segments, as shown in Figure 473.
Figure 473
Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I 455
lU
se
nl y
11. Constrain the radii of the two fillet arcs to be equal, as shown in Figure 474.
12. Create the dimensions in Figure 475 and modify the values.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
456
rI
nt
Figure 474
Figure 475
er
na
lU
se
nl y
13. Complete the feature. It appears as shown in Figure 476.
du ct io
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
nt
er
14. Save the part. It is used later to create the solid geometry shown in Figure 477.
Figure 477
na
Figure 476
lU
457
se
nl y
Pr e P
458
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Review Questions
Question 1
Sketch Plane Sketch Orientation Constraints Sketcher References
Angles Diameters Lengths Radii
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
a. b. c.
d.
Question 4
Which of the following buttons enables you to create a three-point arc? a. b. c. d.

459
Which of the following buttons enables you to create a centerline?
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
The button is used to apply the equal constraint to sketched geometry. Which of the following can be made equal with this constraint? (Hint: There is more than one correct answer.)
lU
se
nl y
Select all of the following that should be defined prior to sketching geometry. (Hint: There is more than one correct answer.)
Question 5
Construction entities can be used directly to create solid geometry. a. b. True False
Question 6
c. d. Question 7
du ct io
Which of the following are true regarding the Dynamic Trim option? (Hint: There is more than one correct answer.) a. b. c. d. To access the Dynamic Trim option, select the To access the Dynamic Trim option, select the button. button.
ro
Pr e P
460
The Dynamic Trim option enables you to delete selected entities. The Dynamic Trim option enables you to sketch a spline through the entities to be deleted.
Fo
rI
nt
Which of the following buttons enables you to divide an entity without trimming it?
er
na
lU
b.
se
a.
Which of the following buttons enables you to trim an entity to a corner?
nl y
Question 9
All constraints must be manually assigned to the sketched geometry. a. b. True False
Question 10
a. b. c. d.
<Tab> <Shift> <Ctrl> <Alt>
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
461
se
Which of the following can be used to lock a constraint while sketching?
nl y
Pr e P
462
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Pro/ENGINEER provides a large variety of sketcher functions in Sketcher mode. This chapter discusses some of the sketcher functions that have not already been discussed. This chapter enables you to build on your current Sketcher mode knowledge to produce more advanced sketches.
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
9Advanced Editing Tools 9Advanced Constraints 9Advanced Dimensioning Styles 9Setting Sketcher Preferences
Fo
rI
Advanced Sketching Tools
nt
er
Chapter 5
na
lU
51
se
nl y
52
lU
se
nl y
5.1 Advanced Editing Tools
1. 2.
Select the geometric entity or entities. Select the editing tool to use.
Pr e P
ro
Scale, Rotate, and Translate
du ct io
For a complete list of editing tools, please see .
Scale, Rotate, and Translate Import Copy
To scale, rotate, and translate a group of selected entities, select the button. The Scale and Rotate dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 51, enabling you to enter scale and rotate values.
In addition to the editing tools introduced in the previous chapters, the following tools can also be used:
Fo
Step 2: Select the sketching tool to use
rI
nt
In most cases the geometry entities to edit are selected first prior to selecting the editing tool. In some cases, you may need to select the editing tool first.
er
Figure 51
na
Step 1: Select the geometry to edit
lU
se
53
Use the following steps as a general guideline to edit sketched geometry:
nl y
This section introduces additional sketching tools that can be accessed in Sketcher mode as your model becomes more complex.
Additionally, the Scale ( ), Rotate ( ), and Translate ( ) handles appear on your sketch, as shown in Figure 52. These handles enable you to dynamically modify the geometry by dragging the appropriate handles. Rotate handle Translate handle
Figure 52 Select the button in the Scale Rotate dialog box to apply the changes and close the dialog box.
Import
A previously saved section can be retrieved into a current sketch. Complete the following steps to add a section in Sketcher mode: 1. 2. Click Sketch > Data from file from the menu bar.
du ct io
Enter the name of the sketch or select it from the Open dialog button.
box and select the
Pr e P
A sketch is independent of the feature type. Any sketch can be saved while in Sketcher mode. Sketches are saved with.sec file extensions.
3.
ro
Select the Scale ( ), Rotate ( ), and Translate ( ) handles on the sketch to dynamically modify the imported sketch. You can also enter a scale and/or rotation value in the Scale Rotate dialog box. Select the button to close the Scale Rotate dialog box. The section is automatically located with respect to the references.
4.
54
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
Scale handle
se
nl y
Copy
To make a copy of selected entities, select the handles on the copied entities enable you to Scale ( and Translate (
button. The ), Rotate ( ),
the button to place the copied entities and close the Scale Rotate dialog box. For example, the sketch shown on the left-hand side of Figure 53 is copied, scaled, rotated, and translated as shown on the right-hand side.
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
nt
er
Figure 53
na
lU
55
se
nl y
) the copied entities into the desired position. Select
5.2 Using Existing Geometry

To sketch geometry, you have learned that you must select references to dimension and constrain the new entities. As an alternative, you can choose from two additional sketching tools that enable you to create new entities based on existing geometry. These tools enable you to do the following:
To create an entity offset from an existing edge, click Sketch > Edge
Pr e P
ro
In addition to the entities created using the Offset or Use options, you can also sketch additional entities to complete the section.
du ct io
In Figure 54 the sketched entities are created by using and offsetting from existing geometry.
these relationships, delete the symbol. The system automatically adds weak dimensions as needed.
Keep in mind the parent-child relationships you are creating when using existing geometry to create new entities. If you do not want
Fo
symbol identifies the new entity is based on existing geometry.
The Use and Offset edge options can also be used to project selected entities from a plane that is not parallel with the sketching plane.
rI
edge, click Sketch > Edge > Use or select the button. With either option, the Type dialog box appears, enabling you to define the method by which the entities are selected. You can select Single entities, a Chain (all adjacent entities between two selected entities) or a Loop (all tangent entities). Entities that are offset have a dimension associated with them. Once the entities are selected, the
nt
Figure 54
er
na
> Offset or select the
button. To create an entity using an existing
lU
se
Create an entity by offsetting it from an existing edge Create an entity by using an existing edge
nl y
5.3 Advanced Constraints
du ct io
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
nt
er
Middle
The end of the arc is constrained to lie on the midpoint of the adjacent line, as shown in Figure 55.
Figure 55
na
lU
57
se
A complete list of constraints is described in Appendix C.
Middle Coincident Symmetry Collinear Parallel Perpendicular
nl y
In the process of sketching geometry you learned that constraints are automatically added to the entities as they are sketched and you were introduced to a number of basic constraints. In addition, the following constraints can also be assigned while sketching:
Coincident
The endpoints of the line and the arc are constrained to be coincident with the centerpoint of the construction circle, as shown in Figure 56.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
Symmetry
Vertices with the adjacent arrow () symbols are constrained to be symmetric about the centerline, as shown in Figure 57.
58
rI
nt
Figure 56
Figure 57
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Collinear Constraint
The line is constrained to be collinear with the centerline, as shown in Figure 58.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
Parallel and Perpendicular
Parallel and perpendicular lines are indicated by the // and symbols, as shown in Figure 59.
Although all the constraints can be assigned while sketching you may also need the added flexibility of manually assigning these advanced constraints to meet the required design intent.
nt
er
Figure 58
Figure 59
na
lU
59
se
nl y
You can also access the constraints by selecting Constrain in the Sketch pull-down menu.
You can manually add any of these advanced constraints to the geometry after finishing the sketch. While still in Sketch mode, select the button to open the Constraints dialog box, as shown in Figure 510.
Figure 510
The advanced constraint options are described in Table 51.
Button
Description
du ct io
ro
Pr e P
Depending on the type of constraint you want to assign, you are prompted to select the entities to which the constraint applies. For example, if you select the follows: button, the message line appears as
510
The midpoint constraint button places a point in the middle of a line. The point constraint button creates same points, points on entity, or collinear constraint. The symmetry constraint button makes two points or vertices symmetric about a centerline. The parallel constraint makes two lines parallel.
Fo
The perpendicular constraint button makes two entities perpendicular.
rI
nt
er
Table 51
na
lU
se
nl y
5.4 Advanced Dimension Styles
Fo
rI
Angular Dimensions
For an angular dimension, select lines A and B and place the dimension using the middle mouse button. The resulting angle is dependent on the placement location of the dimension.
nt
er
button to create a dimension, select the entities to be dimensioned using the left mouse button, and place them using the middle mouse button.
ro
du ct io
Pr e P
Figure 511 To dimension an arc angle, select the arc (the selected arc turns red) and the two end points and place the dimension using the middle mouse button, as shown in Figure 512.
na
A
lU
511
se
As with the basic dimension types, select the
Angular dimension Revolved section dimension
nl y
In the process of sketching geometry you learned that dimensions are automatically added to the entities as they are sketched and you were introduced to a number of basic dimension types. In addition, the following dimension types can be used to dimension entities:
2 1
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
This type of dimensioning scheme can also be used to dimension symmetrical entities.
Fo
512
rI
nt
Revolved Section Dimensions
Only half of the cross-section of a revolved feature needs to be sketched. It is then revolved about the centerline at a specified angle. You can use any combination of the following selections to create a diameter dimension on the section of a revolved feature. In the example shown in Figure 513, the sd0 dimension is created by selecting the geometry, the centerline and the geometry again. The sd1 dimension is created by selecting the centerline, point and centerline again. In both cases, press the middle mouse button to place the dimension. Using either of these selection techniques results in a diameter dimension.
Figure 513
er
na
Figure 512
lU
se
nl y
5.5 Resolving Dimension and Constraint Conflicts

If you over-dimension or over-constrain a sketch, the Resolve Sketch dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 514. This dialog box enables you to resolve the conflict so that you can continue to work on the sketch. To resolve the conflict you must either undo the new dimension or constraint, or delete an existing one in the sketch.
Fo
rI
The options for resolving conflicts are described in Table 52.
du ct io
Button
Description Undoes the previous action. Deletes the selected dimension or constraint that is highlighted at the top of the list in the Resolve Sketch dialog box. Changes the selected dimension to a reference dimension. Identifies the selected dimension or constraint by highlighting it on the sketch. It also provides a description in the message window explaining the dimension or constraint.
Pr e P
ro
nt
er
Figure 514
Table 52
na
lU
513
se
nl y
5.6 Modify and Move Dimensions
Fo
ro
Pr e P
514
du ct io
You can modify dimensions by entering new values in the value fields or by using the thumbwheel, located beside the value field. The Sensitivity scale adjusts the thumbwheels rate of change. Higher sensitivity results in a slower rate of change in values, while lower sensitivity results in a faster rate of change. For example, if you only want to increase the dimension by a decimal point, you should set a higher sensitivity. The Regenerate option enables you to automatically regenerate the sketch each time a new dimension value is entered. If you are modifying multiple dimensions, you may want to clear this option and regenerate after you have completed all the modifications. The Lock Scale option scales all dimension values in the Modify Dimensions dialog box according to the new value entered. This option is useful when you want to increase or decrease the overall size of the model.
rI
nt
er
Figure 515
na
lU
You can also click Edit > Modify in the menu bar or press the right mouse button and click Modify in the pop-up menu to access the Modify Dimension dialog box.
The Modify Dimension dialog box appears displaying the values for the selected dimensions. You can add additional dimensions for modification by selecting them while the Modify Dimensions dialog box is open. Every selected dimension value is displayed in a separate text field, as shown in Figure 515.
se
<Ctrl> key and selecting the
button.
nl y
Modify Dimensions
You can modify a dimension within the sketch by double-clicking on the dimension and entering a new value in the field that appears. You can also use the Modify Dimensions dialog box. This dialog box is useful for modifying several dimensions on a sketch at once. You can access the Modify Dimension dialog box by selecting the dimensions using the
Move Dimensions
Dimensions can be moved by selecting and dragging them as needed. To move sketcher entities, select the button, select the entity and drag and drop it to the desired location. When moving dimensions, the dimension value does not change; only its position relative to the sketch changes.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
515
Similarly, entities are moved by dragging and dropping. When moving entities, their associated dimensions update dynamically with the new placement of the entity.
se
nl y
5.7 Setting Sketcher Preferences
du ct io
Fo
ro
Pr e P
Sketcher preferences must be set manually each time you start a new session of Pro/ENGINEER.
Toggle the options in the Display, Constraints, and Parameters tabs to customize the sketching environment when working in Sketcher mode.
516
rI
nt
Figure 516
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Display tab
To change the sketcher settings, click Sketch > Options to open the Sketcher Preferences dialog box, as shown in Figure 516.
The options in the Display tab enable you to specify preferences dealing with the sketcher display environment. You can clean up the display of your screen by toggling the display of certain entities on or off. They are described in Table 53.
Option
Grid Vertices Constraints Dimensions
Description
Toggles the display of the sketcher grid lines.
Toggles the display of all sketcher dimensions. Toggles the display of weak sketcher dimensions. Enables sketcher entities to snap to the sketcher grid.
Snap to Grid Lock Modified Dimensions Start in Sketch View
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
Enables the 2D sketch view upon entering Sketcher mode (i.e., the orientation of the sketching plane is parallel to screen).
nt
Restricts modified sketcher dimensions from changing in value.
er
Remember to turn weak dimensions back on once you need to dimension.
Weak Dimensions
na
lU
Toggles the display of sketcher constraint symbols (e.g., H, V, T, M)
se
Toggles the display of the endpoints for sketcher entities.
nl y
517
Table 53
Constraints tab
The options in the Constraints tab, as shown in Figure 517, enables or disables the sketcher constraints that can be automatically assigned to a sketch (e.g., if the Tangent option is disabled, entities are not assumed to be tangent while sketching).
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
518
ro
rI
nt
Figure 517
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Parameters tab
The options in the Parameters tab, as shown in Figure 518, enable you to set preferences for the sketcher grid and accuracy. They are described in Table 54.
du ct io
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
nt
er
Figure 518
na
lU
519
se
nl y
Table 54 Option
Grid Origin Angle Type Grid Spacing X Y Radial Angular Num Lines
Description
Relocates the origin of the grid. Modifies the orientation angle of grid.
Modifies the spacing of the grid.
Accuracy is covered in Pro/ENGINEER: Design Documentation and Detailing course.
Num Digits Relative
Fo
Accuracy
du ct io
Changes made to the settings in each tab of the Sketcher Preferences dialog box can be reset by selecting the button.
Pr e P
520
ro
rI
nt
Sets the angular spacing between radial lines of a Polar grid. Sets the number of radial lines of a Polar grid.
Modifies sketcher accuracy.
Sets the number of decimal places in sketcher dimensions (14 maximum). Sets the relative accuracy of automatic sketcher constraints (1.00 maximum, 1.00e-9 minimum).
er
Sets the spacing between circles of a Polar grid.
na
Sets the spacing between horizontal grid lines of a Cartesian grid.
lU
Sets the spacing between vertical grid lines of a Cartesian grid.
se
Sets the grid type to Cartesian or Polar.
nl y
Modifies sketcher grid attributes.
Exercise 5a
Goal
Editing Sketched Datum Curves
na er
Figure 519
Task 1: Open the part called mod_dat_curves.prt.
du ct io
Task 2: Select the datum curve on the top surface of the model. 1. Select the datum curve on the top surface of the model, as shown in Figure 521.
Pr e P
ro
2.
Ensure that the display of datum planes and coordinate systems are turned off for clarity.
1.
Open mod_dat_curves.prt.
Fo
rI
9 Edit sketched datum curves 9 Use Pro/ENGINEER sketching tools
nt
lU
Figure 520
521
se
nl y
In this exercise you will edit existing datum curves and sketch new ones on the model, as shown in Figure 519. Once completed, the model appears as shown in Figure 520.
Figure 521 2.
Press the right mouse button and click Edit Definition in the pop-up menu. The Sketched Datum Curve dialog box appears. Select the button to enter Sketcher mode. The model is oriented as it was when the datum curve was sketched. Select the and buttons to turn off the display of dimensions and constraints. The model appears as shown in Figure 522.
3.
4.
du ct io
Fo
ro
Pr e P
Task 3: Use the dynamic trim sketching tool.
1. 2.
Select the
Select the line sections shown in Figure 523 to delete.
522
rI
button to access the dynamic trim sketching tool.
nt
Figure 522
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Select the datum curve on the top surface of the model.
Figure 523 3.
The datum curve appears as shown in Figure 524. If the datum
Fo
rI
du ct io
Task 4: Use the divide sketching tool.
1. 2.
ro
Pr e P
Select the button on the editing flyout toolbar to access the divide sketching tool. Select the straight line and the arc in the approximate positions shown in Figure 525.
nt
er
Figure 524
na
curve does not appear as shown, you can select the to undo the trim and try again.
lU
se
O
o button
523
Select these sections to trim.
nl y
Figure 525 3.
The line and arc are divided at the points that you select.
Task 5: Use the dynamic trim sketching tool. 1.
Delete the right-hand sides of the arc and the line. The sketch appears as shown in Figure 526.
Fo
Pr e P
524
ro
du ct io
Task 6: Use the mirror sketching tool.
1.
Select the button on the line flyout toolbar and draw a centerline between the two divided points, as shown in Figure 527.
rI
nt
Figure 526
er
na
lU
se
Select these approximate locations.
nl y
Figure 527 2. 3. 4.
Select both the arc and the straight line using the <Ctrl> key. Select the button to mirror the entities.
du ct io
Fo
rI
Task 7: Scale and rotate the sketch. 1. 2. Select all entities in the sketch to rotate. Select the button to scale, rotate and translate the entities. This button is located on the flyout toolbar accessed by selecting the button adjacent to the button. Handles appear on the sketch as shown in Figure 529.
Pr e P
ro
nt
er
Select the centerline to mirror the objects about. The sketch appears as shown in Figure 528.
Figure 528
na
lU
se
525
nl y
Rotate handle
Translate handle
Figure 529 3.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
4. 5. 6.
Press the left mouse button to place the sketch. Use the handle to translate the sketch.
Drag the sketch to the left in the approximate position shown in Figure 531.
526
rI
Use the handle to rotate the sketch 45 clockwise. Once you begin to rotate a sketch it snaps in 45 intervals or you can enter the angle in the Scale Rotate dialog box. The sketch appears as shown in Figure 530.
nt
Figure 530
er
na
lU
se
Scale handle
nl y
Figure 531
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
9.
Drag the sketch to the approximate size shown in Figure 532.
10. Press the left mouse button to place the sketch. 11. Press the middle mouse button to finish using the scale and rotate sketching tool.
nt
8.
Use the
handle to scale the sketch.
er
7.
Press the left mouse button to place the sketch.
Figure 532
na
lU
527
se
nl y
Task 8: Complete the modifications to the sketched datum curve.
1. 2.
Select the
button to exit Sketcher mode.
Task 9: Edit the sketch of the triangular datum curve.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
1.
Select the triangle-shaped datum curve on the right surface of the model, as shown in Figure 534.
Fo
rI
nt
Figure 533
er
na
Select the triangle-shaped datum curve. Figure 534 2. Press the right mouse button and click Edit Definition in the pop-up menu. The Sketch dialog box appears.
lU
se
Select the button to complete the modifications to the sketched datum curve. The datum curve appears as shown in Figure 533.
nl y
3.
Select the button to enter Sketcher mode. The model is oriented as it was when the datum curve was sketched. Select the button to access the corner trim tool.
5. When trimming two edges to a corner, select the edges on the portions that you want to retain.
Select the two lines on the triangle that do not form a corner. The triangle appears as shown in Figure 535.
7.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
6.
Select the
rI
nt
er
Figure 535
Figure 536
na
Select these two lines to trim to.
lU
se
529
nl y
4.
Task 10: Edit the sketch of the heart-shaped datum curve. 1. Select the heart-shaped datum curve on the right surface of the model, as shown in Figure 534.
3. 4. 5. 6.
Ensure that the dimensions and constraints are turned off. Select the
du ct io
Select the two arcs on the heart-shape that do not intersect. Remember to select the section of the line that you want to keep. The heart-shape appears as shown in Figure 538. Select these two arcs to trim to.
Pr e P
ro
Fo
Select the button to enter Sketcher mode. The datum curve is oriented as it was created.
530
rI
button to access the corner trim tool.
nt
2.
Press the right mouse button and click Edit Definition in the pop-up menu. The Sketch dialog box appears.
Figure 538
er
Figure 537
na
lU
Select the heart-shaped datum curve.
se
nl y
7.
Select the two straight lines on the heart-shape that cross each other to trim them to a vertex. Select the larger portions of the lines that you want to keep. The heart-shape appears as shown in Figure 539.
Figure 539 8. 9. Select the
du ct io
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
nt
er
Figure 540
na
lU
531
se
nl y
Task 11: Edit the sketch of the rectangular datum curve. 1. Select the datum curve on the front surface of the model, as shown in Figure 541.
Figure 541 Ensure that the dimensions and constraints are turned off. 2. Press the right mouse button and click Edit Definition in the pop-up menu. The Sketch dialog box appears.
4.
ro
Pr e P
532
du ct io
5.
6.
Select the button and draw a rectangle around the sketched datum curve to select all entities. Select the button to copy the sketched datum curve. This button is located on the flyout toolbar accessed by selecting the button adjacent to the button. The copy appears on the screen and can be translated, rotated and scaled to the desired placement. Select the handle to translate the copied datum curve onto the base feature in the approximate position shown in Figure 542.
Fo
3.
Select the button to enter Sketcher mode. The datum curve is oriented as it was created.
rI
nt
er
na
Select the sketched datum curve on this surface.
lU
se
nl y
Fo
rI
As an alternative to dragging the entities for rotation, you can also enter a value in the Scale Rotate dialog box.
du ct io
9.
10. Select the handle to scale the copied datum curve on the base feature as shown in Figure 544.
Pr e P
ro
Press the left mouse button to place the copied datum curve.
nt
er
Figure 543
Figure 544
na
8.
Select the handle to rotate the copied datum curve 90, as shown in Figure 543.
lU
7.
Press the left mouse button to place the copied datum curve.
se
Figure 542
O
533
nl y
11. Press the middle mouse button to place the object. 12. Select the button to exit Sketcher mode.
Figure 545 Task 12: View the changes in the Default Orientation.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
1.
Select the button and click Default to view the model in the default orientation. The model appears as shown in Figure 546.
2.
Save the model and erase it from memory.
534
rI
nt
Figure 546
er
na
lU
se
nl y
13. Select the button to complete the modifications to the sketched datum curve. The curve appears as shown in Figure 545.
Exercise 5b
Goal
Revolving an Imported Sketch

In this exercise, you will create the datum curve shown in Figure 547 by importing an existing section file and modifying it. By importing an existing file you are able to reuse sections in multiple models or within multiple features in one model. This datum curve will be used later to create the revolved protrusion shown in Figure 548.
er
na
Figure 547 After you complete this exercise, you will be able to:
du ct io
Task 1: Create a new part. 1. Create a new part called [rev_flange] using the default template.
Pr e P
ro
Task 2: Create a sketched datum curve.
1. 2.
9 9 9 9
Import a sketch Add dimensions Assign constraints Resolve the sketch
Select the
Alternatively, you can use the object-action technique and select datum plane FRONT prior to the creation of the curve. This immediately enables you to begin sketching.
Select datum plane FRONT as the Sketch plane and accept datum plane RIGHT as the Sketch Orientation reference. Select the button to enter Sketch mode.
3.
Fo
rI
button.
nt
lU
Figure 548
535
se
nl y
4.
Accept the default Sketcher References by selecting the button.
Task 3: Import a predefined section file. Reusing commonly sketched sections enables you to quickly recreate geometry. Consider using a section library to store all files. 1. 2. 3. Click Sketch > Data from file to import a sketch. The Open dialog box appears. Select rev_flange_sec.sec and select the
Select the handle and translate the section to the approximate location shown in Figure 549.
du ct io
Fo
ro
If you knew the scale factor for the section you could have entered it in the Scale Rotate dialog box.
4.
Select the
Task 4: Modify the dimensions. 1. Ensure that the dimensions and constraints are displayed in the sketch. Select the button, draw a box around all of the dimensions so they are all highlighted.
Pr e P
2.
536
rI
button to close the Scale Rotate dialog box.
nt
Figure 549
er
na
lU
The section appears and can be scaled, translated or rotated using the handles on the section or the Scale Rotate dialog box.
se
button.
nl y
3. 4.
Select the button to open the Modify Dimensions dialog box, as shown in Figure 550. Select the Lock Scale option and keep the Regenerate option selected, as shown in Figure 550.
All dimensions in the section are strong now that the dimensions are modified.
du ct io
6.
Select the button to close the Modify Dimensions dialog box. The model appears as shown in Figure 551. Verify you have modified the correct dimension, as shown in Figure 551.
Fo
rI
5.
Enter [5.0] as the new dimension value for the sd3 dimension. Press the <Enter> key. All dimensions on the sketch update and regenerate.
nt
er
Figure 550
na
The dimension sd3 is modified to 5.0.
Pr e P
ro
Figure 551
lU
537
se
The Lock Scale and Regenerate options are selected.
nl y
Task 5: Create a centerline and add a diameter dimension.
1. 2.
Select the
button to create a centerline.
3. 4.
Select the
du ct io
Select the centerline, the vertex, and the centerline again to place the dimension as shown in Figure 553.
Fo
rI
button to add a diameter dimension.
nt
Figure 552
Pr e P
ro
a. Select the centerline.
c. Select the centerline again.
Figure 553
er
d. Place the diameter dimension.
na
b. Select the vertex.
lU
Sketch the centerline aligned to the default datum plane RIGHT
se
Sketch the centerline along the default datum plane RIGHT, as shown in Figure 552. The centerline is required to create a revolved feature as well as to create the diameter dimension that you will be creating.
nl y
5.
Modify the diameter dimension value to 15.0.
Task 6: Assign constraints.
1.
Select the button to open the Constraints dialog box, as shown in Figure 554.
2. 3.
Select the
button to assign the Equal constraint.
Select the two lines shown in Figure 555.
Fo
rI
nt
ro
du ct io
Pr e P
4.
The Resolve Sketch dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 556, indicating that the sketch is now over-constrained because two strong dimensions currently control the lengths of the lines.
er
Figure 554
Figure 555
na
Select these two lines to be constrained as equal.
lU
539
se
nl y
6. 7. 8.
button to remove the sd2 value. button to assign the Point on Entity constraint.
Fo
Select the bottom line and datum plane TOP, as shown in Figure 557.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
The sketch appears as shown in Figure 558.
540
rI
nt
Select the bottom line and the TOP horizontal datum plane.
Figure 557
er
na
5.
Select the sd2 (3.00) dimension in the Resolve Sketch dialog box. This value is no longer required; it will be set equal to 5.00.
lU
Figure 556
se
nl y
Figure 558 9. Close the Constraints dialog box.
Task 7: Add an angular dimension to the sketch.
Fo
2.
Select the two lines and place the dimension as shown in Figure 559.
rI
1.
Select the
button to add an angular dimension.
nt
er
na
Select the two lines to create an angular dimension.
du ct io
Pr e P
ro
Place the dimension.
Figure 559 The Resolve Sketch dialog box appears as shown in Figure 560, because the sketch is over constrained.
lU
541
se
nl y
4. 5.
Select the
button to remove the Vertical constraint.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
1.
Select the button to complete the sketch. The sketched datum curve appears as shown in Figure 561.
Fo
Task 8: Exit Sketch mode and save the model.
2.
542

rI
nt
Modify the dimension and enter [93] as the new angle for the sketch.
Figure 561
er
na
3.
Select the Vertical constraint in the Resolve Sketch dialog box. This value is not required because the angle is to be modified.
lU
Figure 560
se
nl y
Exercise 5c
Goal
Creating Sketched Datum Curves

In this exercise, you will create a sketched datum curve using the Offset edge sketcher tool and the other tools and constraints. The model bracket.prt appears as shown in Figure 562. The completed sketched datum curve appears as shown in Figure 563.
nt
er
na
Figure 562 Figure 563 After you complete this exercise, you will be able to:
9 Sketch datum curves 9 Dimensions sketches 9 Use geometry tools
du ct io
Task 1: Open an existing Pro/ENGINEER model. 1. 2. 3. Open bracket.prt. Select the button to create a sketched datum curve.
Pr e P
Alternatively you can use the object-action technique and select datum plane FRONT before creating the curve. This enables you to immediately begin sketching.
ro
4. 5.
Specify the top surface of the part as the sketching plane and datum plane RIGHT to face right. Select the button.
Accept the default Sketcher References.
Fo
rI
lU
543
se
nl y
Task 2: Sketch the datum curve.
1.
Select the
button to access the Offset sketcher tool. To
access this option, select the button adjacent to the button. The Type dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 564.
Figure 564 2. If the chain is created using the top loop, click Next until the two arcs and the bottom line are selected. 3. Select the Chain option.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
Select the two arcs.
4.
Click Accept from the CHOOSE menu.
544
rI
Select the two arcs shown in Figure 565. The two arcs plus the line connecting them will be selected because you are using the Chain option.
nt
Figure 565
er
na
lU
se
nl y
The negative value is used to specify an offset value that is opposite from the displayed direction arrow.
5. 6. 7.
Enter [-0.2] as the offset value and select the Select the
button.
button from the Type dialog box.
Fo
rI
select the button for a brief explanation.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
You can select the Coincident constraint and
9.
The Resolve Conflicts dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 567, because the end vertices of each arc are coincident with the end vertices of the line. Delete the Coincident constraint.
8.
Assign the tangent constraint to the intersection of one arc with the horizontal line.
nt
er
Figure 566
Figure 567
na
lU
545
se
nl y
Sketch a line to join the two open ends of the arcs, as shown in Figure 566.
10. Assign the tangency constraint to the other end of the line where it intersects the arc. Delete the Coincident constraint. Task 3: Complete the datum curve. 1. Complete the sketched datum curve. The datum curve appears as shown in Figure 568.
Fo
2.
Pr e P
546
ro
du ct io
rI
nt
Figure 568
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Review Questions
Question 1
b. c. d. Question 2
Which of the following best describes the use of the
na
lU
symbol? copies sketched entities
d. Question 3
Which of the following best describes the use of the a. translates sketched entities rotates sketched entities
Fo
rI
c.
scales sketched entities
nt
b.
rotates sketched entities
er
a.
translates sketched entities
du ct io
b. c.
d.
ro
Question 4
When importing a sketch the imported data can be scaled, rotated, and translated. a. b. True False
Pr e P
scales sketched entities copies sketched entities
se
symbol?
547
a.
nl y
Which of the following buttons enables you to access the Scale and Rotate option?
Question 5
Copied entities can be scaled, rotated, and translated. a. b. True False
Question 6
b. c. d. Question 7
a. b. Question 8
True False
ro
Question 9
Pr e P
Question 10
548
du ct io
a. b. c.
d.
Each time a constraint or dimension is manually added to the sketch the Resolve Sketch dialog box appears requiring you to resolve the conflict? a. b. True False
Select all of the following constraints that were used to sketch the geometry in the following graphic.
Which of the following buttons enables you to manually assign the Point on Entity constraint?
Fo
rI
nt
Once automatic constraints have been assigned to the sketch you are unable to manually assign any additional constraints.
er
na
lU
se
a.
Which of the following symbols identifies that existing geometry was used for offsetting sketched geometry?
nl y
a. b. c. d. e. f.
Tangent Point on Entity Parallel
Symmetry
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Perpendicular
Equal
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
549
se
nl y
Pr e P
550
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Sketched features add or remove material from a model. A protrusion is a sketched feature that adds material and a cut is a sketched feature that removes material. As features and design intent become more complex, additional options are available to help you create more advanced features.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
9Creating Extruded Secondary Features 9Creating Revolved Secondary Features
Fo
rI
Sketched Secondary Features
nt
er
Chapter 6
na
lU
61
se
nl y
62
lU
se
nl y
6.1 Creating Extruded Secondary Features

A single extrusion cannot both add and remove material. In Pro/ENGINEER, extruded features are created by sketching or selecting a 2D section and defining an extrusion depth. The extruded feature can be defined to add (protrusion) or remove (cut) material.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Start the creation of the extrusion. Create or select the sketch.
Thicken the section, if necessary.
Specify cut or protrusion for the extruded feature.
Step 1: Start the creation of the extrusion
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
To start the creation of the extrusion, select the button on the toolbar or click Insert > Extrude in the menu bar. The dashboard for extrusions appears as shown in Figure 61.
Fo
rI
Specify depth options for feature creation.
nt
Specify the depth direction for feature creation.
er
Figure 61
na
lU
63
se
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create an extruded secondary feature:
nl y
Step 2: Create or select the sketch

If you select an existing sketch to create an extrusion, that sketch is copied into the new feature without an associative link. Any subsequent modification to the sketched datum curve will not be reflected in this new feature. You can select a sketch to extrude (i.e., a sketched datum curve) or
Step 3: Thicken the section, if necessary

Base protrusion can also be created as thin extrusions. When you select or sketch a section for an extrusion, the material to be added or removed is, by default, defined to be entirely inside or outside the section, as shown in the examples in Figure 62.
Fo
rI
nt
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Material added
Figure 62 With the button in the extrude dashboard, you can specify a thickness for the section. Thickness can be applied on either side of the section or divided evenly on both sides using the button.
64
er
na
Material removed
lU
Sketching the geometry for the extrusion can be done using the same sketching options and editing tools that have been discussed previously.
se
As with any sketched feature, you must select a sketching plane and sketch orientation reference plane. These can be planes or surfaces. The sketch references must also be defined and can be items such as datum planes, surfaces, edges, or vertices.
nl y
you can create a new sketch by selecting the dashboard.
button in the
Figure 63
na er nt
Figure 64 Figure 65
Thickened
lU
Thickness can be applied to the sections of the previous examples to obtain the geometry shown in Figure 64.
Thickened Thickened
The following restrictions apply to sections that are thickened:
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
If the section contains curvature, such as fillet arcs, the thickness added to the inside of the curvature cannot exceed the radius at any point. In Figure 66, the radius of the fillet arc is 5.0, therefore the thickness applied to the section cannot exceed 5.0.
If the section is open, like the extruded cut in Figure 64, the section can contain only one open chain. In Figure 65, the section on the left-hand side can be thickened while the section on the right-hand side cannot.
Fo
rI
se
Select this button to change the direction of thickening between one side, other side, or both sides.
nl y
65
Figure 66
When you create a cut, you can define which side of the sketch from which to remove the material. To change the material removal side, press the right mouse button to access the pop-up menu and click Flip Material Side or select the button in the dashboard, as shown in Figure 67. This button only becomes available when a cut is being created.
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
but it can be created as a cut by selecting the dashboard.
nt
When you create an extrusion, it is created as a protrusion by default, button in the
Pr e P
Figure 67 In Figure 68, the extrusion is shown as a protrusion on the left and a cut on the right. The protrusion to a cut. button was selected to convert the default
66
er
Select this button to flip the material removal side for a cut.
na
Step 4: Specify cut or protrusion for the extruded feature
lU
se
nl y
Figure 68
You can change the depth direction in which the feature is extruded from the sketching plane by selecting the Figure 69.
er
na
Select this button to change the depth direction of the extrusion. Figure 69
du ct io
In Figure 610, the model on the left shows the section that will be used to create an extruded cut. The model in the middle shows the cut extruded below the sketching plane while the model on the right-hand side shows the cut extruded above the sketching plane. The depth direction is flipped by selecting the button.
Pr e P
ro
Fo
rI
nt
Figure 610
67
lU
Step 5: Specify the depth direction for feature creation
button, as shown in
se
nl y
Step 6: Specify depth options for feature creation
Fo
Depth Options Side Options
ro
du ct io
An extruded feature is created in one direction from the sketching plane by default. If you expand the Options slide-up panel in the dashboard, you can define a depth for the second direction. This enables you to define a different depth option in each direction.
Pr e P
The depth options that can be assigned to an extrusion are the same as for holes, described in Chapter 3.
Use the Side 2 pull-down menu to assign a depth to the second side.
68
rI
nt
Figure 611
Figure 612
er
na
lU
se
Drag this handle to dynamically modify the depth value.
nl y
By default, Pro/ENGINEER creates an extrusion with a blind depth that is applied to one side. The depth value can be modified in the dashboard, or by dragging the depth handle of the extrusion, as shown in Figure 611.
The depth options for Side 2 are the same as those for Side 1 except that the Symmetric side option is not available. If you have selected the Symmetric depth option for Side 1, the feature is extruded in both directions and the blind depth value you define is divided equally between the two directions.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
69
When the feature is fully defined, select the the extrusion.
se
button to complete
nl y
6.2 Creating Revolved Secondary Features

Revolved features are created in a similar manner to extruded features. The main differences are that the section of a revolve must contain a centerline, which represents the axis of revolution, and an angle of revolution is defined instead of a depth.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
Start the creation of the revolved feature.
Thicken the section, as needed.
Specify the cut or protrusion for the revolved feature. Specify the angle of revolution. Complete the feature.
Step 1: Start the creation of the revolved feature
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
To start the creation of the revolve, select the button on the toolbar or click Insert > Revolve in the menu bar. The dashboard for revolved features appears as shown in Figure 613.
Fo
610
rI
nt
Figure 613
er
na
Create or select the sketch.
lU
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create a revolved feature:
se
nl y
Step 2: Create or select the sketch

If you select an existing sketch to create a revolve, that sketch is copied into the new feature without an associative link. Any subsequent modification to the sketched datum curve will not be reflected in this new feature. If more than one centerline is used in a revolved sketch, the first centerline sketched is used as the axis of revolution. To define a new centerline to be used as the axis of revolution, select the centerline and click Sketch > Feature Tools > Axis of Revolution. You can select a sketch to revolve (i.e., a sketched datum curve) or
Table 61
Sketch Shaft Geometry
Fo
rI
nt
er
du ct io
Pr e P
ro
Invalid
na
lU
Description This is a closed sketch with the centerline aligned to an edge of the section. This is a closed sketch with the centerline offset from the section. The result is a hole in the revolve. This is a closed sketch with the centerline intersecting the section. A revolve feature cannot have sketched geometry on both sides of the axis of rotation, since the geometry would overlap.
611
se
After the sketching plane and the sketch orientation reference plane have been selected, Pro/ENGINEER places you in Sketcher mode. The section of a revolved feature must contain a centerline to define the axis of revolution. The entities of the section must all lie on one side of the centerline; the section cannot cross the centerline. Table 61 illustrates and describes these situations.
nl y
you can create a new sketch by selecting the
button.
When creating a diameter dimension for a revolved section, three mouse selections are required. The two possibilities are shown in Figure 614.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
button. You must select this button prior to sketching the section, otherwise the section fails indicating that the section must be closed. Figure 615 shows the section and the solid geometry resulting from creating a thickened revolve.
As with extrusions, you can thicken the section of a revolution with the
Fo
Step 3: Thicken the section, as needed
A thickened section does not have to consist of a closed loop; however, it cannot contain more than one open section as shown in Figure 616.
612
rI
nt
Figure 614
Figure 615
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Figure 616
When you create a revolved feature, it is created as a protrusion by default. It can be created as a cut by selecting the button in the dashboard. Figure 617 shows a protrusion on the left and a cut on the right, both created using the same section.
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
Pr e P
When you create a cut, you can define which side of the sketch from which to remove the material. To change the material removal side, press the right mouse button to access the pop-up menu and click Flip Material Side or select the button in the dashboard, as shown in Figure 618. This button only becomes available when a cut is being created.
nt
er
Step 4: Specify the cut or protrusion for the revolved feature
Figure 617
na
lU
613
se
nl y
Use this menu to modify the angle of revolution.
Fo
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
The angle value can also be defined by dragging the handles on the feature, as shown in Figure 620.
Drag this handle to dynamically modify the rotation angle. Figure 620
614
rI
nt
Figure 619
er
button.
na
To change the direction of feature creation, select the
A revolve feature is automatically revolved 360 in the direction of feature creation. You can enter or select a different value in the dashboard, as shown in Figure 619.
lU
Step 5: Specify the angle of revolution
se
Figure 618
nl y
Select this button to flip the material removal side for a cut.
Depth Options
There are additional angle options that can be assigned to a revolve to capture the desired design intent. Table 62 describes the angle options available for revolutions. Table 62
Name Button Description
du ct io
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
The angle options for Side 2 are the same as those for Side 1 except that the Symmetric side option is not available. If you have selected the Symmetric depth option for Side 1, the feature is revolved in both directions and the variable angle value you define is divided equally between the two directions.

When the feature is fully defined, select the the revolve. button to complete
nt
er
Side Options
A revolved feature is created in one direction from the sketching plane by default. If you expand the Options slide-up panel in the dashboard, you can define an angle for the second direction. This enables you to assign different angle options in each direction, as shown in Figure 621.
Figure 621
na
lU
To Selected
Revolve to selected point, curve, plane, or surface.
se
Symmetric
Revolve on both sides of the sketch plane by half the specified angle value in each direction.
Variable
Revolve from sketch plane by a specified angle value.
nl y
615
6.3 Editing Sketched Secondary Features

Making Changes
Any of the dimensions and feature elements that were defined when the feature was created can be changed after its been created. This can be done using either the Edit or Edit Definition options. You can select the feature to be edited directly on the model or in the model tree.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
The Edit Definition option can also be accessed on the right mouse pop-up menu or in the Edit menu, as shown in Figure 622. This option automatically suppresses all features that were created after the feature you are redefining and displays the dashboard for that feature.
616
rI
nt
Figure 622
er
the values without accessing the features dashboard. Select the button after youve entered the modified values to regenerate the model and incorporate the changes.
na
lU
If you are only making changes to the values of dimensions, click Edit on the right mouse pop-up menu or in the Edit menu. This will display the dimensions for the selected feature and enables you to change
se
nl y
From the dashboard you have access to all the same options and elements you had when the feature was originally created as shown in Figure 623.
rI
Edit the section in Sketcher mode or change the selection of sketch and orientation reference plane.
Redefine the depth (or angle for a revolve.
ro
Feature Creation Failures
du ct io
No matter what type of change you make to a feature, always be aware of any child features and how the changes you make affect them. Sometimes a change can cause a feature creation failure because the system is no longer able to create the geometry. Failures occur, for example, if references are no longer present (e.g., an edge selected for a chamfer feature is no longer there) or if the geometry becomes impossible to build (e.g., the thickness of a thickened section becomes greater than the inside radius of a filleted corner).
When you select the dashboard
Fo
nt
er
Flip the direction of extrusion or revolution.
na
Toggle between a protrusion and a cut.
Figure 623
Pr e P
select the button to complete a feature, the system may not be able to create the geometry you have defined. Defining a To Next depth with the button for an extrusion when there is no next surface to intersect, for example, prevents the system from creating the geometry. When this happens, the button appears in the dashboard. It may not be necessary to select this button, which activates the Resolve Mode Environment (this topic is discussed in Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling II); instead, you can make a change to
617
lU
Thicken a section or change the direction and thickness. button to preview a feature or
se
nl y
the current feature directly in the dashboard. Using the previous example, the failure to create the extrusion could be resolved by changing the depth from To Next to Blind or changing the direction of extrusion.
3. 4.
5.
Did you select the correct form (e.g., protrusion or cut)?
Pr e P
618
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Was the depth or angle of the feature defined correctly (e.g., did you use the correct direction, were the required references present)?
na
If the section was thickened, could the geometry be created on the side of the section you applied the thickness?
lU
se
2.
Was the sketch you selected or sketched correct for this type of feature (e.g., did the section contain a centerline if you are creating a revolve)?
1.
Did you create the correct type of feature (e.g., should it have been an extrusion instead of a revolve)?
nl y
When a failure occurs while creating or editing a feature, review your steps for creating the feature:
6.4 Creation Sequence

Feature-based modelling involves creating features, one by one, on a base feature until the model is complete. The two types of features covered in this course are pick and place and sketched. The flowchart shown in Figure 624 illustrates the possible paths available when creating these features.
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
Pr e P
When creating features, it is important to consider your design intent. Every aspect of feature creation, such as specifying the references or dimensioning and constraining the model, have an effect on the design intent and thus an effect on the design sequence.
nt
er
Figure 624
na
lU
619
se
nl y
Pr e P
620
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 6a
Goal
Creating a Sketched Revolve
Figure 625
Task 1: Open an existing model. If you did not finish Exercise 5b, open ex5b_rev_flange.prt.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
1.
Open rev_flange.prt. The model appears as shown in Figure 626.
Fo
rI
9 Create a revolved protrusion 9 Create features from existing sketches
nt
er
Figure 626
na
lU
621
se
nl y
In this exercise, you will create a revolved base protrusion from an existing datum curve, as shown in Figure 625.
Task 2: Create a revolved protrusion. 1. 2. 3. Select the datum curve on the model or in the model tree.
Select the
button.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
4.
The revolved feature is automatically created, as shown in Figure 628.
622
rI
nt
Figure 627
Figure 628
er
na
lU
se
The Section Selection dialog box appears as shown in Figure 627. This reminds you that the datum curve will be copied into the revolved feature without an associative link.
nl y
Select the button to create a revolved base feature from the sketched datum curve.
Task 3: Modify the default angle of the revolve. 1. Select and drag the handle shown in Figure 628 to decrease the angle of rotation to approximately 220, as shown in Figure 629.
2.
Select the button in the dashboard to flip the direction of the revolve to the other side of the sketch. The part appears as shown in Figure 630. Direction of revolution
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
Direction of revolution
er
Figure 629
Figure 630
na
lU
623
se
nl y
You can select from the predefined values or enter a new value.
3.
Use the pull down menu in the dashboard to change the angle of revolution to 270, as shown in Figure 631.
Use the pull-down menu to modify the angle. Figure 631 Task 4: Complete the part. 1.
du ct io
Fo
ro
Task 5: Modify the completed feature. 1. Select the protrusion on the model or in the model tree. Press the right mouse button and click Edit. The dimensions appear on the part to be edited, as shown in Figure 633.
Pr e P
624
rI
nt
Figure 632
er
Select the button in the Revolve dashboard to finish creating the revolved extrusion. The model will appear as shown in Figure 632.
na
lU
se
nl y
Figure 633 2. 3.
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
Select the button to regenerate the model. The model should appear as shown in Figure 634.
Pr e P
Task 6: Create an extruded cut by sketching the section.
1. 2.
Select the
button to create an extrusion. button to create a new sketch
In the dashboard, select the for the feature.
nt
Double-click on the 270 dimension and change the angle value to 360.
er
Figure 634
na
lU
625
se
nl y
3.
Select the part surface indicated in Figure 635 as the sketch plane. Sketch on this surface.
Figure 635 4. 5. 6. 7.
Click Bottom on the Orientation menu in the Section dialog box.
Before sketching, select the and click Default to return to the default orientation. This makes it easier to select the required sketching references. Select the button in the references dialog box and select the interior surface indicated in Figure 636. Select this interior surface.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
8.
Fo
626
rI
Select the
nt
button to enter Sketcher mode.
Figure 636
er
Click the Reference field of the Section dialog box and select datum plane FRONT as the Sketch Orientation reference plane.
na
lU
se
nl y
9.
Select datum plane RIGHT as a sketch reference, if it is not already selected.
du ct io
Fo
rI
ro
13. Select the
button to complete the sketch.
Pr e P
14. Reorient the model in the default orientation. 15. Since this is a cut, the extrusion direction must be flipped. Select the button in the dashboard.
16. Also, select the button to convert the extrusion from a protrusion to a cut. Notice that there are now two direction arrows attached to the feature. One arrow indicates the direction
Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I 627
nt
er
Figure 637
na
lU
12. Sketch three lines and one arc as shown in Figure 637. Apply the equal length constraint to the three lines and make the vertices symmetric about the vertical centerline. Sketch the arc concentric to the circular reference entity.
se
11. Sketch a vertical centerline aligned to datum plane RIGHT.
nl y
10. Select the button to return to the sketching orientation and close the Reference dialog box. The reference entities are projected on the sketching plane.
17. Define the depth of cut through to the next surface by selecting the
Pr e P
628
ro
du ct io
18. Select the button to verify the geometry of the cut. It should appear as shown in Figure 638.
Fo
button.
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
Material removal direction
Extrusion direction
nl y
of the extrusion. The second arrow appears because this is a cut. It indicates whether the material inside the section or the material outside the section is removed. The arrow in this case indicates it removes material inside the section. If it needed to be flipped, you simply need to click on it. This isnt required in this case, however.
Figure 638 19. Select the Hiding enables you to temporarily remove a datum feature from the display.
button to complete the feature.
Task 7: OPTIONAL - Add the rounds and holes to the part.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
1.
Complete the part by creating the rounds and holes shown below. Use appropriate dimension values for these features.
Fo
rI
20. The datum curve is still visible on the model. Select the curve on the model or in the model tree, right-click to access the pop-up menu, and click Hide.
2.
Save the part and erase it from memory.

629
nt
er
Figure 639
na
lU
se
nl y
Pr e P
630
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 6b
Goal
Creating Sketched Extrusions
9 Create extrusions from existing sketched datum curves 9 Redefine sketched datum curves
If you did not finish Exercise 5c, open ex5c_bracket.prt.
du ct io
1.
Pr e P
ro
Task 1: Open the part. Open bracket.prt that was modified in Exercise 5c. The model appears as shown in Figure 641.
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 640
Figure 641
631
na
lU
se
nl y
In this exercise you will create two extrusions from an existing sketched datum curve, shown in Figure 640.
Task 2: Create an extrusion from the existing datum curve. 1. Select the sketched datum curve on the model or in the model tree, as shown in Figure 642.
Figure 642 2. 3. Select the button to create an extrusion using the sketched datum curve as the cross-section.
associative link. Select the 4. 5.
Fo
The Section Selection dialog box appears to remind you that the datum curve will be copied into the extruded feature without an button.
The Extrude dashboard opens and a default extrusion.
du ct io
Use the handle shown in Figure 643 to modify the height of the extrusion to 0.5.
Pr e P
ro
Use the handle to drag the height of the extrusion.
632
rI
nt
Figure 643
er
na
lU
se
Select the sketched datum curve to create an extrusion.
nl y
6.
This extrusion is created to add material, the default options in the Extrude dashboard are acceptable. Select the button to complete the extrusion. The model appears as shown in Figure 644.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
1.
Select the sketched datum curve from the model tree and press the right mouse button. The menu appears as shown in Figure 645.
rI
Task 3: Modify the datum curve.
2.
Click Edit, the model appears as shown in Figure 646.
nt
er
Figure 644
Figure 645
na
lU
633
se
nl y
Figure 646 Modifying the datum curve has no effect on the extrusion because the sketch was copied into the extruded feature without an associative link. 3.
5.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Default Orientation Figure 647
The datum curve appears modified.
Fo
To verify the modification to the datum curve, you can select the datum curve from the model tree and it will be highlighted in the model. The datum curve appears as shown in Figure 647.
rI
nt
4.
Select the button to regenerate the model and incorporate the new datum curve dimension values.
er
634
na
Double-click on the 0.20 dimension and enter [0.50] in the window that appears. The datum curve offset value updates to 0.50.
lU
Top View
se
nl y
Task 4: Create an extrusion from the modified datum curve. 1. 2. 3. Select the modified sketched datum curve from the model tree.
Fo
rI
du ct io
5.
This extrusion should remove material from the previously created extrusion. Select the dashboard to remove material. button from the Extrude
Pr e P
ro
nt
er
Figure 648
na
lU
4.
The Extrude dashboard opens and a default extrusion is created, as shown in Figure 648.
se
associative link. Select the
button.
The Section Selection dialog box appears to remind you that the datum curve will be copied into the extruded feature without an
nl y
635
Select the button to create an extrusion using the sketched datum curve as the cross-section.
6.
The yellow arrow indicates the direction of material removal and should be pointing into the extrusion, as shown in Figure 649.
Select to intersect all surfaces.
du ct io
Fo
ro
8.
Pr e P
Select the button to complete the extrusion, the model appears as shown in Figure 651.
636
rI
7.
In the dashboard, change the depth option from a specified depth to intersect with all surfaces, as shown in Figure 650.
nt
Figure 649
Figure 650
er
na
lU
se
The material removal side is indicated by an arrow.
nl y
Figure 651 9. Hide the datum curve.
1.
Select the cut on the model or in the model tree, right-click to access the pop-up menu, and click Edit Definition. The feature dashboard reappears. Open the Options slide-up panel in the dashboard. Click Through All on the Side 2 menu. The cut will now be extruded in both directions through all surfaces.
2.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
3.
Fo
rI
Task 5: Edit the cut feature to change the extrude direction to both sides.
nt
er
na
lU
637
se
nl y
4.
Select the button to complete the feature. The part should now appear as shown in Figure 652.
Pr e P
638
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
5.
nt
Figure 652
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 6c
Goal
9 Create base extrusions from existing sketched datum curves 9 Create secondary extrusions from existing sketched datum curves 9 Create secondary extrusions by sketching the section
du ct io
Task 1: Open the part. 1. Open gauge.prt that was created in Exercise 4a. The model appears as shown in Figure 654
If you did not finish Exercise 4a, open ex4a_gauge.prt.
Pr e P
ro
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 653
Figure 654
na
lU
639
se
nl y
In this exercise you will create extrusions using the sketched datum curves shown in Figure 653.
2.
Turn off the display of datum planes.
Task 2: Create extrusions from the datum curves.
Select this datum curve.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
640
rI
2.
Select the button and extrude the base feature to a blind depth of 1.5. The part should appear as shown in Figure 656.
nt
Figure 655
Figure 656
er
na
lU
se
nl y
1.
Select the datum curve indicated in Figure 655 and create a base extrusion that adds material.
3.
Select the datum curve indicated in Figure 657.
Figure 657
5.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
6.
Extrude the cut through all surfaces by selecting the button. The arrow indicating the direction of material removal should be pointing inside the section. The completed feature should appear as shown in Figure 658.
Fo
Select the to a cut.
rI
button to change the extrusion from a protrusion
nt
4.
Select the
button to create an extrusion.
er
Figure 658
na
lU
se
Select this datum curve.
O
641
nl y
Task 3: Modify the second datum curve. 1. Select the second datum curve in the model tree, right-click to access the pop-up menu, and click Edit. The dimensions for the datum curve appear as shown below.
Fo
2. 3.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Double-click on the .15 dimension and enter [0.90] as the new value. Select the button to regenerate the model and incorporate the new datum curve dimension values. The model should appear as shown in Figure 660.
642
rI
nt
Figure 659
Figure 660
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Task 4: Create an extruded cut using the modified datum curve. 1. Create a second extruded cut from the modified datum curve. The part should appear as shown in Figure 661.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
2.
nt
er
Figure 661
na
lU
643
se
nl y
Pr e P
644
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 6d
Goal
Task 1: Create the model. 1.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Create the model shown in Figure 663 by sketching the sections for all the required extrusions. Use the dimensions and model orientation shown in Figure 663.
Fo
rI
nt
9 Create base extrusions by sketching the section 9 Create secondary extrusion by sketching the section
er
Figure 663
645
na
Figure 662
lU
se
nl y
In this exercise you will create extrusions by sketching the sections. Once completed, the model appears as shown in Figure 662.
Pr e P
646
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Review Questions
Question 1 A single extrusion can add and remove material. a. b. Question 2 True False
Which of the following toolbar buttons is used to create an extrusion? a. b. c. d.
Question 3
du ct io
b. c.
Pr e P
ro
d.
a.
The selected sketch is copied into the new feature without an associative link. The existing sketch is removed from the model and is copied to the new extrusion.
The associative link is maintained between the existing sketch and the new extrusion. Subsequent modifications to the existing sketch will not be reflected in the new feature.
Which of the following happens when you select an existing sketch to create an extrusion or a revolve? (Hint: There is more than one correct answer.)
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
647
se
nl y
Question 4
Which of the following are true statements regarding creating a thin extrusion or revolve? (Hint: There is more than one correct answer.) a. b. c. d. To specify a thickness to the sketched section, select the button on the dashboard and enter a thickness value. Multiple open entities can be sketched to create a thin.
Question 5
Which of the following buttons is used to convert a protrusion to a cut? a. b. c. d.
Question 7
ro
Pr e P
648
du ct io
a.
b.
Which of the following toolbar buttons is used to create a revolved feature? a. b. c. d.
True False
Question 6
A protrusion can be converted to a cut by dragging the depth handle in the opposite direction.
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
A revolve cannot be created using a thin.
The thickness applied to a thin cannot exceed the radius at any point along the sketched section.
nl y
Question 8
Which of the following statements are true regarding a revolved feature? a. b. c. d. The section for a revolved feature can be selected or sketched.
The section for a revolved feature must be closed.
Question 9
b. Question 10
False
du ct io
a.
b.
Pr e P
ro
True False
Fo
rI
nt
The sketched section on the left-hand side of the following graphic will generate the solid geometry shown on the right-hand side.
er
na
a.
True
lU
All of the section entities for a revolved section must lie on one side of the centerline.
se
The depth of the feature can be extruded to the next intersecting surface.
nl y
649
The section for a revolved feature must contain a centerline.
Pr e P
650
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
9Creating Datum Planes 9Creating Datum Axes
During the design process, there are many times when the available features do not provide the required references to place a new feature. For these situations, consider using datum features to create the necessary references.
Fo
rI
Creating Datum Features
nt
er
Chapter 7
na
lU
71
se
nl y
72
lU
se
nl y
7.1 Creating Datum Planes

Additional datum planes may be necessary if a features sketching plane or orientation plane are not satisfied by any of the three default datum planes or by selecting existing geometry. For these situations datum planes can be created in a model. For example, to create the cut shown in Figure 71 the cylindrical surface does not fulfill the planar requirement for a sketching plane. Therefore, an additional sketching plane is required.
Fo
rI
Additional datum plane needed as a sketching plane
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
To create the protrusion shown in Figure 72, an additional sketching plane is also needed.
nt
er
Figure 71
Figure 72
73
na
lU
se
nl y
To create a datum plane during feature creation, begin creation of the feature and select the button on the dashboard to pause feature creation. This datum plane can then be referenced as either a sketching or orientation reference. By creating the datum plane during feature creation, the plane is grouped with the feature in the model tree as shown in Figure 74. The naming convention for datum planes that are manually added to the model are named DTM#, where # is a unique number identifying the feature.
Fo
du ct io
General Steps
Use the following steps as a general guideline to create a datum plane: 1. 2. Start the creation of the datum plane. Select the placement references and constraints.
Pr e P
74
ro
rI
nt
Datum Plane created within the feature
Figure 74
er
na
Figure 73
lU
se
Datum planes that are referenced by more than one feature should be created as a separate feature in the model. Datum planes that are only referenced by one feature should be created during feature creation to simplify the appearance of the model.
Datum Plane created as a separate feature
nl y
Datum planes can be created before feature creation or during feature creation. If the datum plane is created before feature creation, a separate datum plane feature is added to the model tree. This datum plane can then be referenced in the same manner that default datum planes are referenced when selecting sketching or orientation references. When the datum plane is created as a separate feature, the model tree appears as shown in Figure 73. By default, datum planes created within a feature are hidden.
Step 1: Start the creation of the datum plane

To start the creation of a datum plane, click Insert > Model Datum >
to selecting the button.
Pr e P
ro
To select multiple references, press and hold the <Ctrl> key.
du ct io
To constrain a datum plane, select references from existing features in the model. You can select any of the following types as references: Axis Edge Curve Point/Vertex Plane Cylinder Coordinate System
As an alternative, you can select the reference prior
Once you have started the creation of a datum plane, you must select constraints and references to locate the datum plane. When creating a datum plane, its location is defined by constraining it to existing features. Constraints are required to fully locate the datum plane.
Fo
Step 2: Select the placement references and constraints
rI
nt
er
Figure 75
na
lU
75
se
nl y
Plane from the main menu or select the button from the toolbar. The DATUM PLANE dialog box appears as shown in Figure 75.
The following constraints can be used to create a datum plane: Through Normal Parallel Offset Tangent Blend Section
Pr e P
Only constraints that work in combination with the references previously selected are displayed.
76
ro
du ct io
Table 71 lists all valid combinations of constraints used to create datum planes. For example, if you select a Normal constraint for a planar reference and a Tangent constraint for a cylindrical surface, a datum plane would be successfully created. The Normal, Tangent combination of constraints is valid, indicated in the table by an "X".
Fo
rI
nt
Figure 76
er
na
lU
se
The datum plane is Tangent to the smaller cylinder and Parallel to the flat vertical surface.
nl y
After selecting the appropriate placement references, select a constraint type for each reference. By clicking on the column to the right of the reference you can select the desired constraint from the pull-down menu. Only constraints that work in combination with the references previously selected are displayed. In the example shown in Figure 712, DTM2 is Tangent to the smaller cylinder and Parallel to the flat vertical surface.
Table 71
Through Point\Vertex DATUM PLANE CONSTRAINT COMBINATION AxisEdgeCurv Normal Parallel Tangent
Cylinder
Plane
Plane
Cylinder
Stand Alone Constr.
Point/Vertex Plane Cylinder Normal Axis, Edge, Curve Plane Parallel Offset Plane Plane Coord Sys Tangent Blend Section Cylinder
X X X X
X X X X
X X X X
er
na
X X
nt
lU
X X X X X X
77
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
se
Through
Axis, Edge, Curve
nl y
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Offset from this surface Figure 78
78
nt
Parallel to this surface
Figure 77
er
Through this axis
na
lU
se
References can be removed from the DATUM PLANE dialog box by selecting the reference and clicking Remove in the right mouse pop-up menu.
Through this axis
nl y
In the examples shown in Figure 77 and Figure 78, both datum planes pass through the axial reference but have different secondary constraints. In Figure 77, the datum plane has a Parallel constraint with the vertical planar surface, whereas in Figure 78, the datum plane has a rotational Offset constraint with the vertical planar surface.
As an alternative to starting the creation of a datum plane and then selecting references, you can preselect the references needed to place the datum plane before selecting the button. For example, the top surface shown in Figure 712 was preselected. The dialog box that appears once you select the button contains the preselected reference as one of the current references. This surface was preselected
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
You can change the appearance, direction or the name of the datum plane using the Display and Properties tabs in the DATUM PLANE dialog box. By default, datum planes are sized to fit the overall geometry, when working on small features, the default datum plane size may be too large. The Display tab enables you to modify the size of the datum plane to fit the feature and flip the normal direction the datum plane, as shown in Figure 710.
nt
er
Figure 79
na
lU
79
se
nl y
Figure 710
The Properties tab, as shown in Figure 711, enables you to change the name of the datum plane.
du ct io
Fo
ro
Once the datum plane has been constrained, select the button to place the datum plane. If the datum plane was created within another feature, proceed with its feature creation by selecting the button on the dashboard.
Pr e P
710
rI
nt
Figure 711
er
na
lU
se
nl y
7.2 Creating Datum Axes

Cylindrical features, holes, and rotational features are the only features that automatically generate their own datum axes upon creation. Because datum axes can be used as placement references for coaxial holes and rotational features, additional datum axes may be necessary. In the case of rotational features, a centerline can be sketched to serve as the axis of rotation. If, however, this axial location is referenced by subsequent features, it is more efficient to create a permanent datum axis in the model. For example, to create the coaxial hole shown in Figure 712, an axial reference is required. This axis is needed to create the hole
du ct io
Fo
rI
ro
General Steps
Use the following steps as a general guideline to create a datum axis: 1. 2. Start the creation of the datum axis. Select placement references and constraints.
Pr e P
nt
er
Figure 712
na
lU
se
nl y
711
Step 1: Start the creation of the datum axis

As in the case of datum planes, datum axes can be created prior to the feature creation or during feature creation (i.e. a hole) by using the button. To start the creation of a datum axis, click Insert > Model Datum >
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Similar to datum planes, placement references and constraints need to be selected to fully locate the datum axis. The name of the axis can also be changed from the default name to a custom name under the Properties tab, as shown in Figure 714.
Fo
712
rI
nt
Figure 713
Figure 714
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Axis from the main menu or select the button from the toolbar. The DATUM AXIS dialog box appears as shown in Figure 713.
Step 2: Select placement references and constraints
This axis can also be created without having to use the dialog box, by preselecting the cylindrical surface formed by the round and then selecting the
du ct io
In the example shown in Figure 715, the created datum axis references the existing cylindrical surface that was generated by the rounds. This is the only reference needed to fully constrain the datum axis.
Pr e P
ro
button.
Fo
After selecting the appropriate placement references, a default constraint type appears next to the reference in the dialog box. If multiple constraints are available for the constraint, you can access a pull-down menu by selecting the constraint column. Only constraints that work in combination with the references previously selected are displayed.
rI
The axis references the cylindrical surface.
nt
er
Figure 715
na
Coordinate systems and points/vertices are covered in Pro/ENGINEER: Advanced Part Design.
Edge/Curve Planar surfaces Cylindrical surfaces Coordinate systems Points/Vertices
lU
713
se
To constrain a datum axis, select references from existing features in the model. References can be any of the following types:
to selecting the button.
nl y
As an alternative, you can select the reference prior
Once you have started the creation of a datum axis, you must select constraints and references to locate the datum axis. Some constraints only require one reference, where others must be used in combination with other references to fully locate the datum axis.
Pr e P
714
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
Figure 716
er
na
lU
References can be removed from the DATUM PLANE dialog box by selecting the reference and clicking Remove from the right mouse pop-up menu.
se
References these edges
nl y
In the example shown in Figure 716, the top planar surface is selected as a placement reference with a Normal constraint. When a planar surface is selected as a reference, two linear placement handles appear. They can be dynamically dragged to fully locate the datum axis. By dragging the boxes to adjacent edges or surfaces, offset references are added to the dialog box that can be modified to locate the datum axis as required.
Exercise 7a
Goal
Creating Datum Features
rI
du ct io
Task 1: Create a new part called bevel_washer.prt. 1. Create a new part called bevel_washer.prt using the default template.
ro
Task 2: Create the base feature.
Pr e P
1. 2.
9 Create datum planes 9 Create datum axes
Select the
Select the button to sketch the section of the protrusion. Select datum plane TOP as the sketching plane and accept datum plane RIGHT as the Sketch Orientation reference.
Fo
button to create the base feature.
nt
er
Figure 717
na
lU
715
se
nl y
In this exercise you will create the model shown in Figure 717. In order to create the geometry for this model, you will need to create an additional datum plane and axis.
3.
Sketch the section shown in Figure 718 using the default references.
Fo
4. 5. 6.
Select the
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Extrude the protrusion to a blind depth of [0.75].
Select the button to complete the feature. The model appears as shown in Figure 719.
716
rI
nt
Figure 718
Figure 719
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Task 3: Create the angled protrusion.
1. 2.
Select the
button to create the angled protrusion.
Select the 3.
button to pause the creation of the protrusion.
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
4.
While pressing and holding down the <Ctrl> key, select the edge and surface shown in Figure 721. The datum plane appears immediately once the references are selected.
nt
er
Figure 720
na
lU
717
se
Select the button to create an additional datum plane. The DATUM PLANE dialog box appears as shown in Figure 720.
nl y
An additional datum plane is needed as a sketching plane.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
The constraint types (i.e., Through, Offset) are dependent on the reference type (i.e., edge, surface). A default constraint type is assigned for each reference; however, it can be changed by selecting the constraint and using the pull-down menu to select from the list of available constraints.
6. 7.
Click to the right of the surface reference. Ensure that the Offset constraint is selected.
Enter [30] as the Rotation value. The DATUM PLANE dialog box appears as shown in Figure 722.
Fo
8.
Select the Properties tab in the DATUM PLANE dialog box. Change the name of the datum plane to [Angled_datum], as shown in Figure 724.
718
rI
5.
Click to the right of the Edge reference in the DATUM PLANE dialog box to edit the constraint type. Ensure that the Through constraint is selected.
nt
Figure 722
er
Figure 721
na
lU
se
nl y
Select this edge and this surface
Figure 723 9. Select the plane.
button to complete the creation of the datum
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
12. Sketch the section shown in Figure 724. Select appropriate references to create the geometry.
Fo
11. Select the button to sketch the section for the angled protrusion. Select the newly created datum plane as a sketching plane reference and select datum plane FRONT to face in the bottom direction.
rI
nt
er
10. Select the button to continue the creation of the protrusion. The extrude dashboard is now active.
Figure 724
na
lU
se
719
nl y
13. Select the
15. Spin the model to ensure that the depth direction arrow is pointing towards the base feature. If not, select the reverse the direction.
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
ro
The feature that has been added to the model tree is a Group feature. If you expand the feature it consists of the datum plane and the protrusion, as shown in Figure 726.
720
rI
nt
Figure 725
Figure 726
er
na
lU
16. Select the button to complete the feature. The model appears as shown in Figure 725.
se
button to
nl y
14. Select the button from the depth pull-down list to set the feature depth to extrude up to the next surface.
Task 4: Create a coaxial hole.
1. 2.
Select the
button to create a coaxial hole.
An axis is needed as a reference to create the hole. Select the
na du ct io n Fo rI
5.
The DATUM AXIS dialog box should update as shown in Figure 728. Select the axis. button to complete the datum
Pr e P
ro
nt
er
Figure 727
lU
4.
Select the surface indicated in Figure 727 as a reference. The constraint type should be automatically set to Through. Select this surface
se
3.
Select the button to create a datum axis. The DATUM AXIS dialog box appears.
O
721
button to pause the creation of the hole.
nl y
Figure 728 6. The Placement slide-up panel can be selected to review or change the references. 7. 8.
Select the top surface of the angled protrusion as the primary placement reference. Select the button to set the depth option to Drill to intersect with all surfaces
9.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
10. Double-click on the diameter of the hole and enter a value of [3.00]. 11. Select the button to complete the feature. You model appears as shown in Figure 729.
Fo
722
rI
nt
Select the newly created axis as a primary placement reference. This establishes a coaxial constraint.
Figure 729
er
Select the button to continue the creation of the hole. The hole dashboard is now active.
na
lU
se
nl y
Task 5: Create the cut. 1. Create the cut with the dimensions shown in Figure 730.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
2.
Save the model and erase it from session.
rI
nt
er
Figure 730
na
lU
723
se
nl y
Pr e P
724
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 7b
Goal
Additional References
Fo
rI
ro
du ct io
9 Create datum planes 9 Create datum axes

Task 1: Create a new part called fork.prt. 1. Create a new part called fork.prt using the default template.
Pr e P
Task 2: Create the base feature.
1.
Select the
button to create the base feature.
nt
er
Figure 731
na
lU
725
se
nl y
In this exercise you will create the model shown in Figure 731. In order to create the geometry for this model, you will need to create an additional datum plane and axes.
2.
Select the extrusion.
button to specify that the feature will be a thin
4.
Sketch the section shown in Figure 732.
Fo
5. 6.
du ct io
Set the thickness to [1.00].
Set a blind depth of [2.00] and extrude the feature from both button.
sides of the sketching plane by selecting the
7.
Pr e P
726
ro
Select the button to complete the feature. The model appears as shown in Figure 733.
rI
nt
Figure 732
er
na
lU
se
nl y
3.
Select the button to sketch the section of the protrusion. Select datum plane TOP as the sketching plane and accept datum plane RIGHT as the default Sketch Orientation reference.
Figure 733
1.
Create the two full rounds on the ends of the initial u-shaped protrusion, as shown in Figure 734.
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
Pr e P
Task 4: Create a coaxial hole. An axis is needed to create a coaxial hole through the ends of the base feature. Because this axis may be referenced by other features, create the axis prior to creation of the hole so it is not grouped with the hole feature.
nt
er
Task 3: Create the full rounds.
Figure 734
na
lU
727
se
nl y
1. 2.
Select the
button to create the datum axis.
Fo
rI
nt
er
na du ct io n
Select this surface Figure 735
ro
5. 6. 7.
Edit the hole to have a diameter of [1.00]. Set the depth to Drill to intersect all surfaces. Select the button to complete the feature.
Pr e P
728
lU
se
4.
Select the previously created axis as a placement reference and the surface shown in Figure 735.
3.
Select the button to create a hole through the ends of the base feature so that it is coaxial with the full rounds.
nl y
Select either of the surfaces formed by the full rounds as the placement reference. Ensure that the constraint type is set to Through.
Task 5: Create the post.
1. 2.
Select the
button to create an extruded feature.
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Parallel to this datum plane
na
lU
Press and hold the <Ctrl> button to select more than one reference.
3.
Select the button. Select the surface and datum plane shown in Figure 735 as references. Constrain the datum plane to be tangent to the cylindrical surface and parallel to datum plane FRONT. The resulting datum plane (DTM1) appears as shown in Figure 736.
New datum plane Figure 736
Pr e P
ro
4. 5.
Select the
button to continue creating the extruded feature.
Select the button and sketch the section shown in Figure 737 on the newly created datum plane. Use datum planes RIGHT and TOP as sketching references.
se
Tangent to this surface
model. Select the button to pause the feature creation so that you can create a sketching plane.
nl y
729
A sketching plane is needed that does not currently exist in the
6. 7.
Select the
du ct io
The Options slide-up panel must be used to set options for Side 2; otherwise for Side 1 the dashboard can be used.
Fo
8.
Pr e P
ro
What would have happened if the Side 2 depth was not set? Select the Options slide-up panel option a second time to close the panel. Select the button to complete the cylindrical protrusion. The model appears as shown in Figure 739.
9.
730
rI
nt
Select the Options slide-up panel option from the dashboard to access the reference options. Set the Side 1 to a blind depth of [7.50]. Set the Side 2 depth to To Next. The slide-up panel is shown in Figure 738.
Figure 738
er
na
lU
Figure 737
se
nl y
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
10. Save the model and erase it from session.
rI
nt
er
Figure 739
na
lU
731
se
nl y
Pr e P
732
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Review Questions
Question 1
a. b. Question 2
True False
Which button enables you to create a datum plane? a. b. c. d.
Question 3
Which button enables you to create a datum axis? a. b. c.
du ct io
d.
Question 4
By default, datum axes are automatically generated with cylindrical features. a. True False
ro
Pr e P
b.
Question 5
Both datum planes and datum axis can be renamed using the Properties tab on their associated dialog boxes. a. b. True False
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
733
se
nl y
Default datum planes are the only datum planes that can be created in the model.
Question 6
Which combination of constraints enables you to create DTM2, as shown below?
Tangent to the Round at an Angle to TOP. Through A_6 at an Angle to TOP. Through A_6 at an Angle to FRONT. Through TOP at an Angle to FRONT.
ro
Pr e P
Question 8
734
du ct io
a.
b. c.
d.
Which of the following statements are true regarding the following model tree?
Which of the following are valid constraint combinations to create a datum plane? Through a plane and parallel to an axis. Through a plane and offset from a surface.
Tangent to a surface and parallel to a surface. Through an axis and Normal to a surface.
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
The datum plane was created as a separate feature. The datum plane was created within the protrusion. The datum axis is created with a feature.
Which of the following model tree images corresponds to the graphic shown below?
a.
Fo
rI
nt
er
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Question 10
A datum axis can be fully constrained through a round. a. b. True False
na
b.
lU
735
se
nl y
DTM1 is hidden.
Pr e P
736
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
Numerous features and functions can be used to build a model in Pro/ENGINEER. Until now you have learned about standard sketched features and some basic pick and place features. This chapter will further your knowledge of Pro/ENGINEER features. Straight, sketched and standard holes provide useful alternatives when creating holes on your models. Drafts, shells and ribs are quick methods to alter you models as required. In addition, functions like Insert Mode and Reorder enable you to control your design intent to accurately model your geometry.
9Creating Advanced Holes 9Creating Drafts 9Creating Shells 9Creating Ribs 9Reordering and Inserting Features 9Changing Part Units
Fo
rI
Additional Features & Functions
nt
er
Chapter 8
na
lU
81
se
nl y
82
lU
se
nl y
8.1 Radial Holes
A radial hole is placed in one of the following two ways:
Fo
rI
du ct io
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create a radial hole: 1. 2. 3. 4. Start the creation of the hole. Select the placement references. Define the dimensions of the hole. Define the depth of the hole.
Pr e P
ro
nt
er
Figure 81
na
lU
On a planar surface at an angle from a planar reference, and at a distance from an axis (shown on the left-hand side of Figure 81). On a cylinder or a cone at an angle from a planar reference, and at a distance from a dimensional reference (shown on the right-hand side of Figure 81).
se
O
83
nl y
Holes are placed on a planar surface using one of four placement schemes: Linear, Radial, Diameter and Coaxial. This section discusses the Radial placement scheme. These schemes can be defined in the dashboard under the Placement slide-up panel.
Step 1: Start the creation of the hole

To start the creation of a hole, select the button on the toolbar or click Insert > Hole in the menu bar. The dashboard appears, as shown in Figure 82, with all of the options for creating holes. Simple straight holes are the default hole types.
Figure 82
You can place radial holes in the following two ways: Radial hole on a planar surface Radial hole on a cylinder
Radial Hole on a planar surface
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
surface. To change the placement to radial, select the slide-up panel option on the hole dashboard, as shown in Figure 83. Select Radial as the placement type.
To place a straight radial hole on a plane, you must first select a planar surface as the primary reference. Once selected, Pro/ENGINEER automatically places the hole, but it automatically selects a linear placement because you are selecting a planar
Fo
84
rI
nt
Figure 83
er
na
lU
se
nl y
The hole appears with the multiple handles to define the placement, size and depth of the hole. The two placement handles are at 90 to each other and are used to assign the secondary references. You can assign the following secondary references:
rI
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
Drag and drop the handles onto the required references to locate the hole as shown in Figure 85. Again, as an alternative, use the dashboard Secondary references section on the Placement slide-up panel to assign the references.
Radial Hole on a cylinder
To place a straight radial hole on a cylinder, you must first select the cylindrical surface as the primary reference. Once selected, Pro/ENGINEER automatically places the hole as a radial hole. The hole appears with the multiple handles to define the placement, size and depth of the hole. The two placement handles are at 90 to each other and are used to assign the secondary references. You can assign the following secondary references: Planar surface to provide angular distance Standard linear reference to provide linear distance
Fo
nt
er
Figure 84
na
lU
85
se
Drag and drop the handles onto the required references to locate the hole as shown in Figure 84. The dashboards Secondary References section on the Placement slide-up panel can also be used to assign the references.
nl y
Axis for radial distance Plane for the angular distance
Step 3: Define the dimensions of the feature

Once the secondary references have been selected, the dimensions for the feature can be specified. The feature dimensions include the diameter and depth of the hole. To define these dimensions, use any one of the following methods:
du ct io
Fo
rI
Select and drag the handles associated with the diameter and depth of the hole. Double-click on the default dimension values and enter a new value. Enter new values for the secondary references in the Placement slide-up panel, as shown in Figure 86. Enter values for the diameter and depth in the hole dashboard, as shown in Figure 86. The secondary reference dimensions can be modified here.
Pr e P
ro
The diameter and depth of the hole can be entered here. Figure 86
86
nt
er
na
lU
se
Figure 85
nl y
Step 4: Define the depth options of the hole

By default, all holes are created in one direction from the placement reference and they are extruded to a blind depth. The depth options can be changed by selecting options in the Shape slide-up panel or by selecting a depth option from the dashboard as shown in Figure 87. Refer to Chapter 3 for a full description of depth options for holes.
du ct io
Select the
Select the dashboard.
Pr e P
ro
Fo
Drag the depth handle through the placement plane so that it extrudes in the opposite direction. button from the Placement slide-up panel on the
button to complete the hole feature.
rI
Pro/ENGINEER determines the extrude direction for you. To reverse this direction, use either of the following methods:
nt
er
Figure 87
na
lU
87
se
nl y
8.2 Standard Holes
1. 2. 3.
Start the creation of the hole. Select the placement references.
To create the hole, select the
rI
du ct io
> Hole in the menu bar. To create a standard hole, select the button from the dashboard. The dashboard appears as shown in Figure 88.
Fo
ro
Pr e P
A standard hole can be placed using any hole Placement Type (Linear, Coaxial, Radial, Diameter, On Point) as described earlier in this chapter and in Chapter 3.
88
nt

button on the toolbar or click Insert
Figure 88
er
na
Modify the properties and dimensions for the hole.
lU
se
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create a radial hole:
nl y
Standard holes use a predefined sketched section to generate the geometry for the hole. You can enter values for the predefined dimensions to create a hole on your model. The standard hole set is based on industry-standard fastener tables.
Step 3: Modify the properties and dimensions for the hole
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Pr e P
ro
na
Select or enter the screw size in this pull-down menu.
lU
Select the thread type from this pull-down menu. Figure 89
se
Select the button on the dashboard to add a counter bore. Select or enter a screw size from the pull-down menu as shown in Figure 89. Select and edit dimensions for the hole from the Shape slide-up panel, as shown in Figure 89. Select the thread type for the standard hole using the pull-down menus, as shown in Figure 89. Select a depth option and enter a value if necessary, as shown in Figure 89.
Select the depth option and enter the value in these pull-down menus.
Select the
button on the dashboard to add a countersink.
nl y
89
Properties and dimensions of the standard hole can be modified using any of the following methods:
In addition, Pro/ENGINEER automatically adds a Note to all standard holes. To view this default note, click on the Note slide-up panel on the dashboard, as shown in Figure 810. You can modify this note by clicking Edit > Setup > Note in the menu bar. Figure 810
Fo
du ct io
Complete the standard hole by choosing appropriate placement references and select the button.
Pr e P
810
ro
rI
nt
Figure 811
er
na
lU
The Properties slide-up panel enables you to enter a new name for the hole as well as modify the Parameter values associated with the standard hole.
se
nl y
8.3 Sketched Holes
1. 2. 3.
Start the creation of the hole. Select the placement references. Sketch the cross-section for the hole.
du ct io
This button must be selected to access the Sketched option.
Fo
As with other hole types to create a hole, select the button on the toolbar or click Insert > Hole in the menu bar. To create a sketched hole, click Sketched from the pull-down menu in the hole dashboard as shown in Figure 812.
rI
Pr e P
ro
Once Sketched is selected the dashboard updates, as shown in Figure 813.
nt
er
Figure 812
Figure 813
na
lU
811
se
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create a radial hole:
nl y
A sketched hole gives you greater control for hole creation by enabling you to sketch its section as a revolved form.

A sketched hole can be placed using any hole Placement Type (Linear, Coaxial, Radial, Diameter, On Point) as described earlier in this chapter and in Chapter 3.
Step 3: Sketch the hole cross-section

As an alternative to sketching, you can also retrieve a section using the button in the dashboard.
The following rules apply to the cross-sections of sketched holes: A vertical centerline must be sketched to represent the axis to revolve about. The sketched section must be closed. There must be a sketched horizontal line. This line is automatically aligned with the primary reference or placement surface. If more than one horizontal line exists, the top-most line is aligned with the placement surface (or primary reference as shown in Figure 814).
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
Axial Reference
button to activate Sketcher mode. Sketch the cross-section using the standard sketching tools.
lU
Once the primary reference is selected you must sketch the cross-section for the hole. To sketch the cross-section, select the
se
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
The top-most Horizontal sketched line is automatically aligned to the primary reference.
Figure 814 Select the button to complete the sketched section.
Once all references and options have been verified, select the button to complete the hole feature.
812
O
Primary Reference
nl y
8.4 Drafts
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Start the creation of the draft. Select the surfaces that require drafting.
Select the pull direction Enter the draft dimension.
Step 1: Start the creation of the draft

. To start the creation of a draft, select the button on the toolbar or click Insert > Draft. The dashboard appears, as shown in Figure 815, with all of the options available for creating drafts.
du ct io
Fo
rI
ro
Step 2: Select the surfaces that require draft

Select the surfaces that you wish to draft. You can select directly on the model. Single or multiple surfaces can be selected for drafting. Once a surface for drafting is selected, a "Single Surfaces" tag appears on the surface and the References slide-up panel updates indicating that Single Surfaces have been selected, as shown in Figure 816.
Pr e P
nt
er
Figure 815
na
Select the draft hinges.
lU
813
se
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create a draft:
nl y
A Draft feature creates sloped or angled surfaces (+/- 30 max.) There are a variety of draft menu options available. This section covers a basic draft. Other drafts are covered in Pro/ENGINEER: Advanced Part Modeling.
Figure 816
Pr e P
814
ro
du ct io
The draft hinge is an internal axis that represents the pivot line (or "hinge") about which the drafted surfaces rotate when the draft angle is applied. The draft hinge exists at the intersection of the draft surface and the draft hinge surface. The draft hinge surface is not required to physically intersect the draft surfaces; the angle can be measured from an implicit intersection.
Once the draft surfaces have been selected you must select the draft hinge. It can be defined directly on the dashboard or using the References slide-up panel. To define the hinge using either of these locations, select No Items in the Draft hinges field and select a planar surface, edge or curve on the model. Once the draft hinge is selected, the draft angle appears on the model as shown in Figure 817.
Fo
Step 3: Select the draft hinges
rI
nt
To select multiple surfaces, press and hold the <Ctrl> key while selecting the surfaces. Even if multiple surfaces are selected the "Single Surfaces" tag remains; however, each surface is highlighted in red.
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Figure 817
Step 4: Select the pull direction
du ct io
By default the pull direction is assigned the same reference as the draft hinge. This can be changed directly on the dashboard or using the References slide-up panel. To define the pull direction reference using either of these locations, select the field adjacent to the Pull Direction section and select a planar surface, axis or two points.
Fo
removed from the negative. Select the button in the references menu to reverse the pull direction. By reversing the pull direction, you are effectively changing the draft direction as shown in Figure 818.
rI
The pull direction represents the direction the positive mold is being
nt
Pr e P
ro
er
Figure 818
na
The Pull Direction reference is the same as the Draft Hinge shown in Figure 817.
lU
815
se
nl y
Draft hinge
Step 5: Enter the draft dimension

You can select the button or enter a negative value to reverse the draft angle direction. The last step in creating the draft is to enter the draft angle. This value can be less than or equal to 30.
Figure 819
To complete the draft, select the
rI
nt
Pr e P
816
ro
du ct io
Fo
er
na
button in the dashboard.
lU
se
nl y
8.5 Creating Shells

A shell feature is a pick and place feature that creates a hollowed out solid with a specified wall thickness. Geometry must be a constant thickness; shell features cannot create tapered geometry. Shell features are most often used for models with a constant thickness. They can also be used for castings and molded parts.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
A constant wall thickness is applied to all surfaces when you add a shell feature to the model.
nt
er
na
Open Shell
An Open Shell feature removes specified surfaces and leaves a hollowed out solid. Figure 820 shows the cross-section of a bottle before and after an open shell feature was added to the model. A wall thickness of 0.1 remains on all surfaces on the model.
This surface was selected as the surface to be removed for the shell.
Figure 820 A Closed/Internal cavity shell creates a model that has an internal hollow cavity, but it does not remove a surface. One use of a closed shell is in modeling situations where there is no surface that can be selected for removal (i.e. all surfaces have tangent edges).
Closed/Internal Cavity Shell
lU
Open Shells (select surfaces to remove) Closed/Internal cavity shells
se
817
You can create two types of shells:
nl y
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create a shell: 1. 2. 3. 4. Start the creation of the shell. Select the surfaces for removal.
Select surfaces with a non-default wall thickness (optional).
Step 1: Start the creation of the shell
Pr e P
ro
818
du ct io
By default, a closed/internal shell is created immediately once the shell option is selected. If your intent is to create a closed/internal shell you can continue on to the next Step. To create an Open Shell, you must select a surface or surfaces that are to be removed. To select surfaces for removal, select the References slide-up panel option on the dashboard, select the No Items option in the Removed surfaces section and select the surface or surfaces on the model. To select multiple surfaces, press and hold the <Ctrl> key. Figure 822 shows the References slide-up panel with a single surface selected for removal.
Step 2: Select the surfaces for removal
Fo
rI
nt
Figure 821
er
To start the creation of a shell, select the button on the toolbar or click Insert > Shell in the menu bar. The dashboard appears, as shown in Figure 821, with all of the options available for creating shells.
na
lU
se
nl y
Define the wall thickness.
Figure 822
ro
du ct io
You can accept the default wall thickness value or enter a new value. To enter a new value, select the Thickness field in the dashboard and enter a new value. You can also select a value from the pull-down menu, as shown in Figure 823. The pull-down menu lists the most recently used values. Enter the wall thickness value here or select from the pull-down menu.
Pr e P
Step 3: Define the wall thickness
Fo
rI
nt
A single surface, tangent to another, cannot be removed unless the tangent surface is also removed. Use a closed shell, followed by a cut feature as an alternative. Two tangent surfaces cannot have different thickness values. This is generally caused by rounds. To avoid this you can wait until after the shell has been added to add the round. The surface that is being removed for a shell must be surrounded by edges (i.e., not a fully revolved feature). Again, use a closed shell as an alternative.
er
Figure 823
819
na
Shell Restrictions
The geometry of the model can control whether a shell feature can be added to the model. The following are some additional restrictions:
lU
se
nl y
Fo
Pr e P
820
ro
du ct io
rI
nt
The shell thickness value is +0.1
er
Figure 824
na
The shell thickness value is -0.1
lU
se
nl y
The wall thickness value for a shell feature can be either positive or negative. Your decision on whether to enter a positive or negative value is determined by whether your initial geometry represents the final shape of the inside or outside of the model. Figure 824 shows the difference between adding the shell value as a positive (left-hand side) or negative (right-hand side) value.
Step 4: Select surfaces with a non-default wall thickness
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
nt
er
Figure 825
na
To add a non default wall thickness, open the References slide-up panel on the dashboard and select Undefined in the Non-default thickness section. Select the surface for which you are defining the non-default wall thickness and enter a dimension adjacent to the surface, as shown in Figure 825. Multiple surfaces can be selected and assigned a non-default wall thickness by pressing and holding the <Ctrl> key as the references are selected.
lU
se
nl y
821
By default, all of the walls in a shell feature have a constant thickness; however, you do have the option to apply a different wall thickness to selected surfaces. This enables you to have greater design flexibility when using shell features in your models.
Figure 826 shows an example where the thickness at the bottom of a bottle was assigned a different thickness value than the other surfaces in the model.
Fo
Pr e P
822
ro
du ct io
To complete the shell feature, select the dashboard.
rI
nt
Figure 826
er
na n
The bottom surface was specified with a different thickness value.
lU
button on the
se
nl y
8.6 Creating Ribs
1. 2. 3.
Start the creation of the rib.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
To start the creation of a rib, select the button on the toolbar or click Insert > Rib in the menu bar. The dashboard appears, as shown in Figure 828.
Define the depth of the rib.
Step 1: Start the creation of the rib
Sketch or select the section of the rib.
Fo
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create a rib:
rI
nt
er
Figure 827
Figure 828
na
lU
823
se
nl y
A rib is a protrusion extruded symmetrically from both sides of a selected sketching plane. In general, a rib is a feature that supports adjoining geometry as shown in Figure 827.
Step 2: Sketch or select the section of the rib

The section for the rib feature can be either sketched or you can select a datum curve that will be copied to create the section. To sketch the section, select the button in the rib dashboard or the References slide-up panel. The section of the rib should be sketched as an open section that defines the shape of the rib. In Figure 829, the two open endpoints of the sketch have been aligned to the part surfaces. By aligning to the part surfaces the rib follows the contour of these surfaces when it is extruded. The sketcher tools are the same as those used for creating other sketched features.
du ct io
Fo
The material direction button ( ) in the References slide-up panel enables you to flip the side of the sketch that the feature is created on. Select this button to reverse the feature creation direction.
Pr e P
824
ro
rI
nt
Figure 829
Figure 830
er
na
lU
Endpoints of open section aligned to part surfaces
se
nl y
Step 3: Define the depth of the rib

The depth options for ribs are restricted to numeric values. You can enter the numeric depth value for the rib or select from the pull-down menu in the dashboard, as shown in Figure 831. Enter the depth value here or select from the pull-down menu.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
creation from both to one side of the sketching plane, select the button on the rib dashboard.
rI
By default the rib is extruded symmetrically on both sides of the sketching plane, as shown in Figure 832. To switch the feature
To complete the rib, select the
nt
er
Figure 831
Figure 832
na
button.
lU
825
se
nl y
8.7 Reordering Features

Pro/ENGINEER regenerates models in the order in which the features appear in the model tree. In certain situations, the resulting geometry can vary greatly depending on the feature creation order. The Reorder option can be used to rearrange the creation sequence of the features in order to achieve the desired geometry.
General Steps
Use the following general steps to reorder features: 1. Drag and drop features in the model tree.
du ct io
A Shell feature leaves a wall thickness on all surfaces; therefore, a hole becomes a pipe when a shell is applied to it.
Fo
To reorder features on your model, simply select the feature and drag and drop it directly in the model tree. Keep in mind that features cannot be reordered before their parent features. The examples in Figure 833 and Figure 834 illustrate the use of reorder tool.
Pr e P
ro
A Round placed after a shell may not have desired results.
826
rI
nt
Figure 833
Figure 834
er
Step 1: Drag and drop features in the model tree
na
lU
se
nl y
The reorder function can be used to rearrange the order that features are regenerated. The part shown in Figure 835 was created with the feature sequence displayed in the model tree.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
Reordering the hole after the shell, and the small round before the shell results in the part shown in Figure 836.
nt
er
Figure 835
Figure 836
na
lU
827
se
nl y
8.8 Inserting Features
General Steps
Use the following general steps to insert features: 1. 2. 3. Activate Insert Mode.
Step 1: Activate Insert Mode

To activate Insert Mode, select and drag the icon at the bottom of the model tree to the location you would like to insert a feature(s). Figure 838 shows a model and its model tree prior to inserting a feature.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
828
rI
Cancel Insert Mode.
nt
Insert features as required.
Figure 837
er
na
lU
Insert Mode can be used in situations where a design change occurs and you simply would like to create a feature earlier in the design process. It "rolls back" the model to the location in which you wish to place the feature. This ensures that you only use references that exist at that point in the model. On occasion, features may abort during creation due to existing features on the part. In these cases, the Insert Mode tool may enable the feature to be created.
se
nl y
When features are added to a model, they are by default, added at the end of the feature list. Insert Mode is used to insert new features between existing features.
Figure 838 shows a model and its model tree once the icon has been moved to insert a feature. Once the icon has been moved the part is rolled back to the point at which you are inserting a feature.
Figure 838
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
829
se
nl y
Step 2: Insert features as required

Once the icon has been moved to the desired location in the model tree, you can start using the standard feature creation tools to insert one or more features. An extruded protrusion has been added to the model shown in Figure 839. Create additional features as necessary in the model.
Pr e P
830
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
Figure 839
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Step 3: Cancel Insert Mode

When you are finished inserting features, select and drag the icon back to the bottom of the feature list. At this time all features are regenerated and returned to the model display, as shown in Figure 839. All new features are now added at the end of the feature list.
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
nt
er
Figure 840
na
lU
831
se
nl y
8.9 Changing Part Units
1. 2. 3.
Start the change of units. Define the new system of units. Define the conversion method.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
To change the units of your model, click Edit > Setup in the menu bar and click Units in the PART SETUP menu. The Units Manager dialog box appears as shown in Figure 841.
832
rI
nt
Step 1: Start the change of units
Figure 841
er
na
lU
se
General Steps
Use the following general steps to change part units:
nl y
On occasion, the part units in your models may need to be modified. When modifying the part units, you can convert the existing units to the new system of units or you can maintain the current values in the new system of units.
Step 2: Define the new system of units

To define a new system of units you can select from the list of predefined systems or you can create a new one. A description of the predefined units is listed at the bottom of the Units Manager dialog box. To create a new system of units, select the button. The System of Units Definition dialog box appears as shown in Figure 842.
Fo
rI
ro
du ct io
To finalize the units change, select the new system and select the button. A Warning box appears as shown in Figure 843.
Pr e P
Step 3: Define the conversion method
To define the new system of units assign a name and type, and select the type of units required. Complete the definition by selecting the button.
nt
er
Figure 842
Figure 843
na
lU
833
se
nl y
This dialog box requires that you select how the current dimension values change in the model. You must select one of the following: The Convert Existing Numbers (Same Size) option converts the existing dimensions to the new system of units, therefore maintaining the same size in the resulting model (i.e., 1" becomes 25.4mm). The Interpret Existing Numbers (Same Dims) option keeps the same numeric value when converting the dimensions (i.e. 5" becomes 5mm).
Select the the
button to complete the change of units and select button to close the Units Manager dialog box.
Pr e P
834
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
The Interpret Existing Numbers option can be useful if you accidentally designed the model using the wrong units; however, the dimensions are correct.
se
nl y
Exercise 8a
Goal
Additional Features
In this exercise, you will complete the new part shown in Figure 844 by using both features introduced in this chapter and previous chapters. The instruction will provide you with the order in which to create the features, but many of the menu selections are purposefully left out, in an effort to increase your knowledge of features creation on your own.
ro
du ct io
9 9 9 9 9 9 9
Create holes Create drafts Create shells Create rounds Create chamfers Create revolved protrusions Use the reorder command
Task 1: Create the base feature in the new part. 1. 2. Create a new part using the default template. Create the base feature as a rectangular protrusion as shown in Figure 845.
Pr e P
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 844
na
lU
835
se
nl y
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
If necessary, refer to the instructions in Chapter 3 (Creating Pick and Place Features) on how to create a chamfer.
1. 2. 3.
Create the chamfer as shown in Figure 846. Create the Thru All hole as shown in Figure 846. Select the button to create a basic draft. The dashboard appears as shown in Figure 847.
836
rI
Refer to Figure 846 while creating the features in this task.
nt
Figure 846
er
Task 2: Create a chamfer, hole, draft and constant round on the model.
na
Figure 845
lU
se
nl y
Figure 847 4. By default, Pro/ENGINEER is ready for you to select the surfaces to be drafted. Select the end surface to be drafted as shown in Figure 848. You will notice a "Single Surface" label appear on the model.
6.
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
hinge. This is acceptable for this draft. Select the button a second time to close the slide-up panel.
na
Select the button on the dashboard to access the References slide-up panel as shown in Figure 848. By default the pull direction is assigned the same reference as the Draft
lU
ro
Figure 848 Enter [15] in the dashboard as the draft angle. Select the button to complete the draft.
Pr e P
7. 8. 9.
Create the constant rounds as shown in Figure 846. The edge where the draft meets the bottom of the part is not rounded.
se
5.
Select the Draft hinges field on the dashboard and select the bottom surface of the model as the draft hinge.
Draft angle
nl y
837
Task 3: Create a revolved protrusion, variable round and shell on the model. Refer to Figure 849 for creating the features in this task.
Fo
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
To create a diameter dimension, select the outside edge, select the centerline and select the outside edge again and place the dimension.
11. Create two variable rounds on the vertical edges, as shown in Figure 849. The rounds are 0.5 on top, 0.75 at the intermediate point, and 0.5 at the bottom. 12. Select the button to create a shell. The shell dashboard appears as shown in Figure 850.
10. Create the revolved protrusion as shown in Figure 849. Use datum plane FRONT as the sketching plane.
838
rI
nt
Figure 849
Figure 850
er
na
lU
se
nl y
13. By default, Pro/ENGINEER immediately prompts you to select the surfaces that are to be removed to create the shell. Press and hold the <Ctrl> key and select the three surfaces that must be removed to obtain the geometry. Select the button to open the References slide-up panel to review the selected references as shown in Figure 851.
14. Enter [0.4] as the shell thickness value in the dashboard. 15. Select the button to complete the shell. The model appears as shown in Figure 852.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 851
Figure 852
na
lU
839
se
nl y
Task 4: Reorder the hole and revolved protrusion features. 1. Reorder the hole and the revolved protrusion to come after the shell by selecting them in the model tree and dragging them as necessary to obtain the geometry shown in Figure 853.
Fo
Pr e P
840
ro
du ct io
2.
rI
nt
Figure 853
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 8b
Goal
Placement of radial holes
Fo
rI
9 Create radial holes
du ct io
Task 1: Create the base feature in the new part. 1. Create a new part called [radial_holes] using the default template.
Pr e P
ro
nt
er
Figure 854
na
lU
841
se
nl y
In this exercise, you will place radial holes on a planar surface and also on a cylindrical surface, as shown in Figure 854. This will provide you practice for creating holes that can be patterned radially. Radial patterns are covered in Chapter 11.
2.
Create the base feature as an revolved protrusion using the dimensions shown in Figure 855.
Fo
Task 2: Create a radial hole through the top cylindrical protrusion.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
1.
Select the button to create a simple straight hole. The Hole dashboard appears, as shown in Figure 856.
2.
Select the cylinder surface shown in Figure 857 as the Primary Reference. If you view the Placement slide-up panel, the Linear Placement Type automatically changes to Radial because the hole is being placed on a cylindrical surface.
842
rI
nt
Figure 855
Figure 856
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Select this surface as the Primary Reference for the hole.
Select this surface as the Linear Reference for the hole.
Figure 857 3.
4.
du ct io
6. 7.
Change the dimension value for the diameter of the hole to [25].
Select the button on the dashboard to access the Shape slide-up panel. Change the depth option to Through All. Select the button a second time to close the slide-up panel.
Pr e P
ro
5.
Double-click on the dimension values for the Angular and Linear references. Enter [36] as the angle and [45] as the distance.
Fo
Select and drag the second of the 90 handles to datum plane FRONT. This datum plane is now an Angular secondary reference for the hole.
rI
Four handles appear on the model. Select one of the two handles that appear 90 to one another and drag it to the top surface of the cylindrical protrusion. This creates a Linear secondary reference, as shown in Figure 857.
nt
er
na
lU
843
se
nl y
8.
Select the button to complete the hole. The part appears as shown in Figure 858.
select the button to access the Reference slide-up panel.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Linear is the default hole type when a planar reference is selected. To change the hole type
1.
Create the Through All radial hole shown in Figure 859.
Fo
Task 3: Create a radial hole through the base of the protrusion.
2.
844

rI
nt
Figure 858
Figure 859
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Review Questions
Question 1
Planar Surface or Datum Plane Axis Cylindrical Surface Point
d. Question 3
Point
Standard holes enable you to sketch the cross-section for the hole. a. True
du ct io
b.
Question 4
Which of the following statements are true regarding sketching the cross-section for a hole? a. A vertical centerline must be sketched to represent the axis to revolve about. The sketched section must be an open section. The top sketched horizontal line is aligned with the primary reference for the sketched hole. A horizontal centerline must be sketched that aligns the sketch with the primary reference for the sketched hole.
ro
Pr e P
b. c. d.
False
Fo
rI
c.
Cylindrical Surface
nt
b.
Axis
er
a.
Planar Surface or Datum Plane
na
Which of the following references define the two required secondary references to place a Radial hole on a planar surface?
lU
se
845
nl y
On which of the following primary references can you place a Radial hole?
Question 5
Which of the following are true statements regarding creating a draft? a. b. Multiple surfaces can be selected for drafting by pressing and holding the <Ctrl> key as you are selecting the surfaces.
c. d.
To define the draft hinge reference you can only select an existing edge on the model.
a. b. Question 7
True False
Question 8
ro
Pr e P
Question 9
846
du ct io
d.
A sketched rib must be a closed section. a. b. True False
The Interpret Existing Numbers option for changing units enables you to main the same size of the model, only the dimension values change. a. b. True False
c.
A closed shell cannot have walls of varying thickness. Wall thickness can be added to the inside or outside of a model by entering a positive or negative wall thickness value.
b.
The thickness of a shell can be manually entered on the dashboard or you can select from the pull-down values.
Fo
a.
To create an open shell, based on the default options, you must select which surface(s) are to be removed.
rI
Which of the following statements are true regarding shell features?
nt
er
na
Question 6
A closed/internal shell is the default shell type.
lU
The pull direction reference must be a reference independent of the draft hinge reference.
se
nl y
Multiple surfaces can be selected as references when defining the draft hinge by pressing and holding the <Ctrl> key as you are selecting the surfaces.
Question 10
Which of the following statements are true regarding Reordering and Inserting features in a model? a. b. c. d. Reordering enables you to drag and drop features so that you can rearrange the feature creation order. When reordering, features can be moved anywhere in the model.
Insert Mode enables you to rearrange features to change their feature order. Insert Mode is activated by selecting and dragging the
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
847
item on the model tree.
se
nl y
Pr e P
848
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
File management options in Pro/ENGINEER enable you to organize all your files. Managing your files is important to effectively control your design data. In addition to a PDM (Product Data Management), these file management options offer methods for saving, duplicating, and deleting files.
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
9Saving Files 9Renaming Files 9Deleting Files 9Erasing Files
Fo
rI
Managing Pro/ENGINEER Files
nt
er
Chapter 9
na
lU
91
se
nl y
92
lU
se
nl y
9.1 Managing Pro/ENGINEER Files

All work done in Pro/ENGINEER uses the systems random access memory (RAM). Files are only stored to the systems hard disk drive when the file is explicitly saved, as illustrated in Figure 91. RAM is considered temporary storage (or "In Session" working memory) and the system hard disk drive is considered permanent storage.
Display RAM
"In Session" Working Memory
lU
Save Open
Pro/ENGINEER File
rI
Files remain in RAM until one of the following occurs: Files are erased using one of the Erase options Pro/ENGINEER session is closed System is shut down
General Steps
du ct io
Use the following general as a guideline for file management when working on a model: 1. 2. 3. 4. Save the initial model design and any subsequent changes made to the model. Delete any unwanted versions. Close the window. Erase the file from memory.
Pr e P
ro
Fo
nt
er
Figure 91
na
se
Hard Disk Drive
Stored Information
nl y
93
Step 1: Save initial model design and any subsequent changes made to the model
Save
The current model name that appears in the "Enter object to save" window cannot be modified. You must save the changes under the current model name when using the button.
When you save a file using File > Save, it automatically saves to the current working directory (for a new file) or the directory from which it is retrieved (for an existing file). To rename the existing file, click File > Rename in the menu bar. The Rename dialog box appears as shown in Figure 93. Enter a new name for the model and select whether to rename the file in session and on disk or only in session.
If you rename the file on disk and in session, the file is renamed in RAM and the hard drive, overwriting the original file. If you rename the file in session, the file is renamed only in RAM; when you save the file, it is then saved to the hard disk with the original file.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Rename
Fo
Select the button or press the <Enter> keyboard button to store the file on the hard disk drive.
94
rI
nt
Figure 92
Figure 93
er
na
To save a model, select the button from the toolbar or click File > Save in the menu bar. The prompt "Enter object to save" appears as shown in Figure 92.
lU
se
Save Rename Save a Copy Backup
nl y
Once a design is created or changes are made to the model, it is important to store the files in a permanent location on your disk drive. Files can be saved using any of the following options:
If you rename the file on disk and in session, the file is renamed in RAM and the hard drive, overwriting the original file. If you rename the file in session, the file is renamed only in RAM. If you save the file, it is saved to the hard disk with the original file. If the file you are renaming is associated with other files (i.e. assemblies or drawings), you must bring all of them into session by opening them. This ensures that all associated files are updated with the correct model name once the file is renamed. Once the associated file is renamed all reference files must be re-saved to ensure that the change is applied.
du ct io
Fo
rI
ro
The copied file is stored in the current working directory by default. You can select a different directory to save the file using the Look in pull-down menu.
Pr e P
Enter a new name for the file and select the button to save it to the hard disk drive. The original file remains in the active window; to work on the new file you must explicitly open it. If you do not want to save changes in the original file, make sure to erase the file from session without saving (erase is covered in Step 4 of the process). For example, the part shown in Figure 95, bracket_2.prt, originally contained two holes. A design change requires the model to have four holes. Once the holes are created, the file is saved as bracket_4.prt
nt
er
Figure 94
na
lU
Save a Copy
You can also copy an existing file to a new name while retaining the existing file. This enables you to explore different design options. To save a copy of an existing file, click File > Save a Copy in the menu bar. The Save a Copy dialog box appears as shown in Figure 94.
se
nl y
95
using the Save a Copy option. As a result, the current file in RAM is still bracket_2.prt and bracket_4.prt is saved to the hard disk drive. To ensure that the additional holes do not appear in the original file, the file is erased without saving.
RAM
Save
bracket_2.prt (4 holes) Open
Pro/ENGINEER File
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
The button at the top of the Backup dialog box enables you to create a new directory for backup.
Select this pull-down menu to navigate to the directory that the file is to be backed up to.
Using the Look In section of the Backup dialog box, browse to the target directory. The original file name is maintained; however, the file is stored in the new directory. The original model remains in the active window. The changes saved to the backup file remain independent of the original file.
96
rI
nt
Figure 96
er
Backup
If you want to create a backup copy of your file, click File > Backup in the menu bar. The Backup dialog box appears as shown in Figure 96.
na
Figure 95
lU
se
bracket_4.prt (4 holes)
bracket_2.prt (2 holes)
nl y
Display
Hard Disk Drive
Backup also saves backups of any associated files to the backup directory.
To avoid the loss of work, try to save your changes often and/or create a backup file. There is no automatic saving and the system does not automatically prompt you to save files when exiting Pro/ENGINEER.
Step 2: Delete any unwanted versions
du ct io
Fo
rI
Pr e P
Each version of the saved file has a numbered extension that is appended to the end of the file name. The highest numerical extension represents the most recently saved model. To help manage the number of files that you have stored on the hard disk, it is recommended to delete any unwanted versions of your models.
ro
Delete old Versions
Retaining older versions of the file is useful if you need to retrieve earlier versions later; however, each new file takes up additional disk space. If retaining older versions is no longer necessary, click File > Delete > Old Versions in the menu bar to remove all but the most recent version of the file.
97
nt
files, select the button in the File Open dialog box and click All Versions
er
Most recently saved file
Figure 97
na
By default, only the most recent file is displayed in the File Open dialog box. To view all versions of your
lU
se
Each time a file is saved, an updated version of that file is stored on the hard disk. For example, if bracket_2.prt is saved four times, it exists as four different files in the directory, as shown in Figure 97.
nl y
Delete all Versions
If a file is no longer required and you want to remove it and all of its versions from your disk drive, click File > Delete > All Versions in the menu bar. This permanently deletes files from the hard disk and RAM; therefore, it is important to use this option with extreme caution.
Step 3: Close the window
Erasing Not Displayed Files
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Files that were previously closed still exist in RAM. To erase these files, click File > Erase > Not Displayed in the menu bar. Erasing files ensures that only the necessary files are in session. Try to erase files when finished working with them to minimize the amount of information stored in RAM. Too much information in RAM slows the system down. If you are unsure which files are currently in session, select the button in the File Open dialog box.
98
Erasing Current Files
Files can be erased from the current display in the active window by clicking File > Erase > Current in the menu bar. Ensure that all changes are saved before erasing the file; unlike closing the window, erasing the file completely removes the file from RAM. Only the last saved version of the model can be accessed.
Fo
Once files are saved, it is recommended that you erase them to clear your RAM. Files can be erased from the current display or they can be erased from memory if the window has already been closed.
rI
nt
Step 4: Erase the file from memory
er
na
To review the files in RAM, select the button in the File Open dialog box. You can also open from the list of files.
lU
When a file is opened in Pro/ENGINEER it becomes the active window. To close an active window, click Window > Close in the menu bar. If you accidently close a window without saving, it still resides in RAM. As long as a file resides in RAM it is automatically retrieved from there; the information on the hard disk is not accessed.
se
nl y
Save
lU
bracket_2.prt bracket_4.prt bracket_6.prt
Pro/ENGINEER File
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 98
na
Retrieve
se
RAM
bracket_2.prt
bracket_4.prt
Display
Hard Disk Drive
nl y
99
For example, three parts (bracket_2.prt, bracket_4.prt, bracket_6.prt) are in session, as shown in Figure 98. Bracket_2.prt and bracket_4.prt have been previously saved and bracket_6.prt has not yet been saved. If you close all three windows and click Erase > Not Displayed, bracket_6.prt would no longer exist in RAM. The parts bracket_2.prt and bracket_4.prt, however, would remain because they were previously saved.
Pr e P
910
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 9a
Goal
Managing Files
Task 1: Open the model called brace.prt. 1. 2.
Save any open models and erase them from memory. Select the button in the Pro/ENGINEER Navigator, the Folder Navigator appears as shown in Figure 99. This provides you with an alternative to using the Open dialog box to browse the contents of directories.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 99
na
lU
911
9 9 9 9
Rename files Delete old versions of files Save a Copy of a file Erase Files
se
nl y
In this exercise, you will open a model that has multiple saved versions associated with it and you will practice using the file management options covered in this chapter.
3.
Browse to the C:\Users\train directory to view a list of the files. A Browser appears when you select the C drive, as shown in Figure 910. If needed, expand the browser section by dragging the right-hand side border until a scroll bar appears.
na du ct io n Fo
To preview any object, select it in the browser. 4.
Select brace.prt. A preview of the model appears in the top section of the Browser. By default, you are shown the most recent version of the file.
Pr e P
ro
5.
Select the Versions option and select the button. The file structure shows all saved versions of the models. The brace.prt has several different versions. Select brace.prt.1. Notice that the original version of the model appears in the preview section.
6.
912
rI
nt
Figure 910
er
lU
Drag the border over to view the scroll bar if necessary.
se
The Browser appears when you select a directory.
nl y
Task 2: Rename the part. 1. 2. 3.
Click File > Rename to rename brace.prt. Enter [holder] as the new name for the part. Select the Rename on disk and in session option, as shown in Figure 912. This option renames the part in the current session and permanently renames it on the hard disk.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
4.
Select the
nt
button to complete renaming the part.
er
Figure 911
Figure 912
na
lU
913
se
If a previous version is opened, modified and saved, it is saved as the latest version of the part. Changes between the version opened and the latest version will not be included in the latest version.
7.
Double-click brace.prt.3 to open the latest version of the model, as shown in Figure 911.
nl y
Alternatively, you can view all versions of the models in the current working directory by clicking File > Open, selecting the button and clicking All Versions.
5.
Browse the directory to confirm that all versions of the part are renamed to holder.prt. Refer to Task 1 for further instructions on browsing the directory if necessary.
1. 2. 3.
Click File > Delete > Old Versions.
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
914
ro
2.
Click File > Save a Copy to save this model and the changes made to a new name. The Save a Copy dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 914.
rI
nt
Figure 913
er
1.
Modify the slot cuts to be rectangular, as shown in Figure 913.
na
Task 4: Modify and save the part with a new name.
lU
Browse the directory to confirm that all older versions of the part have been deleted.
se
Select the button to permanently delete all previous versions of holder.prt.
nl y
Task 3: Delete the older versions of holder.prt.
Task 5: Erase a single file from RAM. 1. Click File > Erase > Current to erase holder.prt from RAM. In the dialog box that appears, select the button to confirm the erasing of the part in the dialog box that appears. Open holder.prt. The model contains the original cuts and not the redefined rectangular cuts. These changes were only saved in the model that was named stabilizer.prt
ro
du ct io
2.
Task 6: Clear all files from memory. 1. 2. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. A dialog box appears, showing all the files currently in RAM. Select the RAM. button to confirm the erasing of all files in
Pr e P
Fo
3.
Save the model with the name stabilizer.prt.
rI
nt
er
Figure 914
na
lU
915
se
nl y
Pr e P
916
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Review Questions
Question 1
a. b.
To save a file, select the
button.
c.
a.
True
du ct io
b.
Question 4
Which of the following statements is true regarding the Save a Copy option? a. Any files that reference the file being renamed must be in session. The copied file becomes the active model once saved. The copied file is stored in the current working directory. The Save a Copy option is the same as renaming the file.
ro
Pr e P
b. c. d.
False
Fo
Question 3
If you open a file and decide that you do not want to save the changes but you want to start over and continue to work on the model, click Window > Close and reopen the part.
rI
nt
d.
Each time a file is saved, an updated version of the file is stored on the hard disk.
er
When saving a file using the button, the current name can be changed by entering the new name in the message window prompt.
na
lU
When you save a file it automatically prompts you for the directory that you wish to save it in.
se
Question 2
Which of the following statements is true regarding saving a file.
nl y
917
The two locations that files exist while working on them in Pro/ENGINEER are _____________ and _____________.
Question 5
Which of the following options enables you to create a duplicate of a model by copying it to a new name? a. b. c. d. Save
Save a Copy Backup
Question 6
Which of the following options enables you to create a create a copy of a model in another directory while maintaining the original name? a. b. c. d. Save Rename Save a Copy Backup
b. Question 8
False
Pr e P
ro
Question 9
du ct io
The Delete > Old Versions option removes all of the versions from the system disk. a.
b.
Which of the following series of menu selections must be made to save the current file to a new name and erase the original file without saving it. a. Click File > Save a Copy, enter a new file name and select the button. Click File > Erase > Current. b. Click File > Save a Copy, enter a new file name and select the button. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed.
918
True False
Fo
a.
True
rI
Question 7
Erasing files from the display removes them from RAM.
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Rename
Question 10
Which of the following statements is true regarding the uhook part shown in the following graphic?
a. b. c.
Uhook.prt has been saved 4 times.
du ct io
After uhook.prt was saved 4 times, the File > Delete > All Versions options were selected.
d.
Pr e P
ro
After uhook.prt was saved 5 times, the File > Delete > Old Versions options were selected.
Uhook.prt has been saved 9 times.
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
919
se
nl y
Pr e P
920
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
Adding relations to a model incorporates design intent in a model, ensuring that the model behaves as intended if changes occur. They are established by creating mathematical relationships between either dimensions and/or parameters within a specific feature or between features.
9Creating Relations 9Testing Relations
Fo
rI
Creating Relations
nt
er
Chapter 10
na
lU
101
se
nl y
102
lU
se
nl y
10.1Creating Relations
General Steps
Use the following general steps to add a relation: 1. 2. 3. 4. Start the creation of the relation. Determine the necessary dimension symbols. Enter the relation. Flex the model.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
Relations can be added to a model by clicking Tools > Relations in the menu bar. The Relations dialog box appears as shown in Figure 101.
er
Figure 101
na
Step 1: Start the creation of the relation
lU
se
103
nl y
Step 2: Determine the necessary dimension symbols

All Pro/ENGINEER dimensions have a unique symbol that identifies them. Symbols in combination with the equation are what are used to write an equation. Dimension symbols are displayed as "d#", where the # indicates the specific dimension. Each number is unique in the model. To display dimension symbols while editing the model, click Info > Switch Dimensions.
ro
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
104
rI
nt
Figure 102
er
na
To display the dimension symbol for a feature, select the button in the Relations dialog box and select the necessary features on the model or in the model tree. Each dimension value associated with the selected feature appears and is automatically displayed in its symbolic form, similar to those shown in Figure 102. Select the button to toggle the dimension values between their symbolic and numeric form.
lU
se
nl y
Step 3: Enter the equation

All relations are entered in the main section of the Relations dialog box. You can type the equation manually or you can insert the symbols directly from the model. To insert the symbol from the model, complete the following steps: As an alternative, you can also add a relation to the model by entering the equation directly in the message window when modifying a driven dimension value. 1. 2. 3. Select the button and select the dimensions on the model.
Regenerate the model.
Relation Type
Equality
du ct io
Conditional
Pr e P
ro
The type of relation that you use should be based on your design intent. For example, if the design intent for the model shown in Figure 102 is to center the hole on the block, an equality relation is used. An example of an equality relations is shown in Figure 103.
Fo
rI
Description
Equates one parameter or dimension symbol as a function of another, see Figure 103. Example: d36 = 2.75 + d20 * (1 - d42) Use IF / ELSE / ENDIF statements to equate one parameter or dimension symbol based on a specified condition, see Figure 105. Example: IF (d12 + d16) <= 10 d3=d6 ELSE d4=d6 ENDIF
nt
Relation Types
You can use two types of relations, as described in Table 101. Table 101
er
na
Pro/ENGINEER provides many tools for defining relations. The following sections describe them in further detail.
lU
Once you finish entering the equation, select the button.
se
105
nl y
Figure 103 After adding the relation and regenerating the model, it appears as shown in Figure 104 with the hole positioned in the center.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
106
rI
nt
Figure 104
er
na
lU
se
nl y
You can also use a conditional relation to drive the model in Figure 104. The conditional relation shown in Figure 105 defines two possible block sizes, 10 x 12 or 6 x 8. If the diameter of the hole is greater or equal to 5.25, the box size is 10 x 12. Otherwise, it is 6 x 8.
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
For example: /* Relations to center hole d4=d1/2 d3=d2/2 /* Relations to control height d0=d2*0.25
Comments
Comments are used to describe the intent of the relation. Comments are recommended because they are helpful for others using the model and/or for you if time has passed since the relation was added to the model. To add a comment to the relation, the characters /* must precede the statement.
Fo
nt
er
Figure 105
na
lU
107
se
nl y
Operators
The operators described in Table 102 can be used in relations. Table 102 Operator
+ / * ^ () > >= < <= == != & | !
Description
Subtraction Division Multiplication Exponentiation Grouping Greater than Greater than or equal Less than
Less than or equal Equal to
du ct io
Functions
Some functions that can be used in relations are shown in Table 103. You can enter functions directly or they can be selected from a list using the button. Table 103
ro
Mathematical Functions
sin( ) cos( ) tan( ) asin( ) acos( ) atan( ) tanh( ) sqrt( ) log( ) ln( ) exp( ) abs( )
Pr e P
108
Fo
rI
Not equal to
And Or
Not
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Addition
Table 103 Mathematical Functions

sinh( ) cosh( ) ceil( )the smallest integer not less than the real value floor( )the largest integer not greater than the real value
G (= 9.8 m/sec2) - Gravity constant C1,C2,C3,C4 (= 1.0, 2.0, 3.0, 4.0) - Common parameters for all models in current session can be modified by relations
Fo
rI
PI (= 3.1415...) - Mathematical constant,
du ct io
Mass Property mp_mass mp_density mp_volume mp_surf_area mp_cg_x mp_cg_y mp_cg_z
ro
Pr e P
You can enter these parameters directly or select them using the button.
nt
Predefined parameters
er
Table 104
Table 105 Description Mass Density Volume Surface area X of center gravity Y of center gravity Z of center gravity
na
Some of the system-defined parameters are described in Table 104 and Table 105.
lU
System-Defined Parameters
se
Parameters
System-defined parameters and user-defined parameters can be used to define the relation.
nl y
109
User-Defined Parameters
User-defined parameters can be created and added by expanding the Local Parameters section at the bottom of the Relations dialog box. To
ro
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
To insert the parameter into the relation, you can enter the name manually or select the parameter name in the Local Parameters section of the dialog box and click Insert to Relations using the right-mouse pop-up menu, as shown in Figure 107.
1010
rI
nt
Figure 106
er
na
lU
se
nl y
create a new parameter, select the button and enter the name, type and value of the parameter. The parameter types are listed in a pull-down menu, as shown in Figure 106.
The parameter is inserted where the cursor was last placed in the Relations section of the dialog box.
Figure 108. Select the parameter and select the button to insert the parameter at the cursor location in the relation.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
As an alternative, you can select the button in Relations dialog box to access the Select Parameter dialog box, as shown in
rI
nt
er
Figure 107
Figure 108
1011
na
lU
se
nl y
Sort Relation
For example: /* Relation to drive the diameter of the hole d2 = d5/2 d5 = d6*1.2
button.
After sorting the relation, it appears as follows: /* Relation to drive the diameter of the hole d5 = d6*1.2 d2 = d5/2
ro
Pr e P
1012
du ct io
With the new sort order, the model regenerates successfully each time.
Step 4: Flex the model
Once you finish adding a relation, test or "flex" the model to make sure the relation captures the desired design intent. You can test the model by editing the driving dimension values to see that the model changes as expected. For the relation that centers the hole on the block, test the relation by modifying the blocks overall dimensions. Verify that the hole remains centered regardless of model size, as shown in Figure 10-8.
Fo
rI
nt
According to this relation, the second line is dependent on the first. When the model is regenerated, an error in the message area states, "Some relations are no longer satisfied in PART for D2." Regenerating the model again temporary corrects the problem. However, the order of the relations needs to be changed to permanently correct it. To change the sort order, you can manually cut and paste the relation lines as required or have the system sort the relations by selecting the
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Sorting relations enables you to change the order of relations as listed in the Relations dialog box. The order in which relations are added to a model is important because it defines the order of regeneration. Checking and considering the order is important to ensure that the relations work in the way that they are intended. For example, models can contain relations that are dependent on values of other relations. You can use the sort order option to ensure that dependent relations follow the correct relations.
Figure 109
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
1013
se
nl y
Pr e P
1014
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 10a Relations
du ct io
Fo
Goal
Pr e P
ro
9 Add relations to the model 9 Add parameters to the model 9 Sort relations
Task 1: Open and modify the part flange.prt. 1. 2. 3. Open flange.prt. Select the Pattern feature in the model tree. Press the right mouse button and click Edit. Double-click on the dimension 5 and enter [3].
rI
nt
er
Figure 1010
na
lU
Mounting holes should be equally space around the flange no matter how many holes there are in the pattern. The outside diameter of the center protrusion should be driven by the a thickness parameter. The position of the mounting holes are always centered on the flat surface of the flange regardless of the flange size. The total diameter of the flange should be twice the outside diameter of the center protrusion.
se
nl y
1015
In this exercise, you will create and sort several relations so that the models conforms to the following design intent:
4.
Regenerate the model. Notice the holes are no longer equally spaced around the flange as shown in Figure 1011.
Figure 1011
Task 2: Add a relation to equally space holes around the flange.
3. 4.
Press the <Enter> key to start a new line.
Pr e P
ro
To select the instance in the model tree you may need to expand the pattern.
1016
du ct io
5.
6.
7.
To determine the dimensions needed for this relation, select the
button in the Relations dialog box. The Relations dialog box is temporarily removed from the display. Select the SECOND instance of patterned holes on the model or in model tree to display the dimensions. The dimension symbols appear for the hole feature. The symbol d14 is the angular dimension that drives the pattern increment. Select dimension d14 on the model to insert the symbol into the relation. The symbol d14 appears in the second line of the relation. Complete the relation by entering [= 360/p0], where p0 represents the number of instances in the pattern. The p0 dimension can be manually typed or you can also use the
Fo
2.
In the Relations window of the dialog box, enter the comment, [/* This relation positions the mounting holes evenly around the flange.]
rI
1.
Click Tool > Relations in the menu bar. The Relations dialog box appears.
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
button and select it on the model. The relation appears as shown in Figure 1012.
8. 9.
Select the button and regenerate the model. Notice the holes are now equally spaced. Edit the number of instances from 3 to [6] to test the relation. The model should appear as shown in Figure 1013.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 1012
Figure 1013
na
lU
1017
se
nl y
Task 3: Add a relation that drives the outside diameter of the center protrusion based on the thickness. 1. Edit the inside diameter of the center hole from 15 to [10]. Notice that the wall thickness of the center protrusion changes. The design intent requires that the wall thickness should remain constant and the outside diameter should change.
4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
Select the
button to create a new parameter.
Maintain Real Number as the default relation type.
9.
ro
Pr e P
1018
du ct io
10. Select the dimension for the outside diameter, d24, on the model. 11. Enter [=]. 12. Select the button again and select on the dimension for the center hole diameter, d8, on the model. 13. Enter [+ 2 *] 14. Select THICKNESS in the Local Parameters section, press the right mouse button and click Insert to Relations on the pop-up menu. The dialog box appears as shown in Figure 1014.
Select the button from the toolbar in the dialog box. Select the base protrusion and the center hole in either the model or the model tree.
Fo
rI
In the Relations window, enter the comment, [/* This relation sets the OD to be driven by the thickness] and press the <Enter> key.
nt
Select in the Value column adjacent to the Thickness parameter and enter [5.0] as the value.
er
na
Enter [THICKNESS] as the parameter name.
lU
se
3.
Expand the Local Parameters section near the bottom of the dialog box.
2.
Click Tools > Relations in the menu bar.
nl y
Fo
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
16. Edit the center hole diameter from 10 to [20] to test the relation. The model should appear as shown in Figure 1015.
15. Select the
rI
nt
button and regenerate the model.
er
Figure 1014
Figure 1015
na
lU
1019
se
nl y
Task 4: Add a relation to position the mounting holes to always remain in the center of the flat surface of the flange. 1. 2. Open the Relations dialog box.
3. 4.
Close the Relations dialog box and regenerate the model.
Fo
ro
Pr e P
1020
du ct io
Task 5: : Add a relation to drive the total diameter to be twice the size of the outer diameter. 1. Add the following relation:
/* This relation sets the total diameter to be twice the size of the center protrusions OD. d2=d24*2 2. Close the relations dialog box and regenerate the model. A warning appears in the message area, "Some relations are no longer satisfied in FLANGE for d12." This warning indicates that the relations should be reordered. Regenerate the model to recalculate the relations. Regenerating the model twice is only a temporary solution the relation order should be changed.
3.
rI
nt
Figure 1016
er
na
lU
Edit the value of the center hole diameter from 20 to [10] and regenerate the model. Notice the position of the mounting holes remain in the center as shown in Figure 1016.
se
/* This relation centers the mounting holes radially on the flange d12 = (d2+d24)/2
nl y
Enter the following relation:
4.
Open the Relations dialog box. As the relations are regenerated, d12 is calculated using d2 and d24. The last relation that is calculated changes the value of d2. Therefore, d12 becomes outdated because is was calculated with the old value of d2. Select the relations. Select the button to automatically change the order of the
5.
6. 7. 8. 9.
button in the Sort Relations dialog box.
Close the Relations dialog box.
du ct io
Fo
10. Save the model and erase it from memory.
Pr e P
ro
rI
nt
er
Figure 1017
na
Edit the value again from 15 to [20]. The model should appear as shown in Figure 1017. Do all relations appear to be working?
lU
Edit the value of the center hole diameter from 10 to [15] and regenerate the model.
se
nl y
1021
Pr e P
1022
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Review Questions
Question 1
a. b. Question 2
True False
Which of the following statements are true regarding Relations? a. b. c. d. Dimensions and Parameters can be used within a relation to drive a value. Equations can be manually entered in the Relations dialog box.
Question 3
Which of the following buttons enables you to select dimensions directly from the model when creating a relation? a. b. c.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
d.
Question 4
Which of the following is the correct syntax that must be used to precede a comment statement to a relation? a. b. c. d. */ ! /* #
Fo
rI
Pro/ENGINEER enables you to create both equality and conditional relations.
nt
er
Equations can be created using a combination of manual entry and selecting dimensions directly from the model.
na
lU
se
O
1023
nl y
To add a relation to a model you can use the Relations dialog box. To access this dialog box, click Edit > Relations.
Question 5
Which of the following relations centers the hole only if the length and width are equivalent?
a.
/*relation to center the hole if the length and width are equivalent d4 = d1 / 2 d3 = d2 / 2
b.
/*relation to center the hole if the length and width are equivalent
ro
Pr e P
1024
du ct io
c.
d.
/*relation to center the hole if the length and width are equivalent d1 = d2 d4 = d1 / 2 d3 = d2 / 2
/*relation to center the hole if the length and width are equivalent if d1 = d2 d4 = d1 / 2 d3 = d2 / 2 endif
d1 = d4 / 2 d2 = d3 / 2
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Question 6
Which of the following statements are true regarding the following relation? /*Relation to control the thickness of the model. THICKNESS = (d2 +d15)/2 a. b. c. d. The relation is a conditional. The relation has a comment associated with it. A parameter is being driven in this relation. d2 and d15 are driven dimensions.
Question 7
d. Question 8
du ct io
b.
Question 9
Which of the following are valid operators that can be used in a relation? a. b. c. d. ^ ! () #
Pr e P
ro
a.
True False
Relations can be added to the model by entering an equation in the message window when modifying a driven dimension.
Fo
rI
c.
nt
b.
er
a.
na
Which of the following buttons enables you to select a function from a pre-defined list?
lU
se
1025
nl y
Question 10
Which description best describes how the following relation will affect the model? d0 = 3 * d6 d3 = d4
b.
c.
Pr e P
1026
ro
du ct io
The depth of the base protrusion will be equal to three times the diameter of the hole and the values for the horizontal and vertical hole dimensions will be equivalent. The depth of the base protrusion will be equal to three times the diameter of the hole and the values for the horizontal and vertical hole dimensions will be equivalent. In addition d1 and d2 will be equivalent.
d.
The depth of the base protrusion will be equal to three times the diameter of the hole and the hole will be centered on the base protrusion.
Fo
rI
a.
The depth of the base protrusion will be equal to the diameter of the hole and the hole will be centered on the base protrusion.
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Objective
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
9 Patterning 9 Mirroring Part Geometry 9 Mirroring Parts
Fo
rI
Duplication Tools
nt
er
Chapter 11
na
lU
111
se
nl y
112
lU
se
nl y
11.1 Dimension Patterns

Patterns are used as a method of quickly and easily recreating multiple instances of a feature. The initial feature in a pattern is called the pattern leader. In Figure 111 the pattern leader is a rectangular cut and the pattern is created from the pattern leader by referencing its dimensions. Dimension patterns are the most basic pattern type.
du ct io
Fo
Patterned features can vary in size, as shown in Figure 112.
rI
ro
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create a dimension pattern: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Start the creation of the pattern. Select the type of pattern to create. Specify the dimensions in one or two directions. Specify the number of pattern members. Modify the pattern, as necessary.
Pr e P
nt
er
Figure 111
Figure 112
na
lU
113
This cut is the pattern leader
pattern
se
nl y
Step 1: Start the creation of the pattern

You can also click Edit > Pattern or press the right-mouse button and click Pattern in the pop-up menu to access the Pattern dashboard. To start the creation of a pattern, select the feature that will be patterned either in the model tree or directly from the model. Then select the button on the toolbar to access the Pattern dashboard, as shown in Figure 113.
Figure 113
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Identical
The Identical pattern type is the most restrictive but also has the fastest regeneration time. An example of an identical pattern is shown in Figure 114.
Fo
Identical Variable General
Identical patterns have the following restrictions:
114
rI
nt
The following three types of patterns are available for creating dimension patterns:
Figure 114
er
Step 2: Select the type of pattern to create
na
lU
se
nl y
Features cannot vary in size. Features cannot lie on different surfaces. Features cannot break edges of the part. Features cannot intersect with each other.
Variable
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
General
The most complex patterns can be created using the General pattern type but it also requires the most regeneration time. An example of a General pattern in shown in Figure 116.
Features can vary in size. Features can lie on different surfaces. Features can break the edge of the part. Features cannot intersect with each other.
Fo
Variable patterns have the following capabilities/restrictions:
rI
nt
er
Figure 115
Figure 116
na
lU
115
se
Variable patterns are less restrictive than identical patterns, but they still have some restrictions. Their regeneration times are moderate. An example of a Variable pattern is shown in Figure 115.
nl y
General patterns have the following capabilities: By default, the pattern type is set to General. Features can vary in size. Features can lie on different surfaces. Features can break the edge of the part. Features can interfere with each other.
Fo
rI
nt
For example, if the pattern shown in Figure 117 had been created as Identical, it would abort without explanation. The reason for this is that one of the patterned instances intersects two different surfaces. By creating the pattern in Figure 117 as General, the pattern would have been created, the error would have been detected visually, and modifications could be made. Once the pattern is modified to fit the rules for an identical pattern, it can be redefined from General to Identical to save regeneration time.
ro
du ct io
Figure 117
Pr e P
116
er
na
Pattern lying on two surfaces cannot be an Identical pattern
lU
se
To minimize regeneration time, select the pattern type that best fits the design. It may be helpful to initially create all patterns as General. By taking this approach, any errors that may have occurred during patterning are visible. The pattern type can be redefined later.
nl y
By default, General is set as the pattern type. To change the pattern type, select the button in the dashboard to access the Options slide-up panel as shown in Figure 118.
Dimensions are used to drive patterns in a model, as shown in Figure 119.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
Step 3: Specify the dimensions in one or two directions
nt
er
Figure 118
Figure 119
na
lU
117
se
nl y
Original Feature
Original Feature
Uni-directional
na
Figure 1110
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Selecting d40 would have caused the pattern to be driven vertically.
Fo
118
rI
nt
First Direction
Once the pattern has been accepted the dashboard prompts you to select a dimension for the first direction. This dimension that is selected can be in either the X, Y, or Z direction, or be an angular dimension. The selected dimension drives the direction for the pattern. In Figure 1111, selecting the dimension d41 drives the pattern horizontally.
Figure 1111
er
lU
Bi-directional
se
nl y
When creating a pattern, you are prompted to select the pattern dimension in the first direction and specify an increment between instances. It is also possible to select a pattern dimension and specify an increment for the second direction. The uni-directional pattern on the left-hand side of Figure 1110 shows a pattern created in the first direction only. The right-hand graphic shows a bi-directional pattern created in the first and second directions.
Fo
Pr e P
ro
Second Direction
du ct io
You can select multiple dimensions to drive the first direction of the pattern. To select multiple dimensions, press and hold the <Ctrl> key and select another dimension to vary.
To specify a dimension in the second direction to drive the pattern, right-click on the model and click Direction 2 Dimensions. The system prompts you to select dimensions to vary in the second direction. As an alternative you can also select the Direction 2 field in the Dimensions slide-up panel as shown in Figure 1112. Similar to the first direction, you can select multiple dimension using the <Ctrl> key.
rI
nt
er
Figure 1112
na
lU
119
se
nl y
Once the first pattern dimension is specified, you must specify a dimension increment. The increment is measured from the feature, not its placement reference (i.e., where d41 meets the protrusion). The dimension increment can be entered in the value field that opens on the model or you can use the Dimensions slide-up panel as shown in Figure 1112.
Step 4: Specify the number of pattern members

Once the first and any second direction dimensions and their increments are defined you must enter the number of members in the pattern. This indicates the number of times the pattern is duplicated in both the first and second direction. The number of pattern members are defined in the dashboard, as shown in Figure 1113. The number of instances must include the original pattern leader feature. If the second direction is not defined it is unselectable.
Step 5: Modify the pattern as necessary
Pr e P
1110
ro
du ct io
Edit
To modify pattern dimensions, select one of the pattern members in the model or in the model tree and click Edit in the right-mouse pop-up menu. Any of the pattern dimensions can be modified, including the number of instances in the pattern (p0) as shown in Figure 1114.
Once the pattern has been created you can perform any of the following operations on it: Edit Edit Definition Delete Pattern
Fo
rI
Select the
button to complete the pattern.
nt
er
Figure 1113
na
The number of instances in the first and second direction can be specified here.
lU
se
nl y
The increment value may be modified.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Delete Pattern
To delete the pattern, click Edit > Feature Operations > Delete Pattern and select the pattern leader. All instances of the pattern are deleted but the pattern leader still remains. Using the Delete option to delete a pattern removes all of the pattern features including the pattern leader.
Fo
Edit Definition
To access the original dashboard that was used to create the pattern, select one of the pattern members in the model or in the model tree and click Edit Definition from the right-mouse pop-up menu. You can make changes to the pattern using any of the dashboard options.
rI
nt
er
Figure 1114
na
lU
1111
se
nl y
11.2 Mirroring Part Geometry
General Steps
Use the following general steps to mirror features: 1. 2. 3. 4. Start the mirroring process. Specify the features to mirror.
Select the plane about which to mirror the features. Modify the mirrored feature.
ro
du ct io
Fo
To begin mirroring features, click Edit > Feature Operations from the main menu. The FEAT menu appears to the right of the Pro/ENGINEER window, as shown in Figure 1115.
Pr e P
Click Copy > Mirror to start mirroring features. This expands the FEAT menu and opens the COPY FEATURE menu.
1112
rI
nt
Step 1: Start the mirroring process
Figure 1115
er
na
lU
se
nl y
In Pro/ENGINEER you can mirror selected features or all the features that exist in the model about a specified plane. This option is useful when designing symmetric parts.
Step 2: Specify the options for mirroring

To mirror features you must first select the mirroring options from the COPY FEATURE menu. The COPY FEATURE menu is divided into sections, as shown in Figure 1116.
Features to Copy
Fo
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
The second section defines how to select features. For mirroring only the Select and All Feat options are available. These options enable you to select individual or all features in the model for mirroring. The last section in the COPY FEATURE menu defines the relationship that you want to establish between the mirrored feature and the original feature. The Independent option enables you to maintain two independent features. When a change is made to the original feature it is not reflected in the mirrored feature. The Dependent option maintains the relationship and any changes made to the original reflects in the mirrored feature. Once you have selected an option from each section, click Done to continue.
The first section in the COPY FEATURE menu indicates the copy technique that will be used. Based on the copy technique selected, the remaining options in the menu update to display only those that can be used.
rI
nt
er
Relationship with duplicated feature
Figure 1116
na
lU
Duplication Technique
se
1113
nl y
Step 3: Specify the features to mirror

Specifying the features to mirror depends on the option that you selected on the COPY FEATURE menu.
Select
Pr e P
1114
ro
du ct io
Step 5: Modify the mirrored feature
The mirrored feature can be edited by selecting it in the model or model tree and pressing the right-mouse button to access the pop-up menu. You can edit the values associated with the mirrored features, as well as delete the group or ungroup it. The Ungroup option converts the grouped features into individual features in the model. Ungrouping does not remove any dependent relationships.
Click Quit Plane in the SETUP PLANE menu to cancel the mirror operation.
Once all features have been selected you must select the plane about which to mirror. The mirroring plane can be either a planar surface or a datum plane. Once the plane is selected the feature or features are immediately mirrored and the feature is automatically completed.
Fo
Step 4: Select the plane about which to mirror the features
rI
nt
er
na
All Feat
The All Feat option automatically selects the entire model and all its features. This option combines all features into one feature, known as a merge feature. You cannot view individual features of a merge feature.
lU
The Select option enables you to select individual features on the model for mirroring. To select multiple features, press and hold the <Ctrl> key as you are selecting the features on the model or in the model tree. Once you have selected the features, click Done in the SELECT FEAT menu. This option combines selected features into a group. If you select the group in the model tree, it expands to show the individual features that make up the group.
se
nl y
11.3 Mirroring Parts
Fo
A dimensional modification made to the original geometry updates the mirrored geometry.
du ct io
General Steps
Use the following general steps to mirror an entire part: 1. 2. 3. Start the mirroring process. Select the plane to mirror the model about. Modify the mirrored part.
Pr e P
ro
rI
nt
er
Figure 1117
na
lU
The geometry is mirrored about this plane.
se
1115
The geometry is mirrored about this plane.
nl y
The entire part can be mirrored about a specified plane. This is useful when designing symmetric parts. The model in Figure 1117 was created by designing one quarter of the model and mirroring it twice.
Step 1: Start the mirroring process

To begin mirroring an entire part, select it in the model tree as shown in Figure 1118.
du ct io
Fo
To mirror the model, select the button on the toolbar. The Mirror dashboard appears as shown in Figure 1119. As an alternative, you can click Edit > Mirror to open the Mirror dashboard.
Pr e P
ro
Step 2: Select the plane to mirror the model about
To mirror the model, select the plane you wish to mirror about. The mirroring plane can be a planar surface or a datum plane. Select the button to complete the mirroring operation. Once the model is mirrored it appears in the model tree as a mirror feature, as shown in Figure 1120.
1116
rI
nt
Figure 1118
Figure 1119
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Figure 1120
Step 3: Modify the mirrored part
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
You can delete, rename, or edit the definition of the mirror feature. To access these actions, select the mirror feature in the model tree or in the model and press the right-mouse button to open the pop-up menu.
rI
nt
er
na
lU
1117
This model has been mirrored twice to obtain the required geometry.
se
Mirroring the entire model in this way differs from the Copy > Mirror feature in that you are unable to determine if the resulting geometry is independent or dependent. When mirroring the entire model, the geometry is always dependent.
nl y
Pr e P
1118
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 11a Patterning

Goal
du ct io
Fo
ro
Pr e P
9 9 9 9
Create a pattern Modify a pattern Redefine a pattern Delete a pattern
rI
nt
er
Figure 1121
Figure 1122
na
lU
1119
se
nl y
In this exercise you are going to pattern the protrusion and cuts shown in Figure 1121 and Figure 1122. Patterning enables you to quickly duplicate features in a model.
Task 1: Open the part called heat_sink.prt. 1. Open heat_sink.prt. The model appears as shown in Figure 1123.
Figure 1123 Task 2: Pattern the protrusion. You can also click Pattern in the right-mouse pop-up menu to start the pattern. 1.
ro
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
2.
Select the button to access the Options slide-up panel. Notice that by default the pattern is already set to General. Select the button again to close the slide-up panel.
3.
1120
rI
nt
Select the protrusion shown in Figure 1124 and select the button to open the Pattern dashboard.
Select this protrusion to pattern.
Figure 1124
er
na
lU
se
nl y
4. 5.
Select the .03 dimension as the first direction for the pattern. Enter [1.1] as the dimension increment in the value field, as shown in Figure 1125.
6. 7.
Press the <Enter> key.
du ct io
Enter [9] as the number of instances here. Figure 1126 Select the button to complete the pattern. The model appears as shown in Figure 1127.
8.
Pr e P
ro
Fo
Enter [9] in the dashboard as the number of pattern members in the first direction, as shown in Figure 1126.
rI
nt
er
Figure 1125
na
lU
1121
se
nl y
Figure 1127
3.
Select the
Fo
du ct io
5.
4.
Select the button to set the pattern to Identical. Changing the pattern to Identical helps reduce regeneration time. Select the Select the button to close the Options slide-up panel. button to complete redefining the pattern.
Pr e P
It is good practice to first create a pattern using the General pattern type and then redefine it once the pattern has been successfully created. This helps you trouble shooting to resolve pattern creation problems.
6.
ro
7.
1122
rI
2.
Press the right-mouse button and click Edit Definition in the right-mouse pop-up menu. The Pattern dashboard appears. button to open the Options slide-up panel.
nt
1.
Select the pattern in the model tree.
er
Task 3: Redefine the pattern to Identical to improve regeneration time.
na
lU
se
nl y
Task 4: Open the part called humidifier.prt. 1. Open humidifier_cover.prt. The model appears as shown in Figure 1128.
1.
Select the cut shown in Figure 1129 and select the The Pattern dashboard appears.
Fo
rI
Task 5: Start the creation of a Variable pattern.
nt
er
Figure 1128
na
button.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Select this cut to be patterned.
Figure 1129
lU
1123
se
nl y
2.
Select the
button to open the Options slide-up panel.
3. 4.
button to set the pattern to Variable. button to close the Options slide-up panel.
Task 6: Pattern the part in two directions. 1. 2.
Select the 2.00 dimension as the first direction for the pattern.
rI
nt
er
du ct io
Fo
Figure 1130
ro
3. 4. 5. 6.
Pr e P
With your cursor on the model, press and hold the right-mouse button and click Direction 2 Dimensions. Select the 3.00 dimension as the second direction for the pattern. Enter [6] as the dimension increment in the value field as shown in Figure 1131.
1124
na
Select the dimension 2.00 as the first direction of the pattern.
lU
Enter [-15] as the dimension increment in the value field as shown in Figure 1130.
se
nl y
7. 8.
du ct io
Fo
Press and hold the <Ctrl> key and select the 3.00 dimension shown in Figure 1132 as the second dimension for the second direction of the pattern. This dimension will become a variable dimension that changes with each instance of the pattern.
rI
nt
er
Figure 1131
na
Select the 3.00 dimension to be a variable dimension.
Pr e P
ro
Figure 1132
lU
1125
se
Select the 3.00 dimension as the second direction of the pattern.
nl y
9.
Enter [-0.5] as the value to vary the height of the cut.
10. Press the <Enter> key. Task 7: Specify the number of instances in each direction. 1. Enter [2] in the dashboard as the value for the number of instances in the first direction, as shown in Figure 1133.
Enter[2] as the number of instances in the first direction.
2.
Fo
Enter [6] as the number of instances in the second direction. Figure 1134
3.
Pr e P
1126
ro
du ct io
Select the button to complete the pattern. The model appears as shown in Figure 1135.
rI
nt
er
Enter [6] in the dashboard as the value for the number of instances in the second direction, as shown in Figure 1134.
na
Figure 1133
lU
se
nl y
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
4.
nt
er
Figure 1135
na
lU
1127
se
nl y
Pr e P
1128
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 11b Mirror / Pattern

Goal
Figure 1136
Fo
ro
du ct io
9 Mirror a part 9 Create a radial pattern

Task 1: Open the part called stand.prt. 1. Open stand.prt.
Pr e P
Task 2: Mirror the geometry. 1. 2. Select STAND.PRT from the top of the model tree. Select the button to open the Mirror dashboard.
rI
nt
er
Figure 1137
na
lU
1129
se
nl y
In this exercise, you will begin by opening the model shown in Figure 1136. This model will be mirrored using existing planar surfaces in the model to achieve the final model shown in Figure 1137.
3.
Select the surface indicated in Figure 1138 to mirror the model about.
Figure 1138
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
1130
rI
5.
Complete the part by creating another mirror feature in the model, as shown in Figure 1139.
nt
Figure 1139
er
4.
The mirrored part previews on the screen. Select the button to complete the feature. Notice the new mirror feature is now available in the model tree.
na
lU
Select this surface for the first Mirror Geom operation.
se
nl y
Task 3: Create a radial hole. 1. Create the hole shown in Figure 1140 using the radial hole option.
Task 4: Create a radial pattern. 1. Pattern the radial hole as shown in Figure 1141. Use the angular dimension of the hole to drive the radial pattern. The pattern should consist of four instances spaced 90 apart.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 1140
na
lU
1131
se
nl y
Figure 1141 Task 5: Modify the part. 1. 2. 3.
Modify the hole shown in Figure 1141. Select the diameter dimension and enter [70]. Regenerate the model. All of the holes update as shown in Figure 1142 because of the dependency to the original section.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
4.
1132

rI
nt
Figure 1142
er
na
lU
se
Select this hole to be modified.
nl y
Exercise 11c Copy/Mirror

Goal
In this exercise you will begin by opening the model shown in Figure 1143. You are going to use the Copy and Mirror options to duplicate features in the model. In addition, you will have to consider using the Independent and Dependent options for mirroring to ensure that you can modify the geometry so that it appears as shown in Figure 1144.
du ct io
Fo
ro
9 Use Copy/Mirror to duplicate features in a model

Task 1: Open the part called copy_mirror.prt. 1. Open copy_mirror.prt.
Pr e P
Task 2: Mirror the protrusion. 2. Click Edit > Feature Operations > Copy to access the COPY FEATURE menu.
1133
rI
nt
er
Figure 1143
Figure 1144
na
lU
se
nl y
3.
Click Mirror > Select > Dependent > Done from the COPY FEATURE menu to define each of the sections required to duplicate a feature. Press and hold the <Ctrl> and select the protrusion and the hole indicated in Figure 1145 as the features to copy.
4.
Figure 1145 5. 6. Click Done once you have selected both features. Select datum plane FRONT as the reference about which to mirror. The part updates as shown in Figure 1146.
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
ro
Task 3: Mirror the protrusions. 1. 2. Click Copy from the FEAT menu. Click Mirror > Select > Independent > Done from the COPY FEATURE menu.
1134
rI
nt
Figure 1146
er
na
lU
se
Select this hole and protrusion to mirror.
nl y
3.
Press and hold the <Ctrl> key and select the original protrusion and hole and the copied feature indicated in Figure 1147 as the features to copy.
Figure 1147
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
ro
6.
Select the button and click Top to see that the model now has four bosses, as shown in Figure 1149.
rI
nt
5.
Select the RIGHT datum plane as the reference to mirror about. The part updates as shown in Figure 1148.
er
4.
Click Done once you have selected the features.
Figure 1148
na
lU
Select the hole, protrusion and copied feature to mirror.
se
nl y
1135
Figure 1149 7. Select the orientation.
button and click Default to return to the default
rI
nt
1.
Modify the height dimension shown in Figure 1150. Modify the height dimension.
du ct io
Fo
Figure 1150
2. 3.
Enter [2] as the new height dimension.
ro
Pr e P
Regenerate the model. The protrusions on the left-hand side are created using the independent copy option; therefore, only the right-hand bosses update when the model regenerates, as shown in Figure 1151.
1136
er
Task 4: Modify the part.
na
lU
se
nl y
Figure 1151 4.
Modify the height dimension shown in Figure 1152.
Modify the height dimension.
Fo
du ct io
6.
Pr e P
ro
5.
Enter [5] as the new height dimension.
Regenerate the model. The model updates as shown in Figure 1153.
7.
rI
nt
er
Figure 1152
Figure 1153
na
lU
se
1137
The two protrusions on the right side of the model are now higher than the features used in the dependent mirror/copy. What would be the result if one of the protrusions on the left side of the model were modified?
nl y
Pr e P
1138
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Review Questions
Question 1
a. b. c. Question 2
Identical Variable General
For which type(s) of dimension pattern can pattern instances intersect each other? a. b. c. Identical Variable General
Question 3
du ct io
Fo
For the pattern shown below, which dimension of the pattern leader was selected to drive the direction of the pattern?
rI
nt
Pr e P
ro
a. b. c. d. e.
d38 d39 d40 d41 d42

1139
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Which type(s) of dimension pattern requires the shortest regeneration time?
Question 4
The model shown below has a pattern of extruded holes created in one direction. What was the number of pattern instances defined in the dashboard?
b. c. d. Question 5
2 3 4
b. c. d. e.
datum axis
Question 6
ro
Pr e P
1140
du ct io
A part contains five features. If you mirror the entire part using the Edit > Mirror option, how many features will be listed in the model tree? a. b. c. d. 1 5 6 10
datum point
datum coordinate system
datum curve
Fo
a.
datum plane
rI
Which datum feature(s) can be used as a reference for copying a feature by mirroring?
nt
er
na
lU
a.
se
nl y
Question 7
Which of the following options would you select from the COPY FEATURE menu to duplicate an individual feature by mirroring about a selected surface such that changes made to the source feature update in the duplicated feature?
b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Question 8
Same Refs Mirror Move Select All Feat Independent Dependent
a. b. Question 9
True
du ct io
Which of the following occurs if you select the pattern leader and click Edit > Delete. a. The pattern leader is deleted and the second instance becomes the pattern leader. The system prompts you to enter the instances to be deleted. The pattern leader is deleted and all the instances are also removed from the model. All of the instances are deleted from the model; however, the pattern leader remains in the model.
b. c.
Pr e P
ro
d.
False
Fo
rI
Mirroring the entire model using the Edit > Mirror differs from the Copy > Mirror feature in that you are unable to determine if the resulting geometry is independent or dependent. When mirroring the entire model, the geometry is always dependent.
nt
er
na
lU
1141
se
nl y
a.
New Refs
Question 10
Which of the following buttons enables you to mirror the entire model geometry? a. b. c. d.
Pr e P
1142
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
Customizing Pro/Engineer enables you to change the systems default appearance and options to meet specific needs or preferences. Customizing enables you to create and follow a more efficient workflow. Customization settings can be set to affect the entire company or can be user-specific. There are many things that can be configured within Pro/ENGINEER. This chapter will cover many of your basic customization requirements.
9Customizing the Config.pro 9Creating a Mapkey 9Customizing the Interface 9Configuring the Model Tree 9Customizing the System Colors
Fo
rI
Customizing Pro/ENGINEER
nt
er
Chapter 12
na
lU
121
se
nl y
122
lU
se
nl y
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
123
se
nl y
12.1Customizing the config.pro

The main configuration file that is used in Pro/ENGINEER is called the config.pro. It is used to customize the system to meet your preferences and requirements. There are a significant number of options that can be customized in the config.pro. The most frequently customized settings include display settings, model decimal places, model standards, and file storage and retrieval standards. By customizing options in the config.pro you can save modeling time and help ensure modeling standards, all of which will help you become a more efficient user.
1. 2. 3. 4.
Open the config.pro configuration file. Set the options and values. Implement the changes.
Restart the Pro/Engineer session, as necessary.
Pr e P
124
ro
du ct io
The config.pro file can be accessed by clicking Tools > Options. The Options dialog box appears as shown in Figure 121, enabling you to set your preferences within the config.pro file.
Step 1: Open the config.pro configuration file
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
General Steps
Use the following general steps to customize the config.pro:
lU
se
nl y
The dialog box consists of two frames: By default, only the options that exist in the current file are displayed in the Options dialog box. To display all of the options, clear the Show only options loaded from file option. Consider using the Sort options to group the options when reviewing them. Left-hand frame contains all of the options. Right-hand frame contains the value, status and description for each option.
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
When Pro/ENGINEER is launched, the system automatically looks for a config.pro file in one of the following three locations:
If an option is listed in more than one configuration file in any of these directories, the latest value loaded is the one used by the system. Therefore it is important to know the config.pro that is being displayed in the Options dialog box. The Showing section of the dialog box displays the path to the current config.pro file.
User's home directory The /loadpoint/text directory of Pro/ENGINEER Startup directory of Pro/ENGINEER
nt
er
Figure 121
na
lU
125
se
nl y
Step 2: Set the options and values

Changes are made to the config.pro file by adding options or by changing the value for the options that are currently set. An option can be added by entering its name in the Option section of the dialog box. The appropriate value for the option can be set using the Value section. Depending on the option, you are able to select the entry for the value or you may be required to enter a value. Figure 122 shows a value being selected from a predefined list of model display settings (i.e., wireframe, hiddenvis, hiddeninvis or shaded). To add the option to the configuration file, select the Some options in the Environment Dialog box (Tools > Environment) apply similar settings to those used n the config.pro; however, they are set only for the current session (e.g., display settings, spin center display.). button.
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
ro
If an option has already been added and only the value is to be changed, select the option from the list, change the value and select the button.
126
rI
nt
Figure 122
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Searching for Configuration Options
If the name of the option is unknown, you can search for it using the button. The Find Option dialog box appears as shown in Figure 123.
Fo
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
button. The system searches all of the option names and descriptions (if enabled) and returns a list of the results. Select the required option in the Choose option section, set the value and select the button to add it to the config.pro. To narrow your search results, consider selecting a category from the Look in pull-down menu.
To search for an option name, enter the keyword and select the
nt
er
Figure 123
na
lU
127
se
nl y
Step 3: Implement the changes

The button at the top of the Options dialog box enables you to save the config.pro and/or store it in a new directory. The button enables you to open a config.pro that was not originally loaded by the system. When all the required options and values are set, the config.pro file should be applied to the current Pro/ENGINEER session. To apply the option(s), select the button. The status symbol changes from a to a . The changes are applied to the current session and the config.pro file is automatically saved to the location that Pro/ENGINEER was loaded. To close the Options dialog box, select the button, which applies the changes. Selecting the button instead ignores all changes and closes the dialog box. For example, Pro/ENGINEER is started from /USER/PEOPLE/TRAINING, and the config.pro in the TRAINING directory is used. If the working directory for Pro/ENGINEER is changed to /USER/PEOPLE, the config.pro in the PEOPLE directory must be manually loaded; otherwise, the config.pro in the TRAINING directory still applies.
Step 4: Restart the Pro/ENGINEER session

In most cases, changes to the configuration file are immediately applied to the current session. However, options that affect the graphical display of Pro/ENGINEER require you to restart Pro/ENGINEER in order to be implemented, as shown in Figure 128. It is a recommended to restart the session as soon as it is convenient to ensure that all options are being used.
Pr e P
128
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
rI
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
nt
er
Figure 124
na
lU
129
se
Indicates that Pro/ENGINEER must be restarted to apply option
nl y
Indicates an option that has been immediately applied
12.2 Creating Mapkeys
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create mapkeys: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the mapkey dialog box.
Record the macro steps. Save the mapkey.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
To access the Mapkey dialog box, click Tools > Mapkey. The Mapkeys dialog box appears as shown in Figure 125. It enables you to create, modify, delete and save mapkeys.
1210
rI
nt
Step 1: Open the mapkey dialog box
Figure 125
er
na
lU
Specify the key sequence, name and description.
se
nl y
A mapkey is a keyboard macro that executes a series of menu selections. For operations that are regularly used, a mapkey is useful instead of going through multiple menu selections.
Step 2: Specify the key sequence, name and description

To create a new mapkey, select the button. The Record Mapkey dialog box appears as shown in Figure 126. The first entry in the dialog box is the key sequence. The key sequence activates the macro. It can be a sequence of numbers, letters or it can use a function key. To use a function key type a $F#, where the # is the desired function key number. The name and description is not required to successfully create the mapkey but it is useful to name the mapkey if it is going to be added as a toolbar option. Naming the mapkey also lets you know its functionality at a later date. In Figure 126, a mapkey is being defined that advances you to sketching an extruded feature by selecting the <F4> function key.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 126
na
lU
se
nl y
1211
Step 3: Record the macro steps

When recording a mapkey, it is recommended to select only the required options to create as efficient a mapkey as possible. Once the key sequence, name and description are defined, you can begin recording the mapkey. To start recording, select the button and select the required menu options. Additional options enable you to pause the recording and customize how the mapkey handles keyboard entry and operating system commands. Then, select the
button to stop the recording. You can resume the
mapkey creation once stopped by selecting the
Mapkey dialog box and select the
Fo
The Mapkey dialog box also enables you to modify, run or delete existing mapkeys.
A mapkey initially only applies to the current session; however, when saved it is stored to the config.pro and can be used when the config.pro is loaded. To save any individual mapkey, select it from the
rI
nt
Step 4: Save the mapkey
er
Pr e P
1212
ro
du ct io
mapkeys or all changed mapkeys, select the or buttons respectively. When saving you will be prompted to select the configuration file to which you would like to save the mapkeys.
na
extruded protrusion, click Insert > Extrude and select the
lU
you have completed the mapkey, select the button. For example, to create a mapkey that advances you to sketching an button.
button. To save all of the
se
button. Once
nl y
12.3Customizing the Interface

There are several options for customizing the Pro/ENGINEER interface, including toolbar buttons, menus and window display. The buttons on the toolbar provide shortcuts for accessing commonly-used commands. These commands can be added or removed to customize the toolbar area. You can also place user-defined buttons representing mapkeys.
1. 2. 3.
Open the Customize dialog box. Make the desired changes. Save the changes.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
To customize the Pro/ENGINEER interface, click Tools > Customize Screen. The Customize dialog box appears as shown in Figure 127. This dialog box enables you to customize toolbars, commands, navigation options, browser settings and other interface options.
Fo
rI
Step 1: Open the customize dialog box
nt
er
Figure 127
na
lU
1213
General Steps
Use the following general steps to customize the screen:
se
nl y
Step 2: Make the desired changes

The Customize dialog box is divided into the following tabs for customization: Toolbars Commands Navigation Tabs Browser Options
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
Commands
1214
The Commands tab, shown in Figure 129, enables you to customize the commands (options) in the toolbars by adding system-defined or
rI
Toolbars can be placed in the top, left- or right-hand side of the Pro/ENGINEER main window, as shown in Figure 128.
nt
Figure 128
er
na
The Toolbars tab, as shown in Figure 128, enables you to select which toolbar categories are displayed in the Pro/ENGINEER window. Select the checkboxes adjacent to each toolbar that is to be displayed and select an option from the pull-down menu to define its location. The options that are displayed depend on the current working mode.
lU
Toolbars
se
nl y
user-defined buttons. This tab also enables you to add new options to the menu bar.
Fo
rI
du ct io
All commands are sub-divided into categories based on their function. Once each category is selected, the available buttons appear in the Commands section of the dialog box. Many of these buttons are already located in the toolbar by default. To add any additional commands to the menu bar or the toolbar use the following steps: 1. 2. 3.
Pr e P
You cannot place icons on the fly. You must place them in the same areas as the other icons.
ro
Select the category to locate the command. Press and hold the left mouse button over the desired icon. Drag the icon to the desired location until you see the vertical or horizontal sash and release the left mouse button to place it.
nt
er
Figure 129
na
lU
1215
se
nl y
Figure 1211 shows a command being added to the toolbar.
To place a command in the menu bar, drag it and drop it once the horizontal sash is visible
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
New menu command
Fo
1216
rI
nt
Figure 1211 shows a command being added to the menu bar.
Figure 1211
er
Figure 1210
na
lU
se
New toolbar command
To place a command on the toolbar, drag it and drop it once the vertical sash is visible
nl y
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
Once a mapkey is created, it appears as a button in the Mapkeys category. The default icon image for all mapkeys are identical and can be customized to better identify their intent. As with all other buttons, mapkeys can also be added to the toolbar using the drag and drop method. To customize a mapkey image, use the options in the Modify Selection pull-down menu, as shown in Figure 1212.
er
Figure 1212
na
lU
Mapkeys Category
se
1217
Mapkeys New Menu
The following categories involve additional instruction to customize the menu bar and toolbar:
nl y
When placing commands in the toolbar or in the menu bar, you can specify whether to display the icon, its text, or both using the options on the right mouse pop-up menu. To delete a toolbar button or a menu bar option, select the item, press the right mouse button, and click Delete in the pop-up menu. Dragging the button out of the toolbar or menu also removes it.
New Menu Category

The New Menu category shown in Figure 1213 enables you to add new pull-down menus to the menu bar and new fly-out menus to the toolbars.
To add a new pull-down menu, use the following steps: 1. 2. Select the New Menu category in the Customize dialog box.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Select the option in the Commands section and drag the option to the menu bar. Once the vertical sash is visible as shown in Figure 1214, release the left mouse button to place the new menu.
To add a new menu bar item, drag it and drop it once the vertical sash is visible.
Fo
1218
rI
nt
Figure 1213
Figure 1214
er
na
lU
se
nl y
3.
To rename the menu once it has been added to the menu bar, select the menu, press the right mouse and click Rename. Enter a new name in the Rename dialog box. To populate the new menu with commands, use the procedure discussed earlier for placing additional commands on the menu bar.
4.
1. 2.
Select the New Menu category in the Customize dialog box. Select the option in the Commands section and drag the option to the toolbar. Once the sash is visible, release the left mouse button to place the fly-out icon. The fly-out appears as shown in Figure 1215.
3.
du ct io
Fo
To populate the new fly-out with commands, drag and drop the command into the fly-out as shown in Figure 1216
Pr e P
ro
rI
nt
er
Figure 1215
Figure 1216
na
lU
se
To add a new fly-out command to the toolbar, use the following steps:
nl y
1219
Navigation
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
1220
ro
rI
nt
Figure 1217
er
na
lU
se
The Navigation Tabs tab shown in Figure 1217 enables you to configure the navigation window. The Placement pull-down menu enables you place the window on the left- or right hand-side of the graphics area. Its width can be set as a percentage of the overall window or by dragging the slider. The model tree settings section enables you to customize the model tree display so that it is part of the navigation window or is separate. The default setting for the model tree is to be a part of the navigation window. If separate, the model tree can be placed above or below the graphics area and its height can be set.
nl y
Browser
The Browser tab shown in Figure 1218 enables you to customize the size and settings for the web browser. To set the size, drag the slider to the left or right.
Fo
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
rI
nt
er
Figure 1218
na
lU
1221
se
nl y
Option
The Options tab enables you to specify your preferences for the message window, secondary windows, and menu icons. The Options tab is shown in Figure 1219.
Fo
Pr e P
ro
Consider the three storage locations when saving the config.win file: /loadpoint/text directory, home directory and startup directory.
du ct io
Step 3: Save the changes
The screen customization settings are saved in a configuration file called the config.win. The Automatically save to option at the bottom of the dialog box controls where this file is saved. Pro/ENGINEER reads the configuration file from the same locations as the config.pro. To save the configuration file use the following steps: 1. Click File > Save Settings or select the Automatically save to checkbox to save the settings as a config.win file. Select the the changes. button in the Customize dialog box to accept
2.
1222
rI
nt
Figure 1219
er
na
lU
se
nl y
12.4Configuring the Model Tree

You can control what items and columns are displayed in the tree.
General Steps
Use the following general steps to customize the model tree: 1. 2. 3. Activate model tree settings. Make the desired changes. Save the settings.
Step 1: Activate model tree settings

To customize the model tree, select the Settings pull-down menu from the model tree as shown in Figure 1220.
ro
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
rI
nt
er
Figure 1220
na
lU
1223
se
nl y

The two options to control model tree setting are:
du ct io
Fo
Tree Columns
ro
The model tree can also be customized to include additional columns of information. To manipulate columns in the model tree, click Tree Columns from the Settings pull-down menu. The Model Tree Columns dialog box appears as shown in Figure 1222. There are two sections of this dialog box: Not Displayed and Displayed. The Not Displayed section lists the type and name of specific information that can be added to the tree. For example, Feat Name can be added to the tree to display the names of each of the features.
Pr e P
1224
rI
nt
Figure 1221
er
na
lU
se
Tree Filters
The model tree can be customized to filter (show or remove) specific information.To filter items, click Tree Filters from the Settings pull-down menu, as shown in Figure 1220. The Model Tree Items dialog box appears as shown in Figure 1221. Clear or select items in the dialog box to customize what is to be shown in the model tree. Displayed items are shown with the symbol adjacent to them. For example, you can customize the model tree to display all suppressed features by selecting the Suppressed Objects option.
nl y
Tree Filters Tree Columns
1. 2. 3. 4.
Select the column name from the Not Displayed section. Select the
Select the Select the columns.
Set the value for the width of the column. and buttons to reorder the columns.
du ct io
5.
Fo
Pr e P
ro
rI
To display additional columns you must move it to the Displayed section using the following steps:
button to move it to the Displayed section.
nt
button to complete reordering the model tree
er
Figure 1222
na
lU
1225
se
nl y
Figure 1223 shows a model tree that is configured to display the feature number and feature ID columns.
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
or buttons. The button activates the changes while leaving the dialog box open for further manipulation. Use the following steps to save the model tree settings and set the config.pro to use them for all Pro/ENGINEER sessions: 1.
2. 3.
4. 5.
Select Settings > Save File Settings.
Enter a name and location for the tree.cfg file. The model tree filter and column settings are stored in the tree.cfg file. Select Tools > Options to access the config.pro file. Set the config.pro option mdl_tree_cfg_file to point to the tree.cfg file. Select the button.
1226
The settings are applied to the current session by selecting the
Fo
Step 3: Save the settings
rI
nt
Figure 1223
er
na
lU
se
nl y
12.5Customizing the System colors

For complex assemblies, you may want to change the colors of parts and/or features to distinguish them from one another. Pro/ENGINEER enables you to customize the default system colors for such purposes. This ability is also useful for adding contrast and definition to presentation material. You can modify the overall color scheme, interface colors, or individual feature types.
General Steps
Use the following general steps to customize the system colors:
3.
Save the changes.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
2.
Make the desired changes.
na
1.
Open the System Colors dialog box.
lU
se
nl y
1227
Step 1: Open the System Colors dialog box

To customize the Pro/ENGINEER colors, click View > Display Settings > System Colors. The System Colors dialog box appears as shown in Figure 1224. This dialog box enables you to customize the colors of datum features, geometry, graphics, and/or the interface.
ro
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
1228
rI
nt
Figure 1224
er
na
lU
se
nl y

The System Colors dialog box is divided into the following tabs for customization: Graphics User Interface Datum Geometry
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
on your models. Select the button to change the color of any item. Once you finish selecting the new color, the box adjacent to the name of the item appears black, indicating that the default color has been modified. An example appears as shown in Figure 1225.
lU
Graphics
The Graphics tab enables you to modify the colors of certain features
se
O
1229
nl y
du ct io
Fo
User Interface
The User Interface tab enables you to modify the colors of your interface, such as text and background. The Datum tab enables you to modify the colors of all datum features, which include datum planes, axes, points and coordinate systems. The Geometry tab enables you to modify the colors of sketched geometry.
Pr e P
1230
ro
Datum
Geometry
rI
nt
Figure 1225
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Scheme
You can also change the color scheme of Pro/ENGINEER using the Scheme menu that appears at the top of the System Colors dialog box. Changing the color scheme is another way of building contrast in the appearance of your models. The Scheme menu is shown in Figure 1226.
Figure 1226
To save your changes, click File > Save in the System Colors dialog box and select the button. The Pro/ENGINEER interface appears with the new selected colors for the duration of the session. If you want to apply your new settings to the following sessions, you must point to the file with the saved settings in the config file option "system_colors_file".
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Step 3: Save the changes
na
lU
1231
se
nl y
Pr e P
1232
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 12a Customization
Goal
2.
du ct io
Fo
3.
Select hiddenvis for the value, as shown in Figure 1227.
4.
Select
5.
Pr e P
ro
Enter [prompt_on_erase_not_disp] as a second option. This option prompts you to save files that are to be erased when you click Erase > Not Displayed. Select yes as the value and select the button.
6. 7. 8. 9.
Enter [prompt_on_exit] and select a value of yes. This option prompts you to save the files in session when you exit. Select the button.
Select the button. The Find Option dialog box appears as shown in Figure 1228.
rI
Enter [display] in the Option field. Notice that you don't need to type the entire name; as soon as the system matches an option it completes the field. If the provided option is not correct, continue typing.
nt
to apply the option to the list.
er
1.
Click Tools > Options in the menu bar.
Figure 1227
na
Task 1: Make changes to the config.pro file.
lU
1233
9 9 9 9
Customize the config.pro Create mapkey Customize the toolbar Configure the model tree
se
nl y
In this exercise, you will customize the systems default settings to be user-specific.
du ct io
12. Set the value as [1] and select the 13. Enter the keyword [font] and select the
11. Select reserved_menu_space from the list in the Choose option section. This option reserves space on the right-hand side for the side menu. The default for reserved space is two menu columns, but It saves space for up to four.
Fo
10. Enter [space] as the keyword and select the to search all options.
rI
nt
Figure 1228 button
er
na
button. button. 14. Scroll through the results and select [menu_font]. This option controls the font of the menus. 15. Enter the value [times, italic bold, 10] and select the button. This sets the font to be times, bold and italic with a size of 10. 16. Select the button in the Find Option dialog box. button at the top of the button in
Pr e P
ro
17. To save the config.pro file, select the Options dialog box.
18. Enter [config.pro] as the name and select the the Save As dialog box.
1234
lU
se
nl y
19. Close the Options dialog box. Notice the font and window size have not changed yet. The only options that currently work are the first three. The display should now be set to hiddenvis and you are prompted on exit and when erasing non-displayed files. Task 2: Test the config.pro 1. 2. 3. 4.
Create a new part called [test] using the default template. Click File > Close Window. Test.prt is still in session but has not been saved to the hard drive. Click File > Erase > Not Displayed. Test.prt is now in the list. Select the button. The message area now displays the prompt, "All the objects that were not displayed have been erased".
8. 9.
The message area again displays a prompt to save the file EXIT.prt. Enter [No] and press the <Enter> key.
ro
du ct io
10. Open up another session of Pro/ENGINEER. The default window size is slightly larger and the font in the menu bar has changed. Task 3: Create a mapkey that will perform File > Save and File > Erase > Current. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open any part from the working directory. Click Tools > Mapkeys. Select the button.
Pr e P
Enter [se] as the key sequence. Enter [Save Erase] as the name for the mapkey.
Fo
7.
Click File > Exit and select Yes to exit.
rI
6.
Create another new part called [exit] using the default template.
nt
5.
Press the <Enter> key to save the file to the hard drive. You may receive a few more prompts if you had other files in session.
er
na
lU
se
nl y
1235
6.
Enter [Saves the current file and erases it from session] as the description. The mapkey dialog box appears as shown in Figure 1229.
Fo
du ct io
9.
10. Select the the button.
8.
Click File > Save and press <Enter>.
Click File > Erase > Current and select Yes. button to finish mapkey creation and select
11. Open any part from the working directory. 12. Press the letter sequence [se] to activate and test the mapkey. 13. Select the button to save this mapkey. button.
Pr e P
ro
14. Select the config.pro file and select the 15. Select the
7.
Select the
1236
rI
button to close the Mapkeys dialog box.
nt
Figure 1229 button.
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Task 4: Customize the Pro/ENGINEER interface. 1. 2. 3. 4. Open any part from the working directory. Click Tools > Customize Screen. Select the dialog box. button from the File category in the Customize
Drag the button to the toolbar as shown in Figure 1230. Drag and drop the new icon in the toolbar
6.
Select and drag the New Menu command to the top-level menu as shown in Figure 1231.
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
ro
7. 8.
Select the New Menu that you just placed and press the right mouse button. Click Rename and enter [Mapkeys] as the new name for the menu. Select the button.
rI
5.
Scroll through the categories to the bottom and select the New Menu category.
nt
Drag and drop the new menu
er
Figure 1230
Figure 1231
na
lU
1237
se
nl y
9.
To populate the new menu, select Mapkeys from the categories section in the Customize dialog box.
10. Select the Save Erase mapkey you created earlier. Drag the command to the new Mapkeys menu you just created. You can change the default button image by selecting the mapkey in the Customize dialog box and selecting Modify Selection. You can select or edit the image. 11. Place the command in the pull-down menu that appears. It appears as shown in Figure 1232.
13. Select New Flyout in the Commands section. 14. Drag and drop the flyout command to the toolbar, as shown in Figure 1233.
Fo
ro
du ct io
15. Select the Mapkeys category and drag the Save Erase Mapkey into the new flyout, as shown in Figure 1234.
Pr e P
16. Select, drag and drop the button that you placed on the toolbar earlier into the flyout, as shown in Figure 1235.
1238
rI
nt
Figure 1233
Figure 1234
er
na
12. Select the New Menu Category again.
lU
Figure 1232
se
nl y
2. 3. 4. 5.
Select the
Fo
Select the Suppressed Object option to display suppressed objects in the model tree. button to save the changes.
Select the Settings pull-down option from the model tree and click Tree Columns. Select Feat # from the Not Displayed list. Select the button to move it to the Displayed section.
du ct io
6. 7.
ro
8. 9.
Pr e P
10. Move the model tree display back as part of the navigation tab and select the 11. Select the button. button to save and erase the current file.
Repeat the steps to move Feat ID and Feat Name to the Displayed section. Select the button to save the changes. Notice the three columns have been added to the model tree. Select Tools > Customize Screen and select the Navigation Tab.
rI
nt
1.
Select the Settings pull-down option from the model tree and click Tree Filters.
er
Task 5: Customize the model tree.
na
19. Select the button to apply the changes. Notice the model tree is now on top of the window.
lU
18. Change the Placement of the model tree to Above graphics area in the Model Tree settings section.
se
17. Select the Navigation Tabs tab in the Customize dialog box.
Figure 1235
nl y
1239
Pr e P
1240
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Review Questions
Question 1
Question 3
Values for the configuration file options can be either selected or entered in the value field. a. b. True False
Question 4
b. c. d. Question 5
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
Once all the changes are made to the config.pro file, the changes should be applied to the Pro/ENGINEER session. Which of the following buttons applies these changes? a. b.
Question 6
Which of the following statements are true regarding mapkeys? a. b. c. Mapkeys enable you to record a series of menu selections that can be executed together as one keystroke. To create a mapkey, click Edit > Mapkey. Function keys cannot be used for the key sequence of a mapkey.
Fo
a.
rI
Which of the following buttons enables you to access the Find Option dialog box to search for a configuration file option?
nt
er
na
lU
se
Question 2
The config.pro is divided into two frames; the left-hand frame defines the _______________ and the right-hand frame defines its _______________, status and description.
nl y
1241
What is the name of the configuration file that is used to customize your user preferences? __________________
d. Question 7
Mapkeys can be paused during definition.
Mapkeys are stored to the config.win file.
b. Question 8
False
d.
Question 9
The display of the model tree can be independent of the Navigation window. a. b. True
Question 10
ro
Pr e P
1242
du ct io
Which of the following statements are true regarding customizing the model tree? a. b. c. d. Select the Settings pull-down menu in the model tree to access the customization options. The Tree Filters option enables you to filter the display of feature types. The Tree Columns option enables you to customize the display of the columns in the model tree. All changes made to the model tree are stored in the config.pro.
False
Fo
rI
Flyout toolbar options can be added to the toolbar to store multiple commands.
nt
er
c.
Mapkey buttons cannot be added to the main window display. You must activate the mapkey using the assigned keystroke.
na
b.
Command buttons can be added to the menu bar pull-down options.
lU
a.
Toolbars can be displayed at the top, left- or right-hand side of the main window.
se
Which of the following statements are true regarding customizing the Pro/ENGINEER interface?
nl y
a.
True
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
9Creating a New Drawing 9Placing Views 9Detailing 9Showing Dimensions 9Adding Notes
Drawings can be created from the models created in Part or Assembly mode. Drawings are associative, so a change made in the model reflects in the drawing. As well, a change made in the drawing reflects in the model.
Fo
rI
Drawing Basics
nt
er
Chapter 13
na
lU
131
se
nl y
132
lU
se
nl y
13.1 Creating a New Drawing
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
Create a new drawing. Place the first drawing view. Add additional views.
Manipulate drawing views, as necessary.
Detail the drawing (e.g., dimensions, notes, tolerances etc.).
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
To create a new drawing, select the button in the toolbar or click File > New in the menu bar. Select the Drawing option from the New dialog box and enter a name. The New Drawing dialog box appears as shown in .
Fo
Step 1: Create a new drawing
rI
nt
Print (or Plot) the drawing.
er
Manipulate detail items, as necessary.
na
lU
133
se
General Steps
Use the following general steps to create a drawing:
nl y
This chapter cover the process of creating a basic drawing of your model once you have completed it.
Fo
The sections in the New Drawing dialog box are described in Table 131. Table 131
du ct io
If a model is in session, Pro/ENGINEER assigns that model as the default model.
Default Model
Section
Specify Template
ro
Pr e P
Template (only available when the Use template option is selected) Format (only available when the Empty with format option is selected)
134
rI
Description Enter the name or select the button to specify the model to be displayed in the drawing. Select the Use template, Empty with format, or Empty option to specify whether you want to create the drawing with a predefined template, a format, or to leave the drawing empty. Enter the name or select the button to specify the template that is to be used in the drawing. Enter the name or select the button to specify the format that is to be used in the drawing.
nt
Figure 131
er
na
lU
se
The default option in the Specify Template section is dependent on whether the Use default template option is selected in the New dialog box. If selected the Use template option is selected by default, if cleared the Empty option is selected.
nl y
Section Orientation and Sheet Size (only available when the Empty option is selected)
Description Select the appropriate button to define the orientation of the drawing sheet (portrait, landscape, or variable) and set the sheet size for the drawing.
Templates
select the
button to create the drawing.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
When finished making your selections in the New Drawing dialog box,
er
na
Formats
A drawing format can contain standard information that is present in all drawings, such as the title block, company logo, BOM tables, etc. Drawing formats can be used in conjunction with drawing templates.
lU
A drawing template contains predefined views, sets the view display, creates snap lines, and shows preassigned model dimensions based on the information specified when the template was created. Templates are discussed further in Pro/ENGINEER: Design Documentation & Detailing.
se
nl y
135
Step 2: Place the first drawing view

Drawings created using a template already contain certain views. Additional views can be added at any time. Select the button from the toolbar or click Insert > Drawing View in the menu bar to create the first view. The first view in a drawing must be General, hence this being the only option originally available. Click Done in the VIEW TYPE menu to accept the remaining default options and select a location on the drawing to place the view. A general view is initially placed in its default orientation. To orient the model differently, use the Orientation dialog box. Selecting the reference type and reference in the Orientation dialog box is the same as selecting references when orienting models in Part or Assembly mode. Default datum planes or planar surfaces can be selected as references. Using default datum planes to orient the model is recommended to help prevent losing orientation references if a selected planar surfaces is later deleted. You can also orient the model using any of the saved views listed in the Saved Views section of the Orientation dialog box. The Orientation dialog box appears as shown in Figure 132.
du ct io
Pr e P
ro
Views can be oriented using Reference 1 and 2 options and selecting references on the model.
Views can also be oriented using any of the saved views from the model.
Fo
136
rI
nt
Figure 132
er
na
lU
se
nl y
For example, in Figure 133 the model is oriented into 2D by selecting a Front and Top reference on the model. Select this as the Top reference.
Step 3: Add additional views

Additional view types are available after the first general view is added, as shown in Figure 134.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
Once the orientation is defined, select the button from the Orientation dialog box to continue with drawing creation.
er
Figure 133
Figure 134
na
Select this as the Front reference.
lU
137
se
nl y
Similar to adding the first view, select the button or click Insert > Drawing View in the menu bar to add additional views. The VIEW TYPE menu appears as shown in Figure 135. Additional options are now available once the first general view has been added. If the drawing model is an assembly, an additional section is added to the VIEW TYPE menu that enables you to display the assembly as exploded.
View Type
rI
nt
Fo
Pr e P
138
ro
du ct io
An option must be selected from each section to place a view. Each section has a default option that can be maintained, if desired.
The VIEW TYPE menu is divided into the following four sections: View Type View Optionsf Cross-section Scale
Figure 135
er
na
Scale
View Options
Cross-section
lU
se
nl y
View Type
The view type section defines the type of drawing view that is added to the Drawing. The most common types of drawing views are shown in Figure 136 and described in Table 132.
Fo
rI
Option
Description A view that originally is displayed in 3D and can be oriented into 2D. An orthographic projection of an existing view. A selected portion of an existing view. A view projected 90 to a surface, datum, or axis. A cross-section revolved 90 about a cut line.
ro
Pr e P
du ct io
General Projection Detailed Auxiliary Revolved
nt
er
Figure 136 Table 132
na
lU
139
se
nl y
View Options
Fo
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Cross-Section
The cross-section options enable you to define whether the view will contain a cross-section or not. If the Section option is selected you are provided with additional options for defining how the cross-section will appear on the drawing. Figure 138 shows two of the basic cross-section types that can be used.
1310
rI
nt
Figure 137
Figure 138
er
na
lU
se
The view options enable you to highlight key areas of a drawing view.
nl y
The view options section of the dialog box enables you define the portion of the drawing view that is displayed in the drawing. For example you can add a General, Full View or a Projected, Half View. Depending on the view type that was selected, some view options will appear in gray, indicating that they are not available for selection. The available view options appear as shown in Figure 137.
Scale
The scale section defines whether the new view is added using the default drawing scale or whether an independent scale is applied.
Default Drawing Scale

The default drawing scale appears in the lower, left-hand corner of the drawing, as shown in Figure 139. The scale value is based on sheet and model size, and it affects all views in the drawing that are not independently scaled.
ro
du ct io
The scale values associated with individual views can be moved using the standard move tools. These are discussed later in this chapter.
Fo
An independent view scale can be added by selecting Scale in the View Type menu. The scale value is displayed directly below the view as shown in Figure 1310. Independent scaling is useful for views that you want to appear smaller or larger than the default scale allows.
rI
Pr e P
Once the options are all defined in the VIEW TYPE menu, click Done and place the view on the drawing. The message window will provide additional information on placing the view.
nt
Independent View Scale
er
Figure 139
Figure 1310
na
lU
1311
se
nl y
Step 4: Manipulate drawing views, as necessary
Delete Views
Deleted views are permanently removed from the drawing.
Views can be deleted from a drawing using any of the following methods.
Pr e P
ro
Change Scale
1312
du ct io
View Type
To place a view, options are selected from each section in the VIEW TYPE menu. If necessary, these options can be changed by double-clicking on the view and clicking View Type from the VIEW MODIFY menu. The original VIEW TYPE menu appears for you to make the necessary changes. To modify the default drawing scale, double-click on the scale value in the lower left-hand corner of the drawing and enter a value at the prompt. Changing this value affects the scale of all but independently scaled views. To modify the scale of an independently scaled view, double-click the view and click Change Scale in the VIEW MODIFY menu or select the value and click Edit Value in the right mouse button pop-up menu.
were placed. To enable movement of views, select the button in the toolbar or click Lock View Movement from the right-mouse pop-up menu to clear the option. Once unlocked you can select the view and drag it as required on the drawing. All dependent views move relative to their parents. Once you have finished moving a view it is recommended to relock the view movement.
Fo
rI
nt
Move Views
Views are automatically locked to the original location where they
er
Select the view and select the
na
Select the view and click Edit > Delete from the menu bar. Select the view, press the right mouse button and click Delete from the right mouse pop-up menu. Select the view and press the <Delete> button on the keyboard. button from the toolbar.
lU
se
nl y
Once views have been added to a drawing changes may be required. Some common changes that can be made to drawing views include the following:
Reorient
When placing certain types of views (i.e., General view) in a drawing, you are required to use the Orientation dialog box to orient the view. You can reorient these views by double-clicking on them and clicking Reorient in the VIEW MODIFY menu. Any dependent views (i.e. Projection views) update to reflect orientation changes. The cross-section that is selected when the view is placed can be replaced, deleted, renamed, or have its direction flipped. To access these options, double-click on the view and click X-Section in the VIEW MODIFY menu. In addition to these options, you can modify the cross-hatching for the section. For example, you can customize such things as the spacing and angle of the cross-section lines. To access these options, double-click on the cross-section lines and use the MOD XHATCH menu.
Cross-Section
Boundaries
View Display
By default, all views are displayed according to the view display button that is selected in the toolbar (e.g., or ). This setting affects all the views in the drawing. To independently set the display for each view you can double-click on the view and click View Disp in the VIEW MODIFY menu. This option accesses the VIEW DISP menu, enabling you to customize the view display for the selected view. Once set, the view display for the view is independent of settings made in the Pro/ENGINEER session.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
When placing a Detailed view type or when using the Broken or Partial view option, you are required to sketch a boundary to place the view. The boundary is sketched using a spline. Once placed it can be resketched by double-clicking the view and clicking Boundary from the VIEW MODIFY menu.
er
na
lU
se
nl y
1313
Step 5: Detail the drawing

Once drawing views are placed on a drawing, you can add dimensions and notes to communicate information to manufacturing. These items are associative and will therefore update with changes in other views and with modifications to the model.
Fo
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Model dimensions refer to the dimensions that are used to create the part model. To show or erase model dimensions, complete the following steps: 1. Select the button from the toolbar or click View > Show and Erase in the menu bar. The Show / Erase dialog box appears as shown in Figure 1312. The Show options are activated by selecting the button at the top of the dialog box. To button.
1314
Showing or Erasing Model Dimensions
display the erase options, select the
rI
nt
Dimensions can be created in Drawing mode, but these dimensions do not drive the geometry. Only those dimensions displayed directly from the model can drive the geometry.
Figure 1311
er
na
lU
se
Dimensions
Dimensions can be shown or created to provide the required dimensional information for manufacturing the model, as shown in Figure 1311.
nl y
2.
du ct io
Select the button in the Type section to indicate the model dimension that will be shown or erased. Table 133 describes additional detail items that can be added or removed from a drawing.
Fo
rI
Button
Description Reference Dimension Geometric Tolerance Note Balloon Axis
nt
er
Figure 1312
Table 133
Button Description Symbol Surface Finish Datum Plane Cosmetic Feature Datum Target
Pr e P
ro
na
lU
1315
se
nl y
Table 134
Option Feature Selected Items Part View Feature and View Part and View Description
Erases the item types for a selected item.
Displays or erases the selected type for a selected part in any view. Displays or erases the selected type for a selected view. Displays or erases the selected type for a selected feature in a selected view. Displays or erases the selected type for a selected part in a selected view. Displays all the selected item types for a drawing.
4.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
The Options tab at the bottom of the Show / Erase dialog box is only available when showing items. This tab enables you to customize which items you are showing. For example, when showing dimensions you can use the Erased option to ensure that dimensions that were previously erased are shown or you can use the Never Shown option to only show new items that have never been erased before. The Preview tab at the bottom of the Show / Erase dialog box is also only available when showing items. This tab enables you to select whether to show a preview before an item is added to the drawing. If the With Preview option is enabled you must use the remaining options to accept or reject items. Select the erasing all items. button when finished showing or
5.
6.
1316
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
Displays or erases the selected item type for a selected feature in any view.
nl y
The options in the Show By and Erase By sections help you to define more specifically what you want to show or erase on the drawing.
3.
Select an option in the Show By or Erase By sections. These options enable you to filter how detail items are added or removed from the model. All of the options described in Table 134 can be used when showing or erasing any detail item types.
Creating Dimensions
When showing dimensions, only those that were created in the model are displayed. If a required dimension does not exist in the model (and therefore is not shown), it can be created. Since created dimensions are driven by the model geometry, their values cannot be modified; however, these values automatically update if the geometry changes in the part. Only shown dimension values can be modified to change the model. To create a dimension, click Insert > Dimension > New References in the menu bar. Select references on a drawing view and place the dimension with the middle mouse button. Dimensions created in Drawing mode use the same creation methods as in Sketcher mode.
du ct io
Fo
To start the creation of a note, click Insert > Note. The NOTE TYPES menu appears enabling you to define how the note is added to the drawing. You can customize the following: How the leader for the note is displayed (e.g., no leader, leader, ISO leader) How the text for the note is entered (e.g., entered at prompt or read from a file) How the text is displayed (e.g., horizontal, vertical) How the text is justified (e.g., left, center, right)
Pr e P
ro
Once the options in the NOTE TYPE menu are defined, click Make Note to create the note. Instructions are included in the message window as you are creating and placing the note.
1317
rI
nt
er
Figure 1313
na
Notes
Notes can be added to detail the drawing, as shown in Figure 1313.
lU
se
nl y
Fo
Pr e P
Move Detail Items Erase
ro
1318
du ct io
Step 6: Manipulate detail items, as necessary
Once detail items have been added to a drawing changes may be required. Some common changes that can be made to detail items include the following: To move detail items, select them and drag as necessary.
You can erase detail items using the Show / Erase dialog box as was previously explained. As an alternative, you can also select the item in the drawing and click Erase in the right mouse button pop-up menu.
rI
nt
Figure 1314
er
na
Modifications to the part will update in the note.
lU
se
During note creation, dimensions are displayed in their symbolic form.
nl y
Notes can incorporate parametric information that updates as the model changes. An ampersand (&) symbol is used to incorporate parametric information. For example, the parametric note shown in Figure 1314 is entered as [&d23 DRILL- &P0 HOLES], where &d23 and &P0 reference dimension values from the model. When you include parametric information, modifications to the size or number of holes in the pattern automatically update in the note.
Edit Values
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
To set dimension tolerances, select the dimension(s) and click Properties in the right mouse pop-up menu. The Dimension Properties dialog box appears as shown in Figure 1315.
Fo
rI
Dimensional Tolerances
To enable dimension tolerances in Drawing mode, the Drawing Options file must have the Tol_Display option set to YES. To access the Options dialog box and set the value, click File > Properties > Drawing Options.
nt
er
Figure 1315
1319
na
lU
Move Item to View
When detail items such as dimensions are shown on the drawing, they are not necessarily displayed on the required view. To switch detail items between views, select the dimension(s), click Move Item to View in the right mouse button pop-up menu, and select the new view in which you want to display it. You can select multiple items to be moved by pressing and holding the <Ctrl> key as you are selecting the items.
se
Flip Arrows
Change the direction of arrows using the Flip Arrows option in the right mouse button pop-up menu.
nl y
The value for a model dimension can be modified directly in Drawing mode and the change reflects in the model. To modify a dimension value, select the dimension and click Edit Value in the right mouse button pop-up menu. Created dimensions cannot be modified; however, changes to the model geometry reflect in an updated dimension value.
The available tolerance modes are listed in Table 135. Table 135
Option Nominal +/- Symmetric Plus-Minus Limits Example
1.25 0.05 1.25 1.30 1.20
Step 7: Print (or Plot) the drawing

To print or plot a drawing, select the button from the toolbar or click File > Print in the menu bar. The Print dialog box appears with all the plotting options as shown in Figure 1316.
ro
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
To print the file you must define the destination printer from the pull-down list and configure it if necessary. You must also select whether the file is printed to the printer or to a file, and the number of copies.
1320
rI
nt
Figure 1316
er
na
lU
se
nl y
1.25
Exercise 13a Create a Drawing

Goal
Fo
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
9 Place and manipulate drawing views 9 Show and manipulate drawing dimensions 9 Create notes on a drawing
Task 1: Create a drawing and open a format.
1. 2. 3.
Select the
Select the Drawing option from the Type section of the New dialog box. Enter [base] as the drawing name.
rI
button.
nt
er
Figure 1317
na
lU
1321
se
nl y
In this exercise, you will create the drawing shown in Figure 1317 using a predefined format. To complete the drawing you will add all the necessary views, dimensions and notes and manipulate them as necessary to match the detail shown in Figure 1317.
4.
Clear the Use default template option to create the drawing without a template. Select the button. button to
5. 6. 7.
Enter [base] as the Default Model or use the browse to base.prt.
Select the Empty with format option from the Specify Template section of the New Drawing dialog box. Enter [Rand] or select the button to browse to the rand.frm format file. A drawing sheet is displayed in the main window. Select the button to finalize drawing creation.
8.
9.
Task 2: Add four views to the drawing. The views shown in Figure 1318 are created in the following steps.
du ct io
Fo
rI
2nd View 1st View
Pr e P
ro
1322
nt
Figure 1318
er
4th View 3rd View
na
lU
se
nl y
As an alternative, you can also click Insert > Drawing View... in the menu bar to add a view. Since the first view must be a General view, all other view options are grayed out until the first view is placed.
1.
Select the button to add the first view. Click Done to accept the defaults (General > Full View > No Xsec > No Scale > Select the location on the screen to place the first General view, as shown in Figure 1319. Orient the default view as shown in Figure 1319. Use the default datums for the orientation references or select Front from the Saved View section of the Orientation dialog box.
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
ro
rI
nt
er
Figure 1319
na
lU
4.
Select the button to complete the view placement. The view appears as shown in Figure 1319.
se
3.
nl y
1323
2.
5. 6. 7. A Projected view cannot have an independent scale. It must have the same scale as its parent General view.
Select the button to place the second view, as shown in Figure 1320. Click Done to accept the defaults (Projection > Full View > No Xsec > No Scale).
Fo
Pr e P
1324
ro
du ct io
rI
nt
Figure 1320
er
na
lU
se
Select a location above the existing general view. The new view appears as shown in Figure 1320.
nl y
8. 9.
Select the button to add the third view, as shown in Figure 1321. Click Projection > Full View > Section > No scale > Done.
10. Click Done to accept the default cross-section types. 11. Select a location to place the third view. 12. Select cross-section A from the menu.
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
ro
rI
nt
er
Figure 1321
na
lU
13. Read the message window. Select the first general view to indicate the location to place the cross-section arrows. The new view appears as shown in Figure 1321.
se
O
1325
nl y
14. Select the button to add the fourth view, as shown in Figure 1322. 15. Click General > Partial View > No Xsec > Scale > Done. Datum planes can be turned off in the Environment dialog box. 16. Select a location to place the fourth view. 17. Enter [.3] as the scale. 18. Select the
ro
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
1326
rI
nt
Figure 1322
er
na
20. Sketch a spline around the area to be displayed. Complete the spline by pressing the middle mouse button. The new view appears as shown in Figure 1322.
lU
19. Select a vertex on the fourth view that represents the center of the partial portion.
se
button to close the Orientation dialog box.
nl y
Task 3: Modify the scale of the drawing and move the views. 1. Select the scale in the lower, left-hand corner of the drawing and click Edit > Value in the menu bar or click Edit Value from the right mouse pop-up menu.
2. Alternatively, you can click Lock View Movement on the right mouse pop-up menu to unlock the view. 3.
Enter [0.4]. Notice that the scale of the fourth view remains set at 0.3 because this view has an independent scale to the drawing.
The views may be locked to prevent movement by the mouse. To unlock the views and enable movement, select the
se
4.
ro
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
rI
nt
er
Figure 1323
na
Select the views individually and move them as shown in Figure 1323. Notice how moving a parent view reflects in the placement of dependent views.
lU
nl y
button.
1327
Task 4: Change the third and fourth views from Hidden Line to No Hidden display. 1. 2. To modify the view display for multiple views at once, press and hold the <Ctrl> key while selecting the views, click Properties in the right-mouse pop-up menu and click View Disp. 3. Double-click on the third view and click View Disp in the VIEW MODIFY menu. Click No Hidden > Done.
Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for the fourth view. The drawing appears as shown in Figure 1324.
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
1328
ro
rI
nt
Figure 1324
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Task 5: Show the dimensions of the base feature.
1. 2. You can also click Edit > Show and Erase in the menu bar to open the Show/Erase Dialog box. 3.
Select the
button to open the Show/Erase Dialog Box.
Select the button. The Feature option is selected by default in the Show By section. Leave this selection.
4.
Select the button and select the drawing appears as shown in Figure 1325.
lU
se
Select the base feature (F4(PROTRUSION)) in any one of the four views. Use Query Sel or select the feature in the model tree, if necessary. button. The
ro
du ct io
Fo
Pr e P
rI
nt
er
Figure 1325
na
nl y
1329
Task 6: Show the dimensions of the U-shaped cut and the hole in the boss (Cut id 1217). 1. Show the dimensions for the U-shaped cut, as shown in Figure 1326. If the cut was copied you must select the original. Try each if necessary.
2.
Task 7: Erase the dimensions for the boss hole. 1. 2. 3. Select the Select the
button in the Show / Erase dialog box. button.
Pr e P
ro
1330
du ct io
Using the Feature and View option may not show all dimensions for a feature. It may show only the ones that are capable of appearing in the selected view.
3.
Task 9: Continue to select features to show dimensions. 1. 2. 3. Show dimensions for the remaining features.
2.
Select the Feat and View option.
Use Pick From List to select the hole in the second view.
After all dimensions are displayed, select the button as a final check to ensure all the dimensions are displayed. Close the Show / Erase dialog box.
1.
Select the
Fo
Task 8: Show the boss hole dimensions using the Feature and View option. button and the button.
rI
nt
Select the Feature option and select the hole. Repaint the screen if necessary.
er
na
lU
se
Show the dimensions for the hole in the boss (Cut id 1217), as shown in Figure 1326. Use Pick From List in the right mouse pop-up menu if selecting the hole in the first or third view. The default location of dimensions may not be where desired but they can be switched.
nl y
Task 10: Arrange the dimensions. 1. Use the options on the toolbar or in the right-mouse pop-up menu to rearrange the locations of the dimensions, as shown in Figure 1326.
Fo
du ct io
Task 11: Create additional dimensions. Dimensions are created similar to sketcher dimensions. Created dimensions update with any part changes, but they cannot be modified to drive part geometry. 1. Click Insert > Dimension > New References in the menu bar. Create some dimensions in the drawing.
ro
2.
Pr e P
rI
nt
er
Figure 1326
na
lU
1331
se
Model dimensions can be shown only once on a drawing.
nl y
Task 12: Delete some dimensions. Alternatively, click Edit > Delete in the menu bar. 1. 2. Select any of the created dimensions and select the on the toolbar or press the <Delete> key. button
nt
er
na du ct io n Fo Pr e P ro
1. Click Insert > Note or select the note.
lU
You will create the three notes shown in Figure 1327.
rI
Figure 1327 button to create the first
When you click Make Note, the dimensions change to their symbolic format.
2. 3. 4.
Define the type of note by clicking No Leader > Enter > Horizontal > Standard > Default > Make Note. Select a location to place the note, as shown in Figure 1327. Enter [Cast Bronze-Graphite Impregnated]. The palette window is used to enter symbols later.
1332
se
Note C
Task 13: Create note A.
Try deleting a part dimension. Model dimensions cannot be deleted because they are required to define the model. Model dimensions can only be erased.
nl y
5.
Press the <Enter> key to complete the note and then press the <Enter> key again to quit adding any further lines to the note.
Task 14: Create note B. 1. 2. 3. Click Leader. Accept the remaining defaults. Click Make Note.
4. 5. 6. 7.
Select the
button and click Done.
Enter [Break Sharp Corners] as the note. Press the <Enter> key twice to quit the note creation.
Task 15: Create Note C. 1. 2. 3. 4. As symbols are selected from the palette, their ASCII value appears in the message window preceded by an ^A and followed by ^B.
Click Make Note to accept the NOTE TYPE menu defaults. Select any one of the counterbore holes.
du ct io
5.
Pr e P
ro
Select a location to place the note.
Enter the note shown in Figure 1328. Select all but the ampersand (&) symbol from the palette window. Enter the ampersand symbol using the keyboard. Place the cursor back in the prompt area and continue to enter the note. Press the <Enter> key once after you complete each of the first two lines, and twice after the third line.
Select the
Fo
6.
Click Done Return.
rI
nt
button and click Done.
er
Figure 1328
na
Select a location to place the note.
lU
1333
se
Read the message window and select the boss edge, as shown in Figure 1327.
Click On Entity > Arrowhead to define the type of attachment for the leader, but do not click Done.
nl y
Task 16: Modify Note A. 1. 2. 3. Select Note A, click Edit > Properties in the menu bar.
3.
Save the drawing and erase all the files from memory.
Pr e P
1334
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
2.
Select the note and drag the leader to relocate the leader.
lU
1.
Move the notes by selecting the note and dragging it to a new location.
se
Task 17: Move the notes and save the drawing.
Select the button to close the Enter Text dialog box and update the note.
nl y
The Enter Text dialog box appears, where you can modify and edit the text for the note. Edit the note to span two lines.
Exercise 13b Create a Drawing with a Template

Goal
In this exercise you will use a template to create a drawing. After you complete this exercise, you will be able to:
9 Use a template for drawing

Task 1: Create the drawing. 1. 2. 3.
Create a new drawing. Enter [Template] as the drawing name.
4. The process to create your own templates is covered in the Pro/ENGINEER: Design Documentation and Detailing. 5.
Select the
The template automatically places the views and you do not have to manually add each of them individually as you did in the previous exercise. Using templates for drawing creation can significantly increase you productivity in Drawing mode. Save the drawing and erase all the files from memory.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
6.
Fo
rI
nt
the template in the New Drawing dialog box. Select the button to browse to these files. button.
er
Select base.prt as the default model and rand_template.drw as
na
Select the Use default template option to create a drawing using the default template.
lU
se
1335
nl y
Pr e P
1336
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Exercise 13c Create a Drawing using Additional Tools

Goal
In this exercise, you will use all of the drawing tools that you have learned in this chapter to create the drawing shown in Figure 1329. Tips are provided for you to create the radial circle of dimensions for the pattern of holes. After you complete this exercise, you will be able to:
Task 1: Create a drawing. 1. 2.
Open part cover.prt and review its features. Create the drawing shown in Figure 1329.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Figure 1329
na
lU
9 Create a drawing 9 Detail a radial circle for patterned holes
se
1337
nl y
Use the following information to help you create the radial circle for the pattern: Edit an option in the drawing setup file. Click File > Properties > Drawing Options, edit the radial_pattern_axis_circle option and set the option to yes. Show the axis for this view using View > Show and Erase options. Save the drawing and erase the files from memory.
3.
Pr e P
1338
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Review Questions
Question 1
b. c.
Empty with format Empty
Question 2
Which of the following View Types must be the first view in a drawing? a. b. c. d. Projection Auxiliary General Detailed
du ct io
c.
d.
Question 4
ro
An independent view scale enables you to ensure that a view maintains the same scale value as the drawing. a. b. True False
Pr e P
b.
Auxiliary General
Detailed
a.
Projection
Fo
Question 3
Which of the following View Types enables you to create a 3D view in its default orientation?
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
1339
a.
Use template
nl y
Which of the following Specify Template options enables you to define the orientation of the drawing sheet and set the sheet size for the drawing?
Question 5
Which of the following references can be selected when orienting a view? (Hint: There is more than one correct answer) a. b. c. d. datum planes
planar surfaces cylindrical surfaces
Question 6
a. b. c. d.
button in the toolbar. button in the toolbar.
Click Unlock on the right mouse pop-up menu.
Question 7
ro
Question 8
Pr e P
1340
du ct io
b. c.
d.
Which of the following Show By options enables you to show a dimension for a selected feature in a selected view? a. b. c. d. Feature View Feature and View Part
a.
View Type
Reorient Boundary View Disp
Which of the following options in the VIEW MODIFY menu enables you to redefine a Projected view to a General view.
Fo
rI
Click Lock View Movement to clear the checkmark on the right mouse pop-up menu.
nt
er
na
lU
Views are automatically locked to the original location where they were placed. Which of the following options or buttons will enable you to unlock the view movement?
se
nl y
datum axis
Question 9
Which of the following buttons enables you to show or erase model dimensions from a drawing? a. b. c. d.
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
b.
False
er
a.
True
na
Question 10
To modify a created dimension value, select the dimension and click Edit Value from the right mouse pop-up menu.
lU
se
1341
nl y
Pr e P
1342
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Pr e P
Appendix A
ro du ct io n Fo rI nt er na
lU
se
nl y
lU
se
nl y
Table M6 describes all of the geometry creation options. Table M6

Geometry Line Button Procedure
Line tangent to two entities
Fo
du ct io
Rectangle
Circle Concentric Circle
Pr e P
ro
Three-point Circle Three-tangent Circle
rI
nt
Centerline
Select the location where you want to intersect the centerline. A centerline appears attached to the cursor. Select a second location through which the centerline should pass. Pro/ENGINEER creates a centerline through the two points. Place one vertex with the left mouse button and drag the rectangle to the desired size. To place the other vertex, click the left mouse button. Select the centerpoint and a point on the circle. Select a reference circle or an arc to define the centerpoint (the selected reference circle can be a sketched entity or a model edge). As you move the cursor, the circle rubberbands until you press the left mouse to finish. Select three points as points on the circle. Select three lines for tangency to form the circle.
er
Select the location where you want the line to be tangent to an entity. A rubberband line appears attached to the cursor. Select a second location where you want the line to be tangent to an entity. Press the middle mouse button to complete the line creation.
na
lU
se
Select the location where you want to start the line. A rubberband line appears attached to the cursor. Click the location where you want to end the line. Continue to click to create additional attached lines. Click the middle mouse button to complete line creation
nl y
3
Geometry Full Ellipse
Button
Procedure
Select the centerpoint, drag the rubberband ellipse and place it with the left mouse button. Select the endpoints for the arc and an additional point on the arc.
Three-point Arc Tangent Arc
Fo
Three-tangent Arc Conic Arc
du ct io
Circular Fillet
Pr e P
ro
Elliptical Fillet
rI
Center and Ends Arc
nt
Select the centerpoint of the arc and the endpoints of the arc. Select the three lines for tangency to form the arc. Select a start point, an endpoint, and then drag the mouse to the desired position to complete the geometry. The endpoints have angular dimensions and are located with respect to the part. The conic has a rho dimension Select the first line using the left mouse button. Select the second line using the left mouse button. Pro/ENGINNER creates a circular fillet from the selected point that is closest to the intersection point of the two lines and trims the lines to the intersection point. Select the first line using the left mouse button. Select the second line using the left mouse button. Two dimensions are required: an X-radius and a Y-radius.
er
na
lU
Concentric Arc
Select a reference circle or an arc to define the centerpoint (the selected reference circle can be a sketched entity or a model edge). As you move the cursor, the circle rubberbands to the required diameter. Press the left mouse button at the required diameter to start the arc, drag the mouse around the diameter and press the left mouse again to complete the arc.
se
Select an endpoint of an existing entity to define tangency, then select a location for the other endpoint of the arc.
nl y
Geometry Spline Curve
Button
Procedure
Sketch the spline by clicking the left mouse button in several locations. Click the middle button to complete the spline. Select on the sketch to place the point.
Points Reference Coordinate System Use Edge Offset
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
Axis point
N/A
Click Sketch > Axis Point and select on the sketch to place the axis point. When the feature is extruded, an axis is created through the point and normal to the sketching plane. The axis is not a separate feature; it belongs to the extruded feature in which it was created.
na
Select the entities to use, can select entities as Single, Chain, or Loop, and specify a dimension.
lU
Select the entities to use, can select entities as Single, Chain, or Loop.
se
Select on the sketch to place the reference coordinate system. The coordinate system is local to the sketch only.
nl y
5
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Pr e P
Appendix B
lU
se
nl y
lU
se
nl y
Table M7 describes all of the sketcher editing tools options. Table M7 Editing Tool Divide Button Description Breaks two entities at their intersection point or at a selected point on the line.
Dynamically Trim Mirror
Trims entities by selecting the portion of the entity to be removed. Mirrors selected entities about a centerline.
rI
Import
Fo
Copy
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
nt
Scale, Rotate and Translate
N/A
er
Rotates selected entities about a point, or translates entities to desired location or scales entities to desired size. Copies selected entities.
Click Sketch > Data from file and select the required sketch. Scale, rotate, and translate as necessary.
na
lU
se
Corner
Trims entities (cuts or extends) to other entities. Select the portion of the entity to keep.
nl y
3
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Pr e P
Appendix C
lU
se
nl y
lU
se
nl y
Table M8 describes all of the sketcher constraint options. Table M8

Constraint Vertical Horizontal Perpendicular Tangent Middle Point Symmetry Equal Parallel Button Description Makes a line or 2 vertices vertical.
Makes two entities perpendicular. Makes 2 entities tangent.
Places a point on the midpoint of a line. Creates same points, points on entity, or collinear constraint. Makes selected entities symmetrical about a centerline. Creates equal lengths, equal radii or same curvature constraint.
Fo
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
rI
nt
Makes two lines parallel.
er
na
lU
3
se
Makes a line or 2 vertices horizontal.
nl y
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
nl y
Pr e P
Appendix D
lU
se
nl y
lU
se
nl y
Table M9 describes all of the dimension type options. Table M9

Dimension Type Linear Procedure Select entities with left mouse button and place dimension with middle mouse button. Example
du ct io
Radius
Pr e P
ro
Fo
Center/Tang ential
Select two entities (circle or arc) and place the dimension using the middle mouse button.
Select an arc or a circle once and place the dimension using the middle mouse button.
rI
nt
er
na
lU
3
se
nl y
Dimension Type Diameter
Procedure Select an arc or circle twice and place the dimension using the middle mouse button. Select two lines and place the dimension using the middle mouse button. The angle is dependent on the placement of the dimension.
Example
Arc Angles
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Select the arc, then select the two end points and place the dimension using the middle mouse button.
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
se
Angular
nl y
Dimension Type Revolved
Procedure Select geometry, centerline, and geometry or centerline, geometry, and centerline. Place the dimension using the middle mouse button.
Example
Pr e P
ro
du ct io
Fo
rI
nt
er
na
lU
5
se
nl y

Intro To Solid Modeling I Ra-t-151-WF-01 PreProduction Inter

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Intro To Solid Modeling I Ra-t-151-WF-01 PreProduction Inter

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ro

Delivered to you by:

Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I Wildfire Pre-Production Release

Initial Printing for Wildfire Pre-Production Release

ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge

Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I

ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge

Exercise 2b Extruded Base Protrusions II ......................... 2-33

ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge

Chapter 4 Sketching Geometry................................................... 4-1

Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I

Exercise 3b Coaxial Hole .................................................... 3-35

ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge

Using Existing Geometry ............................................. 5-6

ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge

Creation Sequence...................................................... 6-19

Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I

Chapter 7 Creating Datum Features ........................................... 7-1

ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge

ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge

Exercise 10a Relations ...................................................... 10-15 Goal.................................................................. 10-15

Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I

ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge

Exercise 11b Mirror / Pattern ............................................ 11-29

Chapter 12 Customizing Pro/ENGINEER ................................. 12-1

Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I

Exercise 11c Copy/Mirror.................................................. 11-33

Exercise 11a Patterning .................................................... 11-19

ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge

Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I

Chapter 13 Drawing Basics ....................................................... 13-1

Exercise 12a Customization ............................................. 12-33

ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge

Appendix B ....................................................................................B-1 Appendix D ....................................................................................D-1

Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I

Exercise 13c Create a Drawing using Additional Tools. 13-37

This chapter introduces:

9Solid Modeling 9Pro/ENGINEER Fundamentals 9Design Intent 9Pro/ENGINEER Interface

ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge

1.1 Solid Modeling

Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I

Part model is referenced to create drawing views.

ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge

Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I

Models can be placed relative to one another to create an assembly

ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge

1.2 Pro/ENGINEER Fundamentals

Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I

ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge

1st (Base) Feature: Extrude

2nd Feature: Drafts

3rd Feature: Rounds

4th Feature: Shell

5th Feature: Extrude

7th Feature: Copy

Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I

6th Feature: Hole

ASCENT - Center for Technical Knowledge

Pick and Place features

Parent/child relationships are formed between features as a model is created.

Pro/ENGINEER: Introduction to Solid Modeling I

References are discussed in Chapter 2.